Home

Visionscape I-PAK HE User Manual V374

1. am e oc 7060 Pass Z When the queue reaches the maximum number of images and an additional failure occurs the first image in the queue gets ovawritten by the new failed image 1 10 lt Date Time 12 20 52 7 Aug Indicates the Oldest and First Failed Image is Displayed Click Show Hide Failed Image Queue to return to the regular I PAK HE Camera display Click the Zoom buttons to bring the displayed failed image to the desired magnification level e Reset Interval Counters Click this button Figure 7 5 to reset the interval counters to zero FIGURE 7 5 Reset Interval Counters Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 5 Chapter r Run Mode Reference e Exit to Change Lot Click this button Figure 7 6 to display the Lot ChangeOver dialog box you will be prompted to enter a password Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Enable Change Lot in Run Mode must be selected Hotkey ALT C FIGURE 7 6 Exit to Change Lot asm Sample ocvfonttools Change Lot eee Operator e Exit to Setup Mode Click this button Figure 7 7 to exit Run Mode and enter Setup Mode You will be prompted to enter a correct Programmer or Supervisor password to get into Setup Mode with that access level This is a Programmer or Supervisor level function Hotkey ALT S FIGURE 7 7 Exit to Setup Mode ST y Zela sample ocvfonttools Setup
2. Backspace 5 Type 0101 and click Enter This places you in Programmer Mode and displays the Setup Mode window as shown in Figure 2 26 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 23 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 26 I PAK HE Setup Mode Window Yissonscape 1 PAK HE 3 1 2 Setup Mode Fie Access Level Calbration Meru image Help NED ee eae fetter aA dene bea PM a oo os Please chek button for deseed suhmenu teens TT TT TT o P e BO 6 Click Advanced Settings 7 Click Create a Product I PAK HE displays the Select a Vision Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 27 2 24 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 27 Select a Vision Device Dialog Box Product Settings Vision Devices N Hardware Selection p Run l Pak on Up to 4 Smart Cameras by Selecting them from the List Below and then Clicking Here a oO es ae OF cl or a S Available Smart Cameras Network E HawkEyeE1000E OF HawkEyeE10065 OF HawkEyeE10028 E HawkEyeE 1FFOO MyHawkEye_1600T EF Chris1 600TS Et HawkEyeE 10003 Eb HawkEyeE 1FFFB Press Ctrl Key to Select Multiple Devices Press Shift Key to Select a Range 8 Select a device Then click the button above the device you selected 9 This displays the Product Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 2 28 10 For Camera 1 change Ca
3. fi 0 11 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the Product Setting dialog box I O tab as shown in Figure 2 9 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 9 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 9 Product Settings I O Tab 8 Point IO Board r Fixed I0 Points 1 tn TiggerOCamerat SSC 2 WT jine x4 a WET Noe 4 4 OT jine TT r General Purpose I0 Points 1 Out Data Valid Inspection 1 of 2 Dut x Inspection 1 Passed x 3 Out gt Overrun Camera 1 Si 4 Jou i ihe 12 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box Communication tab as shown in Figure 2 10 FIGURE 2 10 System Settings Dialog Box Communication Tab r Selection Input Channel None Output Channel None Configure RS232 Ethernet TCP IP 2 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool 13 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box Training and Results tab as shown in Figure 2 11 FIGURE 2 11 System Settings Dialog Box Training and Results Tab N Product ChangeO ver Activities IV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver F Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot T7 Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Archive Path Fj Resu
4. oO This becomes active after you enable 21 CFR Part 11 Configure Supervisor Access Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 A Programmer can use the following procedure to enable 21 CFR Part 11 Le md h al oc TI N 1 Exit Run Mode 2 Click Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General 3 Click to select Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 4 Type a reason in the Reason for Change dialog box and click OK 5 Click OK again When I PAK HE returns to Setup Mode the 21 CFR Part 11 menu is displayed as shown in Figure 3 2 FIGURE 3 2 21 CFR Part 11 Menu File Access Level 21 CFR Parti1 Calibration Menu Image End of Batch Reports Reconcile Configuration Files Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 3 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 The I PAK Administrator After 21 CFR Part 11 is enabled the traditional I PAK HE Programmer and Supervisor passwords will not be used Instead User Login and Passwords will be used Plus the concept of an I PAK Administrator is introduced An I PAK Administrator is responsible for creating user accounts and granting access levels to those users Notice also that the 21 CFR Part 11 Administrator menu item becomes active I PAK Administrator mode allows the I PAK Administrator to define valid users their passwords and their security levels The I PAK Administrator is your Configuration Manager He o
5. Cumert Tool OOVFeeless Tool Scamenott Poni oastea nnezo 211 PM 25 The Train button shows red and the OCVFontless Tool is displayed Drag the tool and place it around the appropriate text as shown in Figure 2 19 Drag the AutoFind Tool and place it around the appropriate text as shown in Figure 2 19 2 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 19 Fontless FontTool Position Visionscape 1 PAK HE 3 7 2 Setup Mode Image Mashing Tool Helo MICROSCAN fay Product gt birk Viesos rei zn gt Xw n Ya 147 5 Wa496 He 75 or Cumert Tool OCVFortless Tol Seomstenot1 Poni Disatied irera 213P 26 Click Train The Train button shows green This indicates a successful train 27 Click Next The Next button text will change to Finish 28 Click Finish Click Options This displays the Options dialog box as shown in Figure 2 20 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 17 N ro Oo gs a2 OF cl or a S Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 20 Options Dialog Box CTIE xi m Control Options J Do Acquire IV Show 1 0 Results T Triggered 1 0 or Sensor Fm Loop F Delay Cancel 29 Click to select Loop and click OK 30 Click Try All This places the Job in a continuous loop allowing you to observe your recently created Job 31 Click Try Stop and then click Exit Tr
6. Note Refer to Keyboard Input of Match String on page 5 78 for more information e Transmit Final Inspection String Enabling this setting allows I PAK HE to send out the final inspection string after training an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool e 9 c o re B T 52 Or d Note Refer to Transmit Final Inspection String on page 5 88 for more information Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 89 Chapter Setup Mode Reference System Settings General Tab FIGURE 6 64 System Settings Dialog Box General Tab Job Settings Runtime Inspection Priority Realtime Me End Batch J Enable End Batch Functionality 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration F Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 F Enable Configuration File Audit Trail F Enable User Logins for Training Approvals F Set Passwords to Expire SMinutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes r Set Time Limit for System Inactivity Revert to Operator Mode r Set Number of Failed Login Attempts M Enable Saving Stats and Contig Files from Stats Menu F Use GnScreen Keypad instead of PE Keyboard Menu Settings C Streamline Menus Show All Menu Options Advanced Users IV Enable Change Lot In Run Mode T Automatic Open Softkepboard I PAK HE Windows Setting JV Enable Desktop Tum off Always on Top J Enable Pak_HE to be Minimized Config Fil
7. OCV Training This section allows you to e Automatically train multiple OCVFont and OCVFontless tools e Specify the intended inspection string externally e Set the amount of time that the communications handshake waits e Define the action that I PAK HE takes in the event that the string input from the external device does not match the string learned when the tool was trained 6 86 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings e Specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool e Send the final inspection string out after training an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool Description of OCV Training Section Settings e Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontTools Allows a Programmer to quickly train multiple OC VFont Tools typically where each tool uses the same OCVFont and has the same layout Automatic training requires that an image be available for training and that the Programmer train the first tool in the group of multiple tools Default Disabled every OCVFont Tool must be trained manually With Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontTools enabled when an OCVFont Tool is trained the Disapprove Substitute Approve screen is displayed When the layout is approved the I PAK HE software scans the other tools in the snapshot looking for OCVFont Tools with the same name or same match criteria as the OCVFont Tool that was just approved Note Match criteria is defined
8. 0 e 00 EE 2 Set Read Match 80 on Layout step in the OCVRuntimeTool 3 Train OCVRuntimeTool 4 You will find that the L character is not found even though the same TEXT02 TIF file is being used The Explanation Training When a character is trained into an OC VFont there are several templates stored for the character One of these templates is a Sobel Edge Enhancement template When the OCVRuntimeTool is trained the ROI being searched for characters is first passed through a Sobel Edge Enhancement Then the Sobel Edge Enhancement templates for each symbol are used in a correlation to determine where the symbols are within the ROI The Read Match value is used to accept reject a found character based on correlation match percentage Correct Character Training When a character is trained it is important to correctly size the training box around the character The I PAK HE manual describes character training as follows Individual character training requires that the OC VFont box be placed close around a single character in the image leaving a 1 2 pixel border This box should not include any portion of the adjacent characters The minimum recommended character width is 20 pixels The 1 2 pixel border is important because it allows room for proper training of templates Automatic Segmenting Character Training When the Automatic Segment option is used to train characters the system
9. Change Lot sala Operator e Zoom Buttons By default these are hidden Click or touch the screen to make them visible as shown in Figure 7 1 on page 7 2 They provide the ability to zoom in out and to autofit the image to the display area Click the X to hide the toolbar it will fade away automatically after 3 seconds Camera Results FIGURE 7 8 Camera Results Button 7 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual aN Run Mode Window This button toggles the display of the Camera Results information box as shown in Figure 7 9 The default is Off FIGURE 7 9 Camera Results Information Box Inspections 581 Passed 581 Time 53 00 ms ha oc 3 e c oc String Decoder test Value DataMatrix Tool Status zm GOOD DataMatrix Tool Text Decoder test The Camera Results information box provides inspection result data from a Job It displays the Requested Result and its Value per inspection The Camera Results information box appears over the Runtime Window in an always on top mode The Operator can relocate the Camera Results information box To close the Camera Results information box click Camera Results again Camera Results displays updated data from the actively running vision tools including the following e Inspections Total number of inspections being performed e Passed Total number of passe
10. Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts Second select the LayoutStep tab and enable the Automatic Segmentation property as shown in Figure 5 4 FIGURE 5 7 LayoutStep Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Min Symbol Size lt in pixels gt Clicking Train Font on the Custom Properties dialog box initiates the training You are prompted to name each symbol found in the train ROI FIGURE 5 8 Prompt to Enter Unique Name for the Symbol Sin TION DATE ene weltew 4 i 6MA9282 5 Enter a Unique Name For This Symbol g Cancel Skip D Properties OC Font Tool D Font NewFont L cc Selected Font NewFont 5 Training Debug Delay jo ms V Autom fe nAi ede Symbols Trained in This Font Min Symbc When training is complete the right hand side of the Custom Properties dialog box is modified to contain a tab for each symbol that was added to the OC VFont Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 11 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 9 Tabs for Each Added Symbol NewFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb 6 M 4 F Apply Automatic Min Sharpness I Apply Automatic Min Contrast Note There are many options for training OC VFonts The example above is the quickest way to train a font For more details on training OCVFonts and the properties and settings involved see OC VFo
11. Default Off Allow Outlined Cells Enabling this helps the algorithm decode a Data Matrix with outlined cells only In this case the On and Off cells have little or no contrast but they are separated by edges of the cells Default Off Decode Near Center The Smart Camera tries to read the symbol that is closest to the center of the FOV Default Off Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 29 Chapter Automatic Identification Robust Locate When enabled the system will first look for a Data Matrix matching the given specifications If it fails to find a Data Matrix the Data Matrix size parameters will be relaxed and the system will try to find the Data Matrix up to two more times Print Verification Enables Verifier outputs when set to one of the following AIM ISO IAQG DPM Note For more information see Results starting on page 4 34 Enabled DPM Verification Parameters If DPM verification is enabled in Print Verification the parameters to be included for the overall verification grade may be selected This allows you to ignore a parameter if it is not pertinent to their application The parameters are Cell Size Center Offset Size Offset Cell Modulation Border Match Contrast Axial Nonuniformity Print Growth Unused Error Correction Distortion Angle Verification Status Upper Threshold Allows you to set t
12. Setting tryout inspection criteria Performing a tryout inspection on a single vision tool or on all vision tools within a Job Modifying inspection criteria to retool tryout results 1 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual an Functional Specifications e Product ChangeOver Quick restoration of pre programmed Job definitions for ease of batch changeover Automated resetting of Statistics c e oO e Q 77 LLI I Connecting to the Smart Camera and downloading an I PAK HE program to the Smart Camera lt o 9 O 2 2 gt e Viewing of the executing inspections in runtime Automatic uploading of inspection images and their results from the Smart Camera to I PAK HE Showing all camera views of product being inspected Displaying Runtime Graphics of vision tools Zooming in and out on inspection images being displayed Updating the video display to show the last inspection failure with its graphics Viewing of the Failure Report of ongoing inspection noting all the failure types and their frequency for this inspection run e End of Batch Statistical and Failure information about the inspection On Screen reviewing of Runtime Statistics and Failures Transmitting of Runtime Statistics via RS 232 or TCP IP to another device Ability to save Runtime Statistics to a file Resetting of Statistical Infor
13. The value returned from a Data Matrix tool calibration that indicates the pixel brightness that represents white This must be manually entered for the Barcode tool to report contrast in calibrated units e Calibration Contrast Min The value used by a Data Matrix tool calibration to represent what the Smart Camera sees as absolute black Because the gains and offset of the Smart Camera may not yield a value of 0 for black this must be determined experimentally by blocking the light from the Smart Camera and determining the average pixel brightness by moving the cursor across the presented image This must be manually entered for the Barcode tool to report contrast in calibrated units c B To 5 c blr E 15 e Calibration Cell Unit This value is returned from a Data Matrix tool calibration that is the multiplier 100 to convert pixels to mils This must be entered manually for the Barcode tool to report sizes in calibrated units Training To train the Barcode Tool place the ROI around the barcode to be trained To train on any barcode other than Postnet or Pharmacode ensure at least one barcode is enabled in Enabled Codes To train on a Postnet barcode enable it specifically in Enabled Codes To train on a Pharmacode barcode enable it specifically in Enabled Codes Also for Pharmacode both narrow and wide bars must be present to train successfully For all barcodes be sure to leave a quiet zone area on all
14. Allows you to specify the number of images to be stored Note The total number of images for all inspections cannot exceed 10 Based on Part Image Storage Mode images are stored in a first in first out FIFO queue When the number of images stored reaches the size specified by this parameter the oldest image in the queue is overwritten so that the queue never expands beyond this size The default value is 0 Note After running your inspection open the Retrieve and Save Image As dialog box to set up Image File Name Select the path and filenames of the currently stored image files on the Smart Camera This allows the images to be uploaded and saved on the PC O Image File Name When the Inspection step in the current Job has been set up to store images based on the part pass fail status you will specify a file destination to which these images should be stored When the Product is run in a loop the Inspection step stores images based on its Part Image Storage Mode setting Base File Path Name Takes a base file name Lo e 9 c o 250 52 Or de Base File Number Takes a base file number If the Inspection Step was set up to store the last 10 failed images you could enter c fail for the Base File Path Name and 0 for the Base File Number Then the 10 failed images would be saved as Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 35 Chapter Setup Mode Reference c fail_ Snap
15. Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts Font Manager Dialog Box FIGURE 5 4 Font Manager Dialog Box Font Manager Available Fonts Duplicate Rename The Available Fonts list is the list of all OCVFonts found in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder OCVFont files have the extension ocv Buttons QI e Select When clicked this button returns you to the Main Custom Properties dialog box with the font selected in the Available Fonts list as the selected font e New When clicked this button prompts you to enter a name for the new font FIGURE 5 5 Font Name Dialog Box a Font Name x Name NewFont K Cancel You must enter a unique name for the new font If an OC VFont with the name DefaultFont ocv does not exist in the fonts folder PAK HE will create one and give it the standard default property values If an OCVFont with the name DefaultFont ocv already exists in the fonts folder it will not be overwritten The values of all font properties are copied from DefaultFont ocv to the new font This allows new fonts to have customized settings based on your requirements e i oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 9 Chapter OCV Reference Duplicate When clicked this button prompts you for a name for the new font You must enter a unique name for the new font The font that is selected
16. STX symbolic name result ETX Where STX is Chr 2 ETX is Chr 3 EOT is Chr 4 Note Sometimes inspection results reported are in the form of arrays or lists Data will be reported in full I PAK HE will not parse or interpret data results e Save Runtime Results to a File Once it is selected click OK from the System Settings dialog box and exit the Advanced SubMenu Default Not Selected Note Follow the same setup of I PAK HE s inspection results to upload as described above see Enable RS 232 Runtime Results on page 6 74 before going into the Save Results dialog box Then you will notice an additional button available on the Statistics Data SubMenu called Save Results 6 76 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 54 Updated Statistics SubMenu for Save Results Save Save Transmit Preview 5 Clear Clear Stats Config Save Save Config Transmit beer Preview Close Statistics Failures l File Images Results File Statistics File Statistics Statistics Click Save Results the following dialog box is displayed FIGURE 6 55 Save Results Select the Specific Inspection Results to Output to a File Tool Results to Output Inspection1 Snapshot1 FontT ool Text Inspection Snapshot1 Assign5 Out Inspection Snapshot1 Assign Out Inspection Snapshot1 FontT ool2 Text Inspection Snapshot1 Assign Out Inspection1 Snapshotl Assign6 Out Inspection
17. Training This section allows you to set the automated saving of the product definition every time the Job is retrained AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training Enabling this setting automatically saves the product definition after each retraining of the Job This prevents changes from being lost Default Selected Reset Statistics after re training Enabling this setting automatically resets the Runtime statistics to zero when you perform a Product ChangeOver and when you create a new product This makes I PAK HE ready to go On line with counters set to zero Default Selected AutoStep Mode on Automatically in Train and Tryout Enabling this setting sets the Train and Tryout menu s AutoStep Wizard Mode on Some users may want to disable this AutoStep Mode option so they can just go right to the tools they wish to retrain or adjust Default Selected Go directly between RunMode and Training Enabling this setting brings you right into the Train and Tryout menus directly from Run Mode You will bypass the main Setup Menu You may find this useful if you usually come out of Run Mode and go directly into Train and Tryout This saves a mouse click Default Selected 6 84 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings e Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout When in Train and Tryout and this option is turned on you will only be able to adjust the ROI of the step that s selected
18. V Always Ask To Save Font V Use Selected Font on Exit fi Hil Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 33 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials The Custom Properties dialog box allows you to train of OCVFonts in the current image The Select Font button allows you to select an OCV Font to train 3 Click Select Font to display the Font Manager dialog box as shown in Figure 2 40 FIGURE 2 40 Font Manager Dialog Box Font Manager Available Fonts DefaultFont New Duplicate Rename Delete Cancel Any already existing OC VFonts in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder are listed in the Available Fonts list 4 Click New to display the Font Name dialog box Figure 2 41 and to create a new OCVFont FIGURE 2 41 Font Name Dialog Box m Font Name Cancel 5 Name the font NewFont and then click OK 6 Click Select to select the new font for training 2 34 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool By default PAK HE OCVFont training does not perform automatic segmentation so that it can better perform Runtime ID Checking For this tutorial we will turn automatic segmentation on so that PAK HE automatically locates and places a box around all characters in the FOV This makes the tutorial easier N The tool settings for the selected font are on the right hand side of the Custom Properties dialog box 7 Click the Layout Step tab in the right pan
19. Validation This Visionscape I PAK HE User Manual provides a foundation for successful I PAK HE operation It guides you to apply I PAK HE vision tools for training and inspection IMPORTANT The diagrams in this manual may contain a different version number than this release but the functionality remains the same nventions The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual e Items emphasizing important information are bolded e Menu selections menu items and entries in screen images are indicated as Run triggered Modify etc Visionscape I PAK HE is intended to be the product of choice in the pharmaceutical industry Microscan has designed the product with just this in mind To best support the pharmaceutical industry we know we must be able to provide you with our software development processes Any software that has to do with production equipment in the pharmaceutical industry is mandated by the FDA to be validated You may choose to perform your own application Visionscape I PAK HE User Manual xvii Preface validation We can provide you with our software development details describing how the software is created and tested 21 CFR Part 11 Visionscape I PAK HE is 21 CFR Part 11 technically compliant Login user names and passwords are set up by the I PAK Administrator The Part 11 user names their encrypted passwords and the original time datestamp when a user was cre
20. Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 1 9 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection For complete information about the Acquire and the Vision System step see Chapter 1 of the Visionscape Tools Reference on your CD in PDF format Il PAK HE Start up Procedure Typical I PAK HE starts up and loads the last Product AVP file being used from the previous run of I PAK HE Each VisionSystemStep in the Job is queried for its SystemLastSavedAs value This tells the software which Visionscape Devices were being used by the Job the last time it was saved to disk Then I PAK HE attempts to discover each of the devices named in the Job Smart Cameras broadcast messages on the network every five seconds to announce their presence The underlying Visionscape architecture receives these messages and discovers what devices are available on the network A list is maintained of all the devices that have been discovered and I PAK HE checks this list to see if each device in the Job is present e Ifthe device is present Il PAK HE moves to the next stage of the start up process e Ifthe device is not present a message in the Splash screen tells you that I PAK HE is waiting for the device to be discovered Typically Smart Cameras may not be discovered for up to 5 seconds Once discovered I PAK HE moves to the next stage of the start up process Note If after 10 seconds the device has not been discovered you will see a
21. An OCVRuntimeTool uses an OCVFont called the Master Font to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OCVFont are in which locations in the FOV Once the layout is learned the OCVRuntimeTool creates a new OCVFont called a Runtime Font by training a new FontSymbol at each layout position using the current image data The OCVRuntimeTool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the data from the Runtime Font to verify the quality of the characters being inspected The OCVRuntimeTool compensates for day to day changes in On line print and helps minimize false rejects The OCVRuntimeTool can be used when inspecting Date Lot codes OCVFontlessTool An OCVFontless Tool does not require an OC VFont Instead it determines the location of characters in the FOV using a blob analysis technique It then stores training data for each character location as an OCVSymbolStep The OC VFontless Tool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the trained data to verify the quality of the characters being inspected The OCVFontless Tool checks symbol quality and not symbol correctness The OCVFontless Tool can be used on Date Lot codes when only symbol quality is a concern Do not use the OCVFontless Tool to inspect Component ID codes Table 5 1 contains usage hints Note When placing the ROI around the code to inspect be sure to leave quiet zone area on either side o
22. Description Data Matrix Tool allows editing through the Data Matrix Tool properties page as shown in Figure 4 5 4 20 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool FIGURE 4 5 Data Matrix Tool Properties Page g Bl Fd g Default Datum Order v DataMatrix Tool Inputs A InputBuffer Snapshot1 SnapOutputBuffer T Assisted Learn r T Train String Only r T Match String Enable r T Calibration Enable r Te Use Wildcard in Match String fay Match String 1234 EZ Tool Time Out ms 600 EZ Height pixels 0 4 EZ Width pixels 0 g No of Matrix Rows 0 g No of Matrix Columns Le 6 EH Image Style Normal T g Es Matrix Polarity Light on Dark E Es Matrix Orientation Omnidirectional 5 E ECC Level Auto lt kw Hj Cell Size 5 g Samples per Matrix Cell 5 EZ Minimum Edge Strength z E Minimum Border Integrity 80 g Matrix Size Variation 20 g Matrix Angle Variation 23 g Width to Height Ratio 0 H Search Speed Normal Es Search Direction Criss Cross Es Warp Method Fast EB Threshold Method Global Local Adaptive EB Finetune Method lt none gt Ve Robust Locate rr Es Print Verification None Es Graphics Level Show Graphics Except AOI Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 21 Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 4 4 Links to Property Descriptions For Information Abo
23. Job files These are provided for the convenience of our I PAK HE customers to provide a readable representation of the logic being used in the inspection They are stored on the PC as read only files and are viewable from within I PAK HE as part of the I PAK Administrator s role Additionally the PAK Administrator can reconcile between two of these files to note detailed changes of all Job settings I PAK HE s Statistics Files are an ASCII representation of the last inspection results These are summaries and contain the Inspection total pass and failed as well as the inspection string when applicable and the last login name and the timestamp of the last run of the inspection These are provided for the convenience of our I PAK HE customers to provide a readable representation of the data results from the inspection They are stored on the PC as read only files and are viewable printable and exportable from I PAK HE as part of the Statistics Data SubMenu The data contained within these files is recorded automatically in the Audit Trail Access Levels The I PAK HE access levels Setup Mode are shown in Figure 3 1 3 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 FIGURE 3 1 Access Levels in Setup Mode Calibration Menu Image v Programmer lt __ Highest Access Level Supervisor Operator 3 ___ Lowest Access Level Change Password Change Change Lot Password
24. On Operators cannot change lot in Run Mode Off Operators can change lot in Run Mode e Set Passwords to Expire Enabling this option makes your password expire after a certain specified time period 15 30 60 or 90 days When this option is selected a submenu is displayed where you can select the duration Default Off Note System Setting gt General gt Enable User Name Access must also be enabled When this option is used as you successfully exit Run Mode using your Part 11 login user name and password I PAK HE checks this user s password and the current date and time to see if your password has expired A pop up message box is displayed if you need to reset your password You will not be penalized or lose your account if you do not reset your password However you will continue to see these message boxes every time you exit Run Mode or enter your user name and password e Set Time Limit for System Inactivity Setting the time interval to 5 15 30 or 60 minutes causes the I PAK HE system to revert back to the Operator access level after that period of System Inactivity The default time interval is 15 minutes O e Set Number of Failed Login Attempts Setting the number of failed login attempts to a number between 1 and 10 causes the I PAK HE system to suspend a user who has unsuccessfully tried to login X number of times in a row Only an I PAK Administrator can restore this suspended account
25. Outputs T Bill wb Snepshot Stotus Truc z Bill Blob Toal Statue True Jg Biz mp Flav Tool Status True Te Bild ab OCVFonticss Tool Status Truc i Bil4 lt Unceeigned le Bil5 w lt Unassigned gt Te BiG lt Unassigned gt T Bil w lt Uncasigned gt Te Bild m lt Unaecigned gt Te bid mp lt Unassigned gt T Bino Unassigned T Bil11 t lt Unceeigned gt J Bil12 w lt Unassigned gt Te bins w lt Unassigned gt T Bil14 wb lt Unossigned gt Te Bil15 wb lt Unceeigned gt le BING w lt Unassigned gt Te Bin t lt Unassigned gt T Bil18 wb lt Unossigned gt J Big lt Unaceigned gt Ve Bia mp lt Unassigned gt T BilZ1 e Unassigned i Bil22 mb lt Ungeeigned gt le BIZ w lt Unassigned gt Te Bil24 wp lt Unassigned gt T Bil25 wb lt Unoasigned gt Te Bil26 ti lt Unaccigned gt Jg biz mp lt Unassigned gt T Bil28 Unassigned i Bil23 mb lt Unceeigned gt J Bil w lt Unassigned gt Te Biz w lt Unassigned gt E84valPsckageScrpls FailCud Re Pares Packags Serpt apex fo executes Recreate Step Datums lt click to executes D 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool Each of these inputs can be connected to any Status datum in your Job Typically you would connect the Statuses of all of the Steps whose pass fail state you care about In the example here we have connected the statuses
26. Threshold Displays the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto is enabled When Auto is disabled the value of this property is the threshold that is used by the step Default 135 Range 0 to 255 ComputePolarity Tab The ComputePolarity tab of the OCVFont is part of the LayoutStep that is used for automatic segmentation of the image when enabled as shown in Figure 5 24 FIGURE 5 24 ComputePolarity Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Polarity Polarity Allows the step to be set up to always return Light On_Dark always return Dark_On Light or return an automatically determined polarity Default Automatic 5 26 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual FontSymbol DefaultSymb Tab The DefaultSymb tab of the OCVFont sets default parameters that any FontSymbol trained and added to the OC VFont receives FontSymbol A FontSymbol is a collection of template images settings and tolerances that inspect a character or logo at runtime FontSymbols are created during the training of an OCVFont They are used by the OC VFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool steps to learn the layout at train time and inspect the layout at runtime FontSymbols are trained when they are added to an OCVFont QI i tez oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 27 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 25 FontSymbol Properties
27. Waiting for RS 232 Input of Match String for Tool Device Inspection Number Snapshot Toolname lt If gt lt cr gt is the message sent out Then I PAK HE begins waiting for the input of the match string O When I PAK HE does not receive the match string within the specified timeout period then this transaction times out I PAK HE closes the RS 232 port When I PAK HE does receive the match string the string is displayed in the Match String dialog box Click OK to accept this new string or Cancel to revert to the old string Lo e 9 c o 25 52 Or e Note The RS 232 input of match string must be terminated with either an Enter or Return character Once I PAK HE receives this termination character it closes the RS 232 port and ignores anything else sent Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 27 Chapter Setup Mode Reference COM1 Properties Your RS 232 device settings should be set This example is from HyperTerminal COM1 Properties 6 28 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Properties Your RS 232 device settings should be set as shown below This example is from HyperTerminal Properties 21 x Connect To Settings Function arrow and ctrl keys act as f us Windows keys Emulation Auto detect Teminal Setup Backscroll buffer lines 500 IF Beep three times when connecting or disconn
28. c 20 25 52 Or d9 Note When you return to Setup Mode from RunMode all inspection Passed outputs are set FALSE Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 45 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 30 Create a Product System Settings Communication r Selection Input Channel Output Channel None None Configure R5232 Ethernet TCP IP FIGURE 6 31 Create a Product System Settings Training amp Results r Product ChangeO ver Activities IV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver F Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot T7 Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Archive Path eo Training IV AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training IV Reset Statistics after re training IV Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout F7 Go directly between RunMode and Training F Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout rr Results Reporting IF Enable AS 232 Runtime Results F Save Runtime Results to a File F3 Enable OC Failure Tracking IV Report RS 232 ERROR when Inspection Result is empty IV Enable Failed Image Queue T7 Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup ER 10 z Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second Number of Images in Queue C Maximum C 2 4 cs r OC Training IF Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT oo
29. e ECC Level Specifies the ECC level of the Data Matrix to decode or Auto for any ECC Level The options are ECC 200 ECC 140 ECC 100 ECC 80 ECC 50 ECC 0 ECC 250 and SPEC Default Auto e Cell Size This is the nominal width and height of a Data Matrix cell in pixels This value will be set after a successful train Default 6 pixels Range 3 to 20 pixels Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 25 Chapter Automatic Identification Samples per Matrix Cell The width and height of the sample area of a cell This ranges from 1 to 7 but should not be greater than Cell Size setting Default 5 Minimum Edge Strength This value informs the algorithm to search for the edge of a Data Matrix whose intensity exceeds this value Default 18 Range 5 to 100 a setting of 5 will allow a Data Matrix of low contrast to be located Minimum Border Integrity Percentage of border that must be intact to consider the Data Matrix valid Default 80 Range 55 to 100 Matrix Size Variation The size representing the height and width of a Data Matrix is set after training By default this parameter is set to 20 which means the Data Matrix size in run can vary up to 10 from the one used in Train The number can be reduced to speed up the run process If the variation in size exceeds 20 both Height and Width should be set to 0 to disable size constraints Default 20 Range 0 to 25 Matrix Angle Variat
30. 30 Minutes 60 Minutes Set Number of Failed Login Attempts 5 TT V Enable Saving Stats and Config Files from Stats Menu F Use GnScreen Keypad instead of PE Keyboard Observe the default settings All options must be available for training and tryout during this tutorial 16 Make sure Show All Menu Options Advanced Users Figure 2 33 is selected Click OK This displays the Acquirel window as shown in Figure 2 34 FIGURE 2 34 Product Creation Acquire 1 MyHawkEye_1600T Acquire 1 Cami 17 Right click on Acquire 1 This displays the Insert A Step dialog box as shown in Figure 2 35 2 30 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 35 Product Creation Insert A Step Dialog Box Insert A Step BinaryMorph Filter BisectLines Meas Blob Tool Custom Step CustomVision Tool DataMatrix Tool Digitallnputs Step DigitalO utputs Step Dist2Pts Meas DynamMask Tool DynamT hresh Tool Fast Edge Group Flaw Tool FlexArray Step Formatted Output FrameAverage Filter GainOffset Filter GrayHistogram Tool GrayMorph Filter If Step ImageArith Tool ImageView Step IntelliFind Tool IntersectLines Meas LeastS quaresCircle Fit LeastS quaresLine Fit Loop Step MeanLP Filter OCRFixedF ont Tool OCRTrainableF ont Tool OC Font Tool OC Fontless Tool OC VRuntimeT ool OnePt Locator Projection Tool Pt to Line Distance Rect Warp Robu
31. Change Product on page 6 10 Train and Tryout on page 6 17 Statistics amp Data on page 6 32 Advanced Settings on page 6 42 O Run Mode on page 6 98 Troubleshooting on page 6 98 Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or de Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 1 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 1 I PAK HE Setup Mode Fie Access Level CalbrationMeru image Help MICROSCAN gnt Product Kora Man z PH ES EE BB Please chck button k deseed suber EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2008 6MA0282 I PAK HE sets the access level based on the password you enter e 0101 A Programmer can perform all the Supervisor functions plus create a new product definition adjust system settings modify tools in a product definition adjust tool settings and save a product definition at any time e 1010 A Supervisor can perform a Product ChangeOver retrain tools perform a tryout write data out to a file and reset statistics and failures There are various dialog boxes windows menus and buttons that are displayed as a result of action taken on the Setup Mode window The Setup Mode window contains some read only information such as the I PAK HE name and version number the name of the current product and current access level 6 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Setup Mode Menus As you go into the I PAK HE submenus Change Product Train and Tryout Stat
32. Match String Fields amp Buttons e Current Match String for the Tool Displays the current match string for the Barcode Data Matrix or OCRTrainableFont tool e New Match String Entry Mode You can enter anew Match String either with the keyboard or by the input channel for remote downloading of the Match String The Input Channel is configured from the System Settings dialog box to either RS 232 or Ethernet TCP IP 6 26 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Keyboard To enter the new string with the Keyboard e Click Keyboard e Type the new string directly into the Match String dialog box To set the tool s match string to the new match string click OK To leave the current match string unchanged click Cancel OnScreen Keyboard To enter data using the OnScreen Keyboard click OnScreen Keyboard For touch screen users this is useful so that you don t have to open up and use the I PAK HE keyboard Input Channel e RS 232 To enter the new Match String via RS 232 you need to define the Input Channel on the System Settings menu to be RS 232 and define its RS 232 protocol For details on how to choose an RS 232 communications port and how to set your I PAK HE system s physical communications port refer to RS 232 on page 6 64 e Once the Match String dialog box is displayed I PAK HE sends out a message on the RS 232 stating it is ready to receive data
33. Numeric View FIGURE 4 23 Numeric View Button OCRTrainableFont Tool Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool Numeric View Graphical View After you click Numeric View the constants associated with each character sample are displayed in a grid as shown in Figure 4 24 FIGURE 4 24 Constants for Character Samples 4 Properties OPN OCR1 Character Data Distance o 3 f 00g l _ oa a 3 oo 3a o 4 mgl 4l 3 f oog 5i 4 f ol e 3 oo a 4 oal aj 3 004 si 4a f oml 10 uj e oo 12 13j e oo 14 15j 8 oo 4 Display j REW yaan Max Dist 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 97 0 87 0 87 0 87 0 87 0 87 Std Dew 0 27 0 34 0 27 0 34 0 27 0 34 0 27 0 34 0 27 0 34 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 i an xi c Fon 29 Font Name 1 8 so Trained on 2 1 2 2003 11 08 50 AM O ari Select Font E T lt Ke m Text or Character to Include Maintain Include Iv Gas Training Leam Stop Timeout j minute Included Committed Samples corresponds to included characters Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 67 Chapter Automatic Identification Individual samples may be deleted from the list by right clicking on the grid and choosing Delete Selecting Character Statistics displays the training statistics for all characters in the font as s
34. Parameters These are settings that are stored in the Smart Camera s flash memory and are loaded each time you reboot the Smart Camera 7 Inthe HyperTerminal window type reset to reboot your Smart Camera AND immediately begin pressing the ESC key on your keyboard This should bring you to the Smart Camera s boot parameters screen as shown in Figure B 8 B 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Connecting Smart Cameras to a PCusing Static IP Addresses amp FIGURE B 8 HyperTerminal Window Smart Camera Boot Parameters HawkEyeConnection Hyper Terminal File Edit view Call Transfer Help UJ HawkEye Smart Camera 400MHz 16MB Flash 64MB RAM Name MyHawkEye_1600T Static IP 161 218 121 124 Network Mask cee To gA He D2 N E oS O 1 MAC Address 00 60 33 e1 00 0a 1 Modify User Parameters 2 Reset User Account 3 Exit to Application D a Connected 0 02 32 Auto detect 115200 8 N 1 F NUM 8 Type 1 and press Enter to choose the Modify User Parameters option This will cause the first user parameter and its current value to be displayed as shown in Figure B 9 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual B 9 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC FIGURE B 9 HyperTerminal Window Modify User Parameters HawkEyeConnection HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help 3 2 HawkEye Smart Camera 400MHzZ 16MB F
35. Passwords have restrictions based on the 21 CFR Part 11 guidelines I PAK HE has implemented the following password specific rules 6 25 2008 10 12 AM e Passwords must be at least six characters in length and no longer than 10 characters e Passwords are changeable through the Configure Part 11 Users dialog box You can change your own password only The I PAK Administrator can change any user s password e Passwords are encrypted when stored e Passwords are hidden when typed into the login box e Microscan recommends that passwords be changed every 30 days Enforcement of this is left to the end user as your own SOP You can use Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Set Passwords To Expire to aid in this Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 19 oO h ia oc TI N Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 e Users entering new passwords are required to enter unique passwords No two users can have the same password When changing your password you cannot change it to what it currently is set to When there is a failed login attempt the time and date the user name and the password entered are recorded to a security log and the Audit Trail e After a user definable number 1 to 10 of failed login attempts the user name is suspended from the authorized user list Only the I PAK Administrator is able to Restore a User to restore this user account The suspension of the user
36. The Up and Down buttons scroll through the list to select a symbol name Clicking on a symbol name in the list also selects it Clicking on the scroll bar scrolls through the list Character Substitution To substitute one symbol for another select the layout character in the layout list that you want to replace Select the symbol from the Font box that you want to use to replace the layout symbol and click Substitute The layout list will update as well as the Inspect Chars string Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 77 Chapter OCV Reference Ignoring a Character To ignore one of the symbols in the layout and exclude it from being inspected at runtime select the symbol to be ignored from the layout list Select the IGN symbol from the Font box Then click Substitute The symbol is removed from both the layout list and the Inspect Chars string Finishing Up If you are not satisfied with the layout and wish to retrain the tool click Disapprove in the Setup Mode Train window with the OCVRuntimeTool still selected You can adjust the properties of the tool and retrain until you achieve the desired layout string When you are satisfied with the layout shown in the Inspect Chars string at the top of the window click Approve to return to the Setup Mode Train window Keyboard Input of Match String Keyboard Input of Match String allows you to specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool
37. The camera view contains the Failed Image Queue button as shown in Figure 6 58 FIGURE 6 58 Failed Image Queue Button fata ses TA sample data matrix di Change Lot After you click Failed Image Queue the display changes so that you can cycle through the failed images as shown in Figure 6 59 FIGURE 6 59 Screen to Cycle Through Failed Images eae ia sample data matrix Change Lot O Setup Mode Reference Date Time 13 30 59 9 Jul Clicking the right and left arrow buttons cycles the display through the available image frames If no failed image has been assigned to a frame that Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 81 Chapter Setup Mode Reference frame will appear gray Zoom the failed image to display it at the desired magnification level Notice the counters and buttons in the two images below 5358 Pass LH EME 10 10 Date Time 12 20 48 7 Aug _ Indicates the Newest and Last Failed Image is Displayed 7060 o 10 lt Date Time 12 20 52 7 Aug gt Indicates the Oldest and First Failed Image is Displayed Saving the Images to Disk When the Supervisor or Programmer returns to Setup Mode with Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup enabled the queue of failed images gets saved to the system s hard drive At startup the I PAK HE software creates the folder Vscape I Pak_ HE FailedImages if it does not already exist FIGURE 6
38. This is accomplished by displaying an input box into which you can type the necessary information Note Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String mode automatically disables the ignore and substitute character functionality of I PAK HE The OCVFontless Tool does not support the Keyboard Input of Match String feature Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results gt Keyboard Input of Match String is a System Settings that will not change even when you do a change product to another Job that contains an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool 5 78 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Keyboard Input of Match String FIGURE 5 52 Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String Product ChangeOver Activities IV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver V Reset Failures on Product ChangeOver Archive Path Y M Y _NASHUA dev yvs370 prod FT Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Results Reporting Enabled RS 232 Runtime Results r Save Runtime Results to a File TT Enable OCY Failure Tracking lt l Report RS 232 ERROR when Inspection Result is empty lt Enable Failed Image Queue Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Number of Images in Queue 3 Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum 2 4 8 Training iv amp utoSave Product Definition after Re
39. Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 39 Chapter OCV Reference Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels Individual Symbol Search X Determines the width of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol width to get the search width Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels Individual Symbol Search Y Determines the height of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol height to get the search height Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels Test For Character Breaks Enables and disables the checks for character break appearance flaws Default Disabled Runtime ID Checking Enables and disables the tests that determine if the correct symbol is present at runtime During training of an OCVFont the FontSymbols that are added are checked against each other to determine how similar they are When FontSymbols are found to be very similar tests for determining the presence of the correct symbol are set up and stored with the FontSymbols These tests are only performed at runtime when Runtime ID Checking is enabled Default Enabled Enable Mask Output Enables and disables the creation and output of a mask at runtime This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Enabling this property increases inspection time Default
40. after a specified time on battery power o g9 LG zE le an V Minutes on battery before critical alarm 221 V When the alarm occurs run this program savecounts exe Next instruct the computer to s hut down Iv Finally turn off the UPS OK Cancel 14 To select the program you must enable the Task Scheduler Service on your PC Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel to display the Windows Control Panel as shown in Figure A 7 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual A 11 Appendix Installation amp Software FIGURE A 7 Control Panel File Edit View Favwrites Tools Help D e Search KE Folders Z a3 Control Panel Ga n Mome a Comments Va Fontrol Panel 7 el Options Adjust your computer settings For vision hearing and mobility Acuity Vision Accelerator 1000 This applet pravides configuratian settings for all your high r SE Add Hardware Instals and troubleshoots hardware Sr Add or Remove Programs Instal or remove programs and Windows components rq Administrative Taols Configure administrative settings For your computer JCE AISO a ClearCase aaa A ISEYEDE s 7 are Product 2 Date and nfigure administrative settings Tor your computer Fme and time zone for your computer Help end Support Diagnostic Tool Diagnostic Tool Far Smart Card Readers Display Change the appearance of your desktop such as the background scr Folder Opt
41. and this value will be used as the binarize threshold When calculating the average you can choose to ignore the very lowest and highest gray values You may also apply an offset to the calculated threshold D 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool Settings FIGURE D 9 Dynamic Binarize Script CustomVision Tool Inputs wy InputBuffer eb Snapshot Snap OutputBuffer Avail Package Scripts Dynamic_Binarize Re Parse Package Script ectick to execute gt Recteate Step Datums lt click to execute gt E Histogram Low Clip 20 E Histogram High Clip 220 Ezaz Threshold Offset 10 ER Polarity Bright EH Method Average e Histogram Low Clip Pixels below this gray value will be left out of the calculation of the average or median gray value e Histogram High Clip Pixels above this gray value will be left out of the calculation of the average or median gray value g e Threshold Offset An offset that will be applied to the calculated binary threshold e Polarity Determines the polarity of the pixels in the output buffer e Method Selects whether you want the threshold to be based on the average or the median gray value og 2 Qn FS eS Fc Oo gt lt b a Results e Average Calculated average gray value e RunLoThr When polarity is set to Bright this will hold the actual threshold that was used to binarize the image
42. dialog box that offers you three choices Select a different Device Clicking this button allows you to connect the VisionSystem Step to a different device A dialog box is displayed listing the available devices Load a Different Product Clicking this button allows you to load a different product file Exit I PAK HE Clicking this button exits I PAK HE Once the device is discovered I PAK HE must Take Control of it Each Smart Camera has its own User Name and Password that can be used to Take Control 1 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Start up Procedure Typical an of the device Once you have control of a device you can download Jobs to it start and stop inspections etc Other users are locked out from accessing the device while you have control of it Each Smart Camera has the following default user name and password User Name hawkeye Password vision lt c o 5 Q o 2 oo of 2 u or 2 gt I PAK HE will try to take control using the default user name and password it will also try to use no user name and password If these fail then a dialog box will be displayed asking you to enter the user name and password If you enter the correct values and I PAK HE is able to take control successfully these values will be saved so that in the future it can take control automatically This means that you don t need to enter usernames and passwo
43. e m e Yes I PAK HE begins to automatically save the read only statistics file to the hard drive and prompts you for a file name as you return to Setup Mode e Cancelling out of this End Batch saving statistics file option is allowed Regardless of how you respond you get an End Batch Successful message and the batch results are stored in the Statistics menus Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 15 Chapter r Run Mode Reference 7 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual gt appenpxa Installation amp Software o Sg L2G zE le an Before you install your Visionscape I PAK HE be sure you have all of the necessary I PAK HE components and a supported PC Minimum PC Requirements Windows 2000 SP4 PC or Windows XP SP2 PC that meets the following minimum requirements Microsoft Windows 2000 SP4 or Microsoft Windows XP SP2 or later Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher or Pentium 4 1 66 GHz Core 2 Duo or higher 1 GB RAM memory VGA display adapter 64K or true colors Screen Resolution 1024 768 or 1280 1024 Dedicated Ethernet Network Port 1 NIC card 100BaseT switch or 1 4 port NIC card no switch HE1600T Smart Camera subnet to be local to the PC using private addressing or A standard network as long as the network uses static IP to minimize disconnection issues Although the HawkEye supports DHCP we Visionscape I Pak HE Us
44. e The Previous and Next buttons cycle through the available OCV Tools when there are more than four in the product definition e The Save Data to File button saves all OCV Tracking data to a file The file is named SymbolTracking concatenated with the current time date stamp The Done button closes the OCV Failure Tracking dialog box The center of the dialog box displays the names of the OCV Tools and the number of failures for the tools The number of failures is based only on Symbol failures locator failures will not be included in these counts O Next to the number of failures is a Details button When you click one of the Details buttons an Individual Symbol Results dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 25 For each OCV tool in your Job the Individual Symbol Results dialog box displays the breakdown of the types of failures that can occur for each character in the trained string Lo rom c 20 25 52 Or d2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 41 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 25 Individual Symbol Results Dialog Box Individual Symbol Results Symbol Results For Insp1 Snapshotl FontT ooll o oOo o E Qo oo roo oo ooo oOo ooo O O O O O O O O O O O O O O jO 0O 0O 0O 0O ccc cc O O oooccoccc cc cc Ol OO oo ooo oo oo 0160109160 Close Statistics This is a Supervisor level function Close Statistics quits this Statistics
45. in other words it will be the average or median gray value the Offset value When polarity is set to Dark this will always be 0 e RunHiThr When polarity is set to Dark this will hold the actual threshold that was used to binarize the image in other words it will be the Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 13 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques average or median gray value the Offset value When polarity is set to Bright this will always be 255 e Median The calculated median gray value e ComputedGray This is the computed gray value that was combined with the offset value to produce the threshold In other words if the selected Method was Average this will be equivalent to the Average output datum and if the selected Method was Median this will be equivalent to the Median output datum FailCode The FailCode script does not draw any graphics nor does it need an ROI so it is best used with the Custom Step rather than the Custom Vision Tool See FailCode starting on page D 3 FindRotated The FindRotated script allows you to run the correlation algorithm over a range of angles allowing you to find features that will rotate by more than 5 from the trained orientation The Template Find step in Visionscape runs the correlation algorithm but typically can only find features that will rotate by no more than 5 Using FindRotated Fi
46. l C Maximum C 2 4 r OC Training T Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools FT Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools 7 Extemal Input of Match String External Communications Timeout 60 Second Match String Mismatch Action FR Keyboard Input of Match String jE Transmit Fit al Inspection String 15 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box General tab as shown in Figure 2 33 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 29 N ro oO es a2 OF cl or aL S Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 33 System Settings Dialog Box General Tab Job Settings Menu Settings C Streamline Menus Hunima Inspection Eren Realtime zi Show All Menu Options Advanced Users v Enable Change Lot In Run Mode F Automatic Open Softkeyboard End Batch IF Enable End Batch Functionality I PAK HE Windows Setting JV Enable Desktop Tum off Always on Top r21 CFR Part 11 Configuration Fm Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 J Enable Pak_HE to be Minimized F Enable Configuration File Audit Trail m Config File Format US Letter Format C amp 4 Format Enable User Logins for Training Approvals F Set Passwords to Expire I PAK HE System Name System Name default Set Time Limit for System Inactivity Revert to Operator Mode C SWMinutes 15Minutes
47. locates blobs within the ROI A bounding box for each blob is used to train the symbols The Num Border Spaces to Add property of the OC VFont s LayoutStep can be used to increase the size of the box used to train the symbols 5 108 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Troubleshooting This Automatic Segment method of training OC VFonts is not necessarily the optimal method for training characters In particular the 1 2 pixel border requirement may not be met Example with Automatic Segment Using the TEXT02 TIF image a sample OC VFont was trained using automatic segmentation with all parameters at the default values The characters L 2 A 0 6 9 3 were trained into the OCVFont When the OCVRuntimeTool was trained the Sobel Edge Enhancement search buffer was FIGURE 5 88 Contents of Buffer The Sobel Edge Enhancement templates and the resulting Match were QI FIGURE 5 89 Resulting Match 83 85 89 90 89 93 80 When you look closely at the template images and compare them to the search buffer you can see that the template images are missing some data This is because the Automatic Segment boxes were not big enough when the characters were trained It is this missing data that causes the match to go down even when training on the same image e i oc gt e e Example with Manually Trained Characte
48. lt Restore to copy that Font back to the Current Fonts folder 6 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Train and Tryout Train and Tryout displays the Train and Tryout wizard mode window as shown in Figure 6 14 FIGURE 6 14 Train and Tryout Wizard Window MICROSCAN funn rodet EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2008 6MA0282 O 7 2a 434 424 e250 Yer217 5 We1 He 6 0 0 For okenne Trened OO O utente OCVFurkless Tool Is Not Tralned C mer Took OCVFontiess Too Scomst600T1 Patt Disabled ians 21154 The Training and Tryout functions are grouped into one and utilize the same display The Supervisor Programmer can train retrain and tryout the tools from this display The concept of wizard mode exists in this menu much like the Create a Product wizard mode Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or ap First you want to train your tools AutoStep guides you through the training process Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 17 Chapter Setup Mode Reference This remainder of this section describes the following e AutoStep or Wizard Training Method starting on page 6 18 e AutoStep Off starting on page 6 19 e Train and Tryout Mode starting on page 6 19 e Train and Tryout Toolbar starting on page 6 19 e Automatically Setting Tool Settings starting on page 6 25 e Special Training of Tools starting on page 6 25 AutoSte
49. none on page D 2 e FailCode on page D 3 none The none script is the default Perl Package Script used by a Custom Step when inserted into a Job This script has no functionality FIGURE D 1 The none Script Custom Step Avail Package Scripts hane j Re Parse Package Script Recreate Step Datums e Avail Package Scripts This property allows selection of a Perl Package Script for the step to use You can select none FailCode on page D 3 e Re Parse Package Script When clicked this button causes the package script to be parsed Whenever any changes to the script files are made this button needs to be clicked to make these changes take effect Note I PAK HE supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I PAK HE software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK HE D 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool e Recreate Step Datums When clicked this button causes the input and output datum lists in the step to be re created You only need to click this button when a datum is added removed or changed in the script If the script is changed but no input or output datums are changed then this button does not need to be clicked Clicking this button also causes all input datums to be set to their default values and to lose their connections
50. nt X Up Contrast p A VerStat UpThresh 66 eSCVThr Symbol SCVThrL Datum Int X Lo Contrast o A VerStat LoThresh 67 eANUVTh Axial ANUVThr Datum Int X rUp Nonunifor Up A mity VerStat UpThresh 68 eANUVTh Axial ANUVThr Datum Int X rLo Nonunifor Lo 1 mity VerStat LoThresh 69 ePGVThr Print PGVThrU Datum Int x Up Growth p A VerStat UpThresh 70 ePGVThr Print PGVThrL Datum Int X Lo Growth o A VerStat LoThresh 71 eUECVTh Unused UECVThr Datum Int x rUp Error Up 1 Correctio n VerStat UpThresh 4 48 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool TABLE 4 6 Contents of VerifyDetails continued Text mboli Nam mboli rren Offset ig ieee italics Wome Hevka i AIM IAQG ISO AM DPM output 72 eUECVTh Unused UECVThr Datum Int X rLo Error Lo 1 Correctio n VerStat LoThresh 73 eDAVThr Angle of DAVThrU Datum Int X Distortion p A VerStat UpThresh 74 eDAVThr Angle of DAVThrL Datum Int x Distortion e 1 4 VerStat LoThresh 75 Unused UEC Datum Do X xX xX xX Error uble 1 Correctio n OCRTrainableFont Tool Note 1 Writing out angle in degrees c B To 5 c blr F 15 This tool reads labels and marks and returns string results Any mark and label symbol can be trained incrementally at the time it is first seen or offline Characters and symbols can have any shape or size as long as they can be mapped to an ASCII character Ther
51. optimize the reading process for the Data Matrix that it found You can run this tool without training While the untrained speed of locating and decoding a Data Matrix will suffer the Data Matrix tool will be able to read a much larger range of Data Matrix sizes shapes and qualities When running the Job the system will look only for Data Matrices with similar specifications The decoded string is available for output and the step s status will indicate the Data Matrix data exactly matches the trained Data Matrix data when Enable Match String is selected If the Data Matrices being inspected will vary between runs including changing in size the search criteria can be relaxed After training on the representative Data Matrix setting the height width rows and columns to 0 will allow the system to find a Data Matrix regardless of the size This will slow the search somewhat so if the Data Matrix size is constant between runs the parameters should be set accordingly The Data Matrix Tool is inserted in a Job inside of a Snapshot an NPt Locator Rect Warp etc To train the Data Matrix Tool adjust the Data Matrix Tool ROI so that it contains the Data Matrix to be trained and some quiet zone area around the Data Matrix as shown in Figure 4 3 c B To 5 c rr F 15 Note You can be generous with the quiet zone area FIGURE 4 3 Data Matrix Tool Trained Visionscape I Pak HE User M
52. window 7 2 zooming 7 6 Runtime change lot password 21 cfr part 11 active 7 9 password 21 cfr part 11 not active 7 9 font 5 45 font tool uploading the string 7 7 id checking 5 2 5 21 5 40 5 50 5 105 inspection priority 6 91 S Safety audit trail 3 20 configuration files 3 21 jobs files 3 21 statistics files 3 21 Samples committed 4 67 deleting trained 4 71 Save calibration 6 7 calibration as text 6 7 config file 3 12 config files button 6 93 Index failure queue images on return to setup 6 80 6 82 font button 5 8 images vs failed image queue 6 33 results button 6 76 6 77 runtime results to a file 6 76 6 78 scaled font button 5 16 5 20 stats button 6 93 Scale Button 5 19 5 20 Scaling 5 16 Scan for Sequence Steps Using Outputs 1 9 Score Value 5 18 Search Direction 4 6 4 24 security log 3 7 Segment Agent 4 50 Segmentation automatic layout 5 24 layout step 5 11 Select a different device 1 10 button 5 9 font button 2 34 5 7 5 8 results to upload 6 25 6 74 6 75 6 77 7 7 Selected font 5 42 5 51 symbol group 5 61 Send line ends with line feeds 6 30 Set image upload max rate per second 6 83 C 2 number of failed login attempts 3 21 3 22 6 93 passwords to expire 3 6 3 19 6 93 time limit for system inactivity 6 93 unknown characters to 4 72 Settings advanced 6 42 Setup mode 2 2 6 1 access levels 3 2 drop down menus 6 3 file menu 6 3 Sharpness defined 5 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User
53. 1 second True 1 second False The HeartBeat output is generated by I PAK HE During periods of heavy PC loading the HeartBeat Output frequency can change For example during a download the HeartBeat will not pulse because all resources are downloading the Job to the Smart Camera s PLC monitoring must be written with these scenarios in mind For example monitor the HeartBeat every 1 second when the Run Mode output is also asserted O While in Setup Mode the Run Mode Setup Mode Output is set to FALSE During Run Mode the Run Mode Setup Mode Output is set to TRUE External monitoring of the I O point indicates when I PAK HE is ready to run Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or de Inputs Must be set to In to Enable Inspection Trigger is an input that instructs I PAK HE to conduct one inspection cycle for each inspection trigger I PAK HE receives from an external source The default for this is I O 1 of the Fixed IO Points Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 61 Chapter Setup Mode Reference e You may use an input as a handshake to clear a pass output System Settings The System Settings dialog box allows the Programmer to Define and configure the Input and Output Channels Define automatic Product ChangeOver activities Resetting statistics Resetting failures Setting the archive path Showing only unique codes in change lot Ignoring extra layout symbols Define training Session
54. 19 ComputePolarity 5 64 and automatic segmentation 5 64 polarity 5 26 5 64 tab 5 26 Config File format 6 95 save 3 12 Configuration 21 cfr part 11 3 6 files 3 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 5 Index reconciling 3 12 Configure 21 cfr part 11 users 3 13 1 0 6 59 supervisor access 3 6 6 5 Connect Button 6 8 Connecting smart camera to pc B 1 Contrast defined 5 1 limit units 5 33 5 72 Control Options 6 22 Counters 7 8 reset interval 7 5 CR character defined 6 37 Create a product button 6 43 pdfs button 3 9 Create Modify OCVFonts 5 5 Criss Cross barcode 4 7 data matrix 4 27 Ctrl Esc preventing getting to desktop 3 20 Current Match String for the Tool 6 26 Custom settings button train and tryout 6 24 trajectory step 6 24 step 6 51 steps D 1 CustomVision Tool 6 51 D 1 Cylinder axis D 9 radius D 10 unwrap warp D 7 D Data bits 6 65 valid 6 60 tab 6 58 valid duration ms 6 58 Data Matrix Tool 4 18 properties page 4 20 param verstat lothresh 4 31 param verstat upthresh 4 31 aperture 4 32 assisted learn 4 23 calibrated 4 23 calibration cell unit 4 32 calibration contrast max 4 31 calibration contrast min 4 32 calibration enable 4 23 cell size 4 25 cell unit report 4 32 contrast report 4 31 ecc level 4 25 enabled dpm verification parameters 4 30 finetune method 4 28 graphics level 4 31 height pixels 4 24 image style 4 25 match string 4 24 match string enable 4 23 m
55. 3 I PAK HE Run Mode Window MICROSCAN NO Scotts 160071 Scotts1600T1 View ne image shown Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials No images shown downkoaded Scotts 80071 11 19 2008 2059M Note Steps 1 2 and 3 are only seen the first time that I PAK HE starts or if the device that should be used in the start up Job cannot be detected 4 Click the Key icon see Figure 2 3 This displays the Password dialog box as shown in Figure 2 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 5 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 4 Password Dialog Box Password 5 Type 0101 and click Enter This places you in Programmer Mode and displays the Setup Mode window as shown in Figure 2 5 2 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 5 I PAK HE Setup Mode Window Vistonscape 1 PAK HE 3 7 2 Setup Mode j 5 Fie Access Level Calbration Menu Image Help N MICROSCAN Siget Product oo inae 0e0 Pa Kz sd Please chek tation for desped suheeru EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2008 6MA0282 o Oo gs a2 OF cl or a S Cumer Tool Inspection 6 Click Advanced Settings 7 Click Create a Product I PAK HE displays the Select a Vision Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 7 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 6 Select a Vision Device Dialog Bo
56. 5 48 5 58 pin 2 index 5 39 5 48 5 58 registration method 5 36 AutoFont and scaling button 5 8 button 5 16 5 18 Automatic backup of jobs 6 14 font selection 5 16 5 18 open softkeyboard 6 94 segmentation 5 24 5 105 computepolarity 5 64 enabling 5 22 layout step 5 11 5 24 ocvfont tool 5 21 ocvruntimetool 5 21 when not to use 5 50 threshold adjustment 5 42 5 52 training for multiple ocv font tools 6 87 fontless tools 6 87 Automatically Setting tool settings 6 25 AutoSave Product Definition After Re Training 6 84 AutoStep button train and tryout 6 20 mode completing 6 19 on automatically in train and tryout 6 84 Index 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual training method 6 18 AutoThreshold 5 64 edge energy threshold 5 26 5 64 tab 5 25 threshold 5 26 5 64 adjustment 5 26 5 64 Avail Package Scripts D 2 D 6 Available Products C 4 B Barcode Tool 4 1 properties page 4 2 aperture 4 13 barcode confidence threshold 4 8 bc412 check sum 4 9 bc412 decode left right 4 9 bc412 remove check sum display 4 9 bc412 start stop 4 9 bc412 qr code polarity 4 9 calibrated 4 13 calibration cell unit 4 13 calibration contrast max 4 13 calibration contrast min 4 13 cell unit report 4 12 code39 check sum 4 10 code39 remove check sum display 4 10 contrast report 4 12 enabled codes 4 6 finetune method 4 8 hori probe spacing 4 7 i20f5 check sum 4 9 i20f5 remove check sum display 4 10 match string 4 5 match string
57. 68 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings Product Name Current Date and Time Inspected string when the Match String for the Barcode Tool or Data Matrix Tool is used or when FontTool text or OCVRunTool text is uploaded Last Run Time Statistics The data is sent in the following format to the RS 232 port as specified in the Output Channel in conjunction with the RS 232 Protocol specified Product product_name lt lf gt lt cr gt Date Time mm dd yyyy hh mm lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters lt lf gt lt cr gt lt lf lt cr gt P lt lf gt lt cr gt R lt lf lt cr gt lt eot gt lt Lf lt cr gt Where product_name is the name of the currently selected product O mmis the month 01 12 dd is the day 01 31 yyyy is the year 1 e 2000 hh is the hour 01 12 c zan Gen oc mm is the minute 00 59 v 9 e 9 arent Q 2 inspected_characters is a string of the characters inspected by the Job isa number lt lf gt is a line feed character chr 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 69 Chapter Setup Mode Reference lt cr gt is a carriage return character chr 13 lt eot gt is an end of text character chr 4 or Ctrl D in HyperTerminal Note If there are no Inspected Characters in the Job t
58. 7 13 External communications timeout 5 85 6 89 input of match string 5 82 5 83 5 84 6 88 F Fail counter 6 51 FailCode D 3 Failed image queue 7 3 vs save images 7 3 image queue button 6 80 6 81 7 3 login attempts set number of 3 22 Failure report button 7 3 FDA xvii FeatExtract Agent 4 50 Features character related 4 68 Field delimiter char 6 65 File Menu 6 3 Fill ROI 6 31 Filter Bright Defects 5 3 5 34 5 74 Final residue largest blob 5 2 limit 5 29 5 31 5 35 5 69 5 70 5 105 max blob size 5 31 5 71 method 5 30 5 31 5 70 5 71 total count 5 2 Find Symbols That Touch ROI 5 58 FindRotated D 14 Finish Button 6 19 Font box 2 39 displaying properties 5 7 editor button 2 32 4 56 5 6 ocvfont tool 6 24 ocvruntimetool 6 24 folder button ocrtrainablefont tool 6 24 scaling 5 19 and re sampling 5 19 selection automatic 5 16 5 18 training 2 32 new 5 10 Font Manager delete button 5 10 duplicate button 5 10 new button 5 9 rename button 5 10 select button 5 9 fontname nna 4 50 fontname nne 4 50 fontname nnd 4 50 Fonts button 6 16 creating 5 6 location of stored 5 5 modifying 5 6 FontSymbol 5 3 5 27 appearance flaw break test 5 32 apply to all fontsymbols 5 35 default symbol 5 35 auto threshold adjustment 5 33 enabled 5 33 bright defect range 5 34 character expansions 5 34 edge energy threshold 5 34 filter bright defects 5 34 final residue limit 5 31 max blob size 5 3
59. At least one OCVFont is required to use the OCVRuntimeTool OC VFonts are stored in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder on the hard drive You will need a good image for training 1 Place your example under your Smart Camera click Live and adjust the camera Click Live again to stop the picture taking The graphics for the OCVRuntimeTool are displayed and the Current Tool panel shows the OCVRuntimeTool A Font Editor button is displayed on the toolbar as shown in Figure 2 38 2 32 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 38 Font Editor Button on Toolbar NO Access Level Date Time Programmer 11 18 2008 02 51 PM Acquire Liv Zoomin Tiy Tool Font Exit Training Zoom Out Editor J to Main Setup 2 Because the OCVRuntimeTool requires a font click Font Editor to initiate font training This displays the On Screen Keyboard cancel out of this and the Custom Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 2 39 2 amp e 5 H LL lt Tool Settings Options a e Q iy S a gt FIGURE 2 39 Font Selection And Training Dialog Box Properties OC RuntimeTool Ea Font rn Selected Font DefaultF ont Training Debug Delay 0 ms Apply Automatic Min Sharpness p Symbols Trained in This Font M Apply Automatic Min Contrast NONE MV Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pet Select Font Revert Save Font
60. Chapter OCV Reference Default 1 pixels Range 0 to 20 pixels Appearance Flaw Break Test Determines whether the FontSymbol is to inspect for character breaks in the symbol When enabled the inspection fails if a break is found in the symbol When disabled the inspection ignores breaks in the symbol Default Enabled Min Appear Flaw Break Size Is the smallest size break that causes a character break failure Default 2 pixels Range to 10 pixels Sharpness Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness is used to calculate a percentage of the trained sharpness value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When switched from Gray Level to Percentage the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held When switched from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held Default Gray Level
61. Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 4 1 Links to Property Descriptions For Information About Go To Aperture page 4 13 Barcode Confidence Threshold page 4 8 BC412 Check Sum page 4 9 BC412 Decode Left Right page 4 9 BC412 Remove Check Sum Display page 4 9 BC412 Start Stop page 4 9 BC412 QR Code Polarity page 4 9 Calibrated page 4 13 Calibration Cell Unit page 4 13 Calibration Contrast Max page 4 13 Calibration Contrast Min page 4 13 Cell Unit Report page 4 12 Code39 Check Sum page 4 10 Code39 Remove Check Sum Display page 4 10 Contrast Report page 4 12 Enabled Codes page 4 6 Finetune Method page 4 8 Hori Probe Spacing page 4 7 I20f5 Check Sum page 4 9 I20f5 Remove Check Sum Display page 4 10 Match String page 4 5 Match String Enable page 4 5 Maximum Code Height page 4 7 Maximum Code Length page 4 7 Maximum No of Bars page 4 7 Minimum Code Height page 4 7 Minimum Code Length page 4 7 Minimum Edge Strength page 4 8 Minimum No of Bars page 4 7 4 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Barcode Reading TABLE 4 1 Links to Property Descriptions continued For Information About Go To Minimum Quiet Zone page 4 8 Narrow Bar Width page 4 7 Output UPC as EAN page 4 9 Print Verification page 4 10 QR Code Finder Pattern Misalignment page 4 10 Search Direction page 4 7 Tar
62. Default 60 seconds Range 30 seconds to 30 000 seconds 30 000 seconds 500 minutes approx 8 hours and 20 minutes 5 Inthe left pane Available Products highlight at least two products Note You cannot highlight more than 20 products 6 Click Select Products and then click OK 7 Click Close Advanced This returns you to the main Setup Mode screen I PAK HE checks the number of products selected to make sure that you did not select too many more than 20 or too few less than 2 products If the Enable Demonstration Mode checkbox is not checked Demo Mode is disabled C 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Running in Demo Mode Running in Demo Mode If Demo Mode is enabled when you return to the main Setup Mode screen the I PAK HE title bar will display Visionscape I PAK HE V3 7 4 Setup Mode Demonstration Mode After you click Run Mode I PAK HE enters Demo Mode I PAK HE loads the first product in the selected product list and runs it for the time set in the Demonstration Mode Parameters dialog box Note For a new product not associated with a device you will be prompted to specify a device This is only for the first time Once the product is associated with a given device you do not have to choose a device again O Once the time limit for a product has been reached I PAK HE automatically stops the product enters Setup Mode changes to the next product in the list and returns to Run
63. Edge Energy Threshold Te Discard Boundary Characters Te Allow Overlapped Characters Te Allow Segmented Characters Hz Min Character Area pixels T Limit Character Width T Limit Character Height FER Selected Font s g Set Unknown Characters to T Pass On No Data Te Check Character Confidence g Minimum Confidence Te Limit the Number of Characters EH Graphics Level Snapshot1 SnapOutputBuffer r NA Two or More Characters eife Dark Characters a 1 0 20 c o G6 a c zo lt 3 M M _ 0 T Hi OCRTFDemo _ M 70 m Show ROI Only Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 51 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 4 9 OCRTrainableFont Tool Properties Pages Tool Settings OCRTrainableFont Tool F LJ zg Default Datum Order OCRTrainableFont Tool Inputs amp InputBuffer Snapshot1 SnapOutputBuffer T Match String Enable r g Match String NA EB RO Contains Single Character T Character Fills Entire ROI r EB Polarity Dark Characters T Adaptive Thresholding M g Threshold 1 g Threshold Bias g Edge Energy Threshold 20 T Discard Boundary Segments K Te Collect All Character Segments EI EE Selected Fonts OCRTFDemo g Set Unknown Characters to T Pass On No Data r Te Check Character Confidence 7 g Minimum Confidence 70 Te Limit the Number of Characters F EB Graphics Level Show ROI Only
64. Every time I PAK HE is subsequently launched it will load and download the Job that was running the last time I PAK HE was shut down All important I PAK HE data is Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 1 Chapter r Run Mode Reference saved in the Windows registry This data includes the last downloaded Job last statistics and others as needed Run Mode Window Figure 7 1 shows the I PAK HE Run Mode window FIGURE 7 1 I PAK HE Run Mode Window Pass Fail Status Border Go to Setup Mode Show Hide Failure Vision scape 1 PAK HE Version 37 2 Run Mode Buttons amp Border Pass Fail Status Border I PAK HE always displays the image with a colored border that indicates the state of the inspection Green pass Red fail Camera x There is one button for each Smart Camera up to four Smart Cameras in the current Product The button contains the name of the device For example in Figure 7 1 the first and only Smart Camera in this Product is named MyHawkEye_1600T Click the button to activate and deactivate the image and results display for MyHawkEye_1600T In a multi camera Job you can toggle the display of the active Smart Cameras by clicking the different buttons This displays a separate camera view its toolbar its statistics and its fail messages Hotkey ALT lt Number of camera gt A Programmer can define the text for a button Advanced Settings gt Product Setting
65. Figure 6 57 FIGURE 6 57 OCV Result Tracking Button Displayed c ha al am Snapshot1 FontT ool Fail Counter Snapshot1 AutoFind1 Fail Counter Snapshot1 FontT ool Fail Counter Snapshot1 BCRTooll Fail Counter e Ke e Q 22 OCY Result Tracking Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 79 Chapter Setup Mode Reference When you click this button the OCV Failure Tracking dialog box is displayed This dialog box is the same as the Setup Mode dialog box except that it does not allow saving the data to a file see Figure 6 24 OCV Failure Tracking Dialog Box on page 6 41 Loading New Jobs When a new Job is loaded and OCV Failure Tracking is enabled any existing Individual Results dialog boxes are removed from I PAK HE Then the Job is scanned for OCV tools For each OCV tool found the OCVResultsDm is selected for upload and an Individual Results dialog box is created for the tool The OCV Tracking screen is updated to reflect the OCV tools that are in the currently loaded Job Report RS 232 ERROR when inspection Result is Empty I PAK HE has a System Setting to enable disable the RS 232 Error codes from being sent during any tool failure By default this setting is enabled and allows I PAK HE to report ERROR when the RS 232 result data is empty You can disable this setting so that when the data is empty I PAK HE does not report anything This
66. Grade Modulation Grade Reference Decode Grade Quality 20x Clear Zone Cell Size reported as 10 Outputs include Cell Fill X Cell Fill Y Cell Size reported as 10 Distortion Angle Distortion Angle Grade Dot Center x where x is or 2 reported as 10 Dot Center Grade Dot Size x where x is 1 or 2 reported as 10 4 38 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual DPM Data Matrix Tool Dot Size Grade Outputs include Axial Nonuniformity reported as 100 Axial Nonuniformity Grade Border Match Border match 0 to 100 Border Match Grade Cell Modulation Grade Cell Modulation Off Cell Modulation On Cell Size reported as 10 Cell Size Grade Center Offset reported as 10 c o o0 To 5 c blr E 15 Center Offset Grade Contrast Data Matrix contrast 0 to 100 Contrast Grade Distortion Angle Distortion Angle Grade Print Growth Grade Print Growth X Measurement of the direction of the bottom L solid border Print Growth Y Measurement of the direction of the left L solid border Size Offset reported as 10 Size Offset Grade Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 39 Chapter Automatic Identification UEC Grade I O Summary Data Matrix Tool provides an I O summary in the Status Bar located at the bottom of the FrontRunner window Inputs Cell Size aaa TimeOut bbb Robust FastWarp Where aaa datum value not shown if cell si
67. If the script is changed but no input or output datums are changed then this button does not need to be clicked Clicking this button also causes all input datums to be set to their default values and to lose their connections to other step results or parameters D 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool Datums created by the package script are added to the user interface Input datums are shown as a box with a drop down list button The input datums can be linked to other similar type datums in the Job Clicking the drop down list button causes the Job tree to be displayed allowing you to select the datum to link to the input datum Resource datums are shown as user editable boxes that can be set to a value directly Output datums are not shown in the user interface for this step but can be seen in the Job tree that comes up when linking an input datum Note I PAK HE supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I PAK HE software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK HE Cylinder_UnWarp This step is an image in image out operation and unwraps an image on a cylindrical surface reducing the distortion caused by the surface Theory of Operation Given a description of the geometry of a cylinder the CylinderUnwrap step will warp the image on the cylinder in such a way as to unwrap the ima
68. LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity Scaled_6_10_NewFont Layoutstep DefaultSymb 1 4 gt QI I Apply Automatic Min Sharpness IF Apply Automatic Min Contrast IV Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pct 90 Symbol Names For Training Choosing Yes will cause the scaled font to be created and inserted into the OCV Tool requiring that the OCV Tool be trained The scaled OCVFont will now be used when training the OCV Tool e hn oc gt e e If none of the OCVFonts were able to match the current image data with at least a 20 score then no best font is found and an error message is displayed Font Scaling The Scale Button The font scaling feature is useful when you already know which font needs to be used but the FOV has changed Font scaling allows re sampling of all FontSymbol train data to match the current FOV A scaled version of the OCVFont will be created and the name of the scaled OCVFont will reflect the Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 19 Chapter OCV Reference change in width and height used to perform the scaling By default scaled OCVFonts are stored in the Job file as part of the associated font based tool These scaled OCVFonts can be stored on the disk using the Save Scaled Font button Choosing a Symbol Choose the OCVFont that needs scaling from the font list Select a symbol from the symbol list This symbol wi
69. Manual Index 15 Index limit units 5 32 5 72 Shortcut A 5 Show all menu options advanced users 6 94 7 3 character array 4 69 custom properties button 4 50 font histogram 4 69 full path 7 10 7 11 histogram 4 69 i o results 6 22 one tool at a time in train and tryout 6 85 only unique codes in change lot setting 6 72 stddev array 4 69 trained symbol shapes 5 17 5 20 5 24 Shutdown Procedure 1 13 Shutting Down I PAK HE 6 98 Signature Authority 3 5 3 20 Single camera default i o scheme 6 59 ocv symbol step 5 59 Sizing Tools 1 7 Smart Camera connecting to pe B 1 discovery 1 10 Snapshot 4 19 Softkeyboard open 1 6 6 9 open automatically 6 94 Software system 1 9 validation xvili Spacing difference in average 4 36 Special features i pak he tools and steps 6 50 training tools 6 25 Specifications functional 1 4 product 1 3 system 1 2 Standard operating procedures 3 5 Start up Procedure 1 10 Statistics character 4 68 file and audit trail 3 21 files 3 2 Statistics amp Data 6 32 button 6 32 clear statistics 6 32 close statistics 6 42 preview data file 6 39 preview statistics 6 40 save data file 6 33 save images 6 33 save stats file 6 33 transmit statistics 6 37 StdDev Array show 4 69 Step tips 5 43 5 52 5 65 Stop bits 6 65 Store all images 6 34 failed images 6 35 no images 6 35 passed images 6 35 Storing inspection results 1 7 Streamline Menus 6 94 Strobe polarity 6 57 STX 6 76 Substitute
70. Match String this inspection is deemed Fail Lo e 9 c o 25 52 Or de Training Match String Enabled Tools When training a Barcode Tool a Data Matrix Tool or an OCRTrainableFont Tool with the Match String enabled I PAK HE displays a Match String dialog box as shown in Figure 6 18 This dialog box is displayed immediately after you select one of these tools either by clicking on the tool or by clicking Next or Previous Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 25 Chapter Setup Mode Reference The dialog box displays the current match string for that tool When you train the tool the newly learned string replaces this string FIGURE 6 18 Match String Dialog Box Match String Current Match String for the DataMatrixT oolVisionBoard Insp1 Snapshot DMRT ooll ae ee New Match String Entry Mode OnScreen Keyboard Input Channel Data Matrix Tool Wildcard Match Character The Data Matrix Tool accepts a wildcard character in the match string By enabling Use Wildcard in Match String on the Data Matrix Tool properties page wildcard processing occurs When disabled no wildcards are allowed in the match string When enabled a character in the match string allows the inspection to pass for any character that appears in the corresponding position of the string read by the Data Matrix Tool Multiple wildcard characters are allowed in the match string By default this setting is disabled
71. Minimum Allowed Sharpness This value determines how crisp a symbol must be to pass inspection It is measured by average edge strength over the entire symbol Typical edge strengths are from 20 to 80 sharpness units Default 0 Range 0 to 256 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage 5 32 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual FontSymbol Contrast Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Contrast property When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast is used to calculate a percentage of the trained contrast value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass When switched from Gray Level to Percentage the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held When switched from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held Default Gray Level QI e Minimum Allowed Contrast The Contrast is the measurement that defines the grayscale foreground to background r
72. Note You may find it easier ifthe trained symbol shapes are not displayed Click Done and uncheck Show Trained Symbol Shapes see Figure 5 9 Tabs for Each Added Symbol on page 5 12 p i oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 17 Chapter OCV Reference Performing the Automatic Font Selection amp Scaling FIGURE 5 15 Ready to Perform Automatic Font Selection amp Scaling Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Available Fonts Symbols DefaultFont _ C O X gt J CO 7 a a ious Scale fe d T Help gt gt Done Once a character has been selected and the OC VFont shape has been correctly sized and positioned around that character in the image the system is ready to perform the automatic font selection and scaling Click AutoFont to start the process During the font selection process each OCVFont that is in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder is tested The first part of the test determines if a symbol with the name of the selected character is trained in the OC VFont If not the process continues to the next OC VFont If the symbol is in the font the system will create several scaled versions of the template based on the size of the symbol in the font and the size of the OC VFont shape Each scaled template is assigned a score value after it is compared to the actual image data inside the OC VFont Box If the score value for any scaled template is better t
73. Operator 11 05 2002 03 40 47 PM Successful Add New User for JaneDoe with Security Level of Operator 11 13 2002 09 04 58Successtul Remove User for JaneDoe 11 13 2002 09 05 05Successtul Remove User for 1 11 13 2002 09 05 12Successtul Remove User for test 11 13 2002 09 07 04Successtul Add New User for JaneDoe with Security Level of Operator 11 13 2002 09 17 34Successtul Remove User for JoeProg 11 13 2002 09 17 41Successful Remove User for programmer K e Display Audit Trail The I PAK Administrator can review an ASCII translation of the Audit Trail He or she cannot do much with this data it is for reference only If the PAK Administrator wanted to archive this data or print this data he or she should see System Settings General Tab starting on page 6 90 FIGURE 3 16 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Display Audit Trail 01 31 2003 10 05 43 LoginName PakAdmin Action End of Batch Reset Audit File F ipak jobs AuditT rail 4uditT rail enc Audit File Removed New Audit File beginning 01 31 2003 10 05 43 Visionscape Pak v2 4 0 Beta 1 Start of Pak Audit Trail 01 31 2003 10 05 46 LoginN ame PakAdmin Action End of Batch View 01 31 2003 10 05 50 LoginName PakAdmin Action Exitting End of Batch 01 31 2003 10 06 44 LoginName PakAdmin Action Entering End of Batch amp End of Batch Reports Button Selected 01 31 2003 10 06 44 LoginName PakAdmin Action End of Batch View 01 31
74. Page Dark on Light Total Residue Area an g 3 3 KI 4 Ki Ki Ki 4 Mask Template oe 5 28 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual FontSymbol e Num of ON Pixels in Template Displays the number of foreground pixels in the trained binary template e Polarity Allows the step to always train with polarity Light On Dark always train with polarity Dark On Light or train using an automatically calculated polarity Default Automatic e Legibility Passes fails the symbol based on this minimum correlation percentage The symbol fails inspection when the correlation percentage is less than this value Default 25 typical for pharmaceutical applications Range 0 to 100 Allowed Movement in X Sets the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the X axis relative to other symbols from its trained position Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting Individual Symbol Search X which limits the search range in X to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction QI Allowed Movement in Y Set the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the Y axis relative to other symbols from its trained position Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting
75. Range 0 to 19 pixels Symbol Sorting Sensitivity Adjusts the sensitivity of the sorting of symbols into rows during training The sorting is based on the positions of the symbols Highest The allowed separation is decreased to 10 of the average height High The allowed separation is decreased to 25 of the average height Normal Default Any two symbols whose top Y positions are separated by more than 50 of the average height of all trained symbols will be considered to be on separate rows Low The allowed separation is increased to 75 of the average height QI Lowest The allowed separation is increased to 90 of the average height Single OCV Symbol Step When enabled the OCVFontless Tool trains a single OCVSymbolStep that includes all the symbols of the mark that are within the mark area box When disabled the OC VFontless Tool trains an OCVSymbolStep for each symbol of the mark that is located within the mark area box i tez oc gt e e Default Disabled e Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Allows the OCVSymbolSteps trained to have a sharpness tolerance automatically calculated for them This automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 65 of the sharpness value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled e Apply Automatic Min Contrast Allows the OCVSymbolSteps trained to have a contrast tolerance automa
76. Selected Font DefaultFont faq Allowed Overlap During Read 5 fay Min Read Match 65 000 Te Automatic Threshold Adjustment M Selected Font Allows selection of an OCVFont to use for training and inspections This property is a drop down list containing the names of all OCVFonts that are in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder Allowed Overlap During Read Used during the learn layout process The value of this property specifies the amount of symbol candidate ROI overlap that is allowed When symbol candidates overlap more than the allowed value tests are performed to determine the best candidate at the overlap position The other candidate will not become part of the layout This overlap measurement is in pixels Default 5 pixels Range 0 to 15 pixels e Min Read Match Is a correlation percentage used as a minimum requirement for a symbol to be considered a candidate during the learn layout process Default 65 Range 0 to 100 Note When characters are not being ead during Learn Layout decrease this property to 60 Avoid settings below 55 e Automatic Threshold Adjustment Enables and disables the automatic threshold adjustment feature When enabled the best match location during the learn layout process calculates an adjustment to the threshold used to 5 42 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFont Tool create binary images at runtime This calculated value is set in the Threshold Adjust
77. This mode should not be used for a SEMI BC412 barcode that contains both a start and stop pattern and a checksum character e I2of5 Check Sum Enable this property to read an I20f5 barcode with a checksum The default is disabled indicating an I2of5 barcode without a checksum character Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 9 Chapter Automatic Identification I20f5 Remove Check Sum Display When this property is enabled the checksum character will not be displayed The default is disabled meaning that the checksum character will be displayed Code39 Check Sum Enable this property to read an Code 39 barcode with a checksum The default is disabled indicating an Code 39 barcode without a checksum character Code39 Remove Check Sum Display When this property is enabled the checksum character will not be displayed The default is disabled meaning that the checksum character will be displayed QR Code Finder Pattern Misalignment Sets the QR code finder pattern misalignment parameter Default 0 Range 0 to 6 Print Verification Enables Verifier outputs when set to anything other than None ANSI None default Print Verification currently supports ANSI Print Verification for Code 128 Code 93 Code 39 I 2 of 5 UPC EAN RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded RSS Stacked When Print Verification is set to anything other than None in addition to decoding the barcode the Barcode Tool
78. Warning Camera 1 Trigger Overrun Note This should be considered an alarm condition and reported immediately to the Operator s management Efforts should be taken to prevent and correct overruns When using Part 11 alarms must be acknowledged by providing your username and password When overruns occur and their dialog box is displayed but not acknowledged by you you will be alerted to these when you try to exit Run Mode and return to SetupMode The password box will not be displayed until these overrun alarm messages have been acknowledged Additionally the timestamp of the overrun will be displayed in the message A process overrun occurs when images are not processed fast enough The I PAK HE system has a limited set of image buffers When images are processed image buffers are freed for re use If the buffers are not freed fast enough because image processing is taking too long the acquisition process will run out of buffers A trigger overrun occurs when a trigger arrives but the Smart Camera is still busy acquiring an image from the last trigger and is therefore not capable of handling this trigger See the HawkEye 1600T Smart Camera Guide to find out the maximum achievable rate for the image size selected in your application 7 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Exiting Run Mode amp Entering Setup Mode Exiting Run Mode amp Entering Setup Mode To begin the sequence of exiting Run Mode cli
79. ZWYZ Show Full Path E rna Cancel FIGURE 5 82 ChangeLayout Error Details QI Change Layout 0740_01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 O0CVFont Tool WXYZWXYZ 0740_01 Inspection Snapshot1 OCVFont Tool WXYZWXYZ OCV Reference Show Full Path eee r NOT fatal m nenn ewen mt Cancel You MUST take action by clicking the Cancel button before I PAK HE will resume In this bad data sent state I PAK HE is declared off line The error message is displayed along with the exact data input and the tools Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 101 Chapter OCV Reference Note The Cancel button makes you return to Run Mode but still in an Off Line state as inspections are NOT restarted because the data was invalid You may return to Setup Mode to retrain or try to send another good Ethernet ChangeLayout data to I PAK HE The Ethernet response back is immediate FAIL Ethernet ChangeLayout Success Response When the Lot ChangeOver is successful the Ethernet message OK is sent out and a message box is displayed For example on good Ethernet ChangeLayout data I PAK HE will display the ChangeLayout dialog box for 5 seconds I PAK HE will make the mouse into an hourglass wait then control goes back to I PAK HE The Ethernet response back is immediate OK FIGURE 5 83 ChangeLayout Successful Lot ChangeOver Tool Path VisionSystem Inspection1 Snapshot1 0
80. a tool is named OCVFontless Tool Random Code the match criteria is Random Code After you train the tool and click Approve I PAK HE scans for and trains any OCVFontless Tools in the snapshot that have the same match criteria you must use the notation to separate the tool name from the match criteria If there is no match criteria in the tool name no I PAK HE uses the entire tool name when searching for OC VFontless tools to train FIGURE 6 63 Training Screen from Training Multiple OCV Tools C t Product A Level Date Time MICROSCA curon roduc ccess Level ate Time Programmer 11 19 2008 08 26 AM AutoStep von Js Inspectiont Snapshot1 OC Fontless Tool OC Fontless Tool OCVFontless Tool Next Tool Zoomin Try Tool Exit Training Previous Next Camera Settings Acquire Live Zoom Out Try All to Main Setup 3 ae i Bf D Oi 12345678 1234567 8 e External Input of Match String Enabling this setting allows an external device computer etc to specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool The necessary information is sent from the external device to I PAK HE External Confirmation is accomplished through a communications handshake between I PAK HE and the external device The communications can be accomplished through RS 232 or Ethernet Note Enabling External Input of Match String mode automatically disa
81. across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity C 3 Highlight to select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties 4 On the General tab click the Use the following IP address radio button and then enter the settings shown in Figure B 3 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual B 3 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC FIGURE B 3 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Dialog Box Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties m General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically IP address 192 188 254 2 Subnet mask i PEE a a KIRE a ARRA j Default gateway Note Although we ve chosen an IP address of 192 168 254 2 this is not the only IP address that will work The important point to remember is that the network portion of your chosen IP address must match the network portion of the addresses you assign to your HawkEye 1600T Smart Cameras The network portion of the IP address is defined by the subnet mask so to use our example above 192 168 254 represents the network number and the value 2 represents the host number It is this last number the host number that must be unique for eac
82. all times the current access level is clearly displayed An active user reverts back to Operator mode after the user defined no activity limit is reached Any time there is a violation an entry is made to a security log file An I PAK Administrator can view this file from I PAK HE by clicking on Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users gt Display Login Violation Log 21 CFR Part 11 Functions The 21 CFR Part 11 drop down menu is accessible for I PAK Administrator Programmers and Supervisors Operators have no access or visibility into this area of the software Typically at the end of a batch or a run of product you ll want to gather your eee k a co TI N data and record your inspection counts for Part 11 records These records and this functionality is discussed below End of Batch Reports After you have finished running successfully a batch of product you may need to store the pertinent information about that bach to a secure place for future review and reconciliation An I PAK HE Supervisor Programmer or the I PAK Administrator can view the batch reports create PDF records of the batch data print these PDFs and archive these PDFs to your archive device Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 7 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 Note Any time you write a file to disk or CD such as when you create a PDF or write that PDF to disk I PAK HE checks to make sure there is room on the device
83. and Data Toolbar and returns you to the I PAK HE Setup Mode window Advanced Settings Advanced Settings displays the Advanced Settings Toolbar as shown in Figure 6 26 The Advanced Settings Toolbar is accessed only via Programmer Mode FIGURE 6 26 Advanced Settings Toolbar Createa Save Product System Edit Tool Tool Windows Close Product Product Settings Settings Set Settings Explorer Advanced This remainder of this section describes the following 6 42 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings e Create A Product starting on page 6 43 e Save Product starting on page 6 54 e Product Settings starting on page 6 56 e System Settings starting on page 6 62 Edit Tool Set starting on page 6 95 e Tool Settings starting on page 6 96 e Windows Explorer starting on page 6 97 e Close Advanced starting on page 6 98 Create A Product This is a Programmer level function The Create A Product button allows the Programmer to define a new product The Create A Product wizard is a series of interconnected dialog boxes that navigate the Programmer from the Product Settings to the System Settings to a flowchart like interface for Step Program creation After defining all the tools the Programmer is taken into Wizard Training mode in order to train the tools After you successfully train all the tools you can perform a tryout in Tryout Mode For consisten
84. any value above except the X and Y allowed movement indicates the test is disabled The bitmap representation of the binary runtime symbol area When the OCVRuntimeTool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key and moving the mouse inside the OCVRuntimeTool ROI but not over the symbols as shown in Figure 5 40 FIGURE 5 40 Step Tip Example 4 DUZ ur 387A901 5 54 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool OCVFontless Tool An OCVFontless Tool does not require an OC VFont Instead it determines the location of characters in the FOV using a blob analysis technique Then it stores training data for each character location as an OCVSymbolStep The OCVFontless Tool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the trained data to verify the quality of the characters being inspected Training Training the OCVFontless Tool involves placing and sizing the OC VFontless Tool box around the area containing the symbols to be inspected When Train is clicked the ROI is scanned for symbol candidates A symbol candidate is a group of connected pixels that have foreground polarity Each symbol candidate that contains enough pixels as defined by the Min Symbol Size in pixels parameter is trained and stored as an OC VSymbolStep Then the OCVFontless Tool box is reset based on the bounding rectangle of all symbo
85. calculated threshold when the Auto Threshold Enabled property is enabled When Auto Threshold Enabled is disabled Manual Threshold is the threshold that is used for binarizing the image Default 135 Range 0 to 255 Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This property is only used when the Auto Threshold Enabled property is enabled Default 10 Range 0 to 255 Character Expansions Useful when dealing with print from a dot matrix printer or any print that is broken up in segments The more sparse the print the higher the value of this property should be This property allows for the broken print to become solid by expanding the segments until they come together Dilations expand each segment Then erosions decrease the size of the character in every direction except the direction in which the segments have connected Dilations and erosions work together to make the segments solid without making the character fatter Default 0 Range 0 to 9 Filter Bright Defects When enabled runtime inspection of the symbol includes a pre processing step for filtering out any bright defects in the image Default Disabled Bright Defect Range Percentage that determines the threshold at which the bright defect filter processes The threshold is calculated by taking this percentage of the range between the binarizing threshold and 255 Defa
86. channel 5 92 5 100 6 63 mask type 5 35 5 75 Overdrive 4 27 Overruns 6 60 7 12 P Parity 6 65 Part Image queue size 6 35 storage mode 6 34 6 35 Password default 6 4 21 cfr part 11 3 4 6 91 programmer 6 1 6 2 6 4 7 13 supervisor 6 1 6 2 6 4 7 13 expires after certain specified time 6 93 forgotten 7 14 21 cfr part 11 7 14 programmer 6 1 supervisor 6 1 traditional not used 3 4 unique default 7 9 operator 6 11 user 3 4 Path Name base file 6 35 PC registry values written to 7 8 requirements minimum 1 2 sluggish response 3 12 supported 1 6 PDFs archiving 3 11 Perl 6 51 D 1 cylinder unwrap warp D 7 dynamic_binarize D 10 failcode D 3 findrotated D 14 none script D 2 D 6 package script 6 51 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 13 Index programming language 6 51 Pharmacode training for barcode tool 4 2 4 13 PLC Monitoring heartbeat 6 61 Polarity 5 26 5 29 5 64 5 69 D 13 Position Enhance 4 28 Postnet training for barcode tool 4 2 4 13 Previous button train and tryout 6 20 Previous Tool Button 6 96 Print verification 4 10 4 14 4 15 4 30 4 31 aim 4 35 dpm 4 39 iaqg 4 38 iso 4 37 set to ansi 4 11 Process Overrun 7 12 Product changeover activities 6 71 creation 6 43 defined 1 8 description text 6 11 load a different 1 10 specifications 1 3 Products archiving 6 14 restoring 6 14 Programmer 6 98 password 6 1 Properties 6 29 setting on group basis 5 62 Protocol externa
87. commands allow an external device or computer to perform a limited set of functions on I PAK HE These functions can be accomplished through either RS 232 or Ethernet depending on the selected Input Channel The commands are accepted by I PAK HE in either Run Mode or Setup Mode Using remote commands you can clear statistics retrieve statistics enter Setup Mode enter Run Mode and change product The syntax of these commands is e Retrieve Statistics RETRIEVESTATS lt EOT gt e Clear Statistics CLEARSTATISTICS lt EOT gt e Go To Setup Mode ENTERSETUPMODE lt EOT gt e GoTo Run Mode ENTERRUNMODE lt EOT gt e Change Product CHANGEPRODUCT lt sp gt newproductname lt EOT gt e Lot Change CHANGELAY OUT path newstring lt EOT gt Where The commands themselves are in ALL CAPS e lt EOT gt is an end of text character chr 4 or Ctrl D in HyperTerminal e lt sp gt is a space character e newproductname is the name of a valid product definition in the I PAK HE Jobs folder e path is the unique path to the tool e newstring is the new layout or match string See Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Usage on page 5 99 for details on the Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT command See RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Usage on page 5 90 for details on the RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT command Remote Commands Details and Syntax e Retrieve Statistics When I PAK HE receives this command the following statistics are sent to the Output Channel specified 6
88. currently in the step list all others ROIs will be hidden This is a useful feature when there are many ROIs in the inspection and you have a hard time selecting the specific ROI s he needs Tools can be selected using the list on the left hand side of the screen See Figure 6 61 FIGURE 6 61 Training Screen Showing One Tool at a Time C t Product A Level Date Time MICROSCAN Twa oe Pogamne i 11718 20080812AM AutoStep Mode ON Vv Inspection1 Wf Snapshot1 gt OC Fontless Tool Tool G B Zoom In Exit AutoStep Settings Options Acquire Live Pesn l Mode BarCode Tool DataMatrix Tool EXPIRATI ON DATE SEP 2008 6MA0282 Zo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or d9 When disabled the tool graphics for all tools will be displayed unless in AutoStep mode in the buffer on the Train and Tryout screen Tools can be selected using the list on the left hand side of the screen or by clicking on the tool graphics for the tool See Figure 6 62 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 85 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 62 Training Screen Showing All Tools M l CROSC AN Current Product Access Level Date Time Test3 Programmer 11719 2008 08 13 AM i Pa Nest Tool 2 Zoomin Try Tool EM Tia ning AutoStep Previous Next Cam r Settings Options Acquire Live Saran EMAN eka Inspection1 Snapshot1 m OCvFor tless Tool E BarCode Tool m DataMatrix Tool EXPIRATION DATE
89. dat sample02 D ata dat sample03 D ata dat oO Reconcile i ou oc L O Yen N File difference found File 1 C Vscape l Pak_HE jobs Configuration4rchives sample02 D ata dat Line Number 4 Contents Current Date Time 11 19 2008 10 49 04 File 2 C scape Pak_HE jobs Configuration4rchives sample03 D ata dat Line Number 4 Contents Current Date Time 11 19 2008 10 49 47 File difference found File 1 C scape l Pak_HE jobs Configuration4rchives sample02 D ata dat Line Number 530 Contents Signature Date Printed 11 19 2008 10 49 06 File 2 C V scape l Pak_HEjobs Configuration4rchives sample03 D ata dat Line Number 530 Contents Signature Date Printed 11 19 2008 10 49 49 The upper left of the display shows you all the files in your I Pak_HE Jobs ConfigurationArchive folder From here you select the two files you wish to reconcile perform a file difference on When you click Reconcile the lower display region will show you the file differences You can view these differences or save them to a file by clicking File gt Save As You can also print these file difference by clicking File gt Print Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users When you click on this Il PAK HE displays the Configure I PAK Users dialog box If you re the I PAK Administrator you can use the commands shown in Figure 3 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 13 Chapter 21 CF
90. direction of the bottom L solid border and Y the direction of the left L solid border direction and picks the worst as the print growth value for determining the print growth grade Print Growth X Measurement of the direction of the bottom L solid border Print Growth Y Measurement of the direction of the left L solid border c o o0 To Sg 5z blr E 15 UEC Grade A Data Matrix symbol has fixed error correction capacity When a Data Matrix is decoded the Error Correction used indicates how much of the error correction capacity is consumed in order to decode the symbol The more the error correction is used the less the Unused Error Correction is left within the error correction capacity which corresponding to poorer print quality of the symbol The grade is A if UEC gt 0 62 B if UEC gt 0 50 C if UEC gt 0 37 D if UEC gt 0 25 F if UEC lt 0 25 ISO Outputs include Contrast Data Matrix contrast 0 to 100 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 37 Chapter IAQG Automatic Identification Contrast Grade Axial Nonuniformity reported as 100 Axial Nonuniformity Grade Print Growth X Measurement of the direction of the bottom L solid border Print Growth Y Measurement of the direction of the left L solid border UEC Grade Grid Nonuniformity Grade Grid Nonuniformity reported as 100 Fixed Pattern Damage
91. enable 4 5 maximum code height 4 7 maximum code length 4 7 maximum no of bars 4 7 minimum code height 4 7 minimum code length 4 7 minimum edge strength 4 8 minimum no of bars 4 7 minimum quiet zone 4 8 narrow bar width 4 7 output upc as ean 4 9 print verification 4 10 qr code finder pattern misalignment 4 10 search direction 4 7 target contrast 4 13 tool time out ms 4 6 train string only 4 5 verification status lower threshold 4 12 verification status upper threshold 4 12 vert probe spacing 4 7 wide bar width 4 7 results code type 4 14 erasure bits 4 14 error bits 4 14 final grade 4 15 final grade score 4 15 number found 4 15 one x dim 4 16 ratio 0 4 16 ratio 1 4 16 ratio 2 4 16 readstatus 4 15 scan 0 9 grade 4 15 status 4 14 sym results 4 16 text 4 14 verification details 4 16 verificationstatus 4 15 training 4 13 pharmacode 4 2 4 13 postnet 4 2 4 13 uploading the string 7 7 used with match string enabled 6 25 Base File number 6 35 6 36 path name 6 35 Batch Reports end of 3 8 Baud Rate 6 65 BestScore 5 18 Blob Analysis Technique ocvfontless tool 5 55 Boxes font ocvruntimetool training 2 39 layout ocvruntimetool training 2 39 Break defined 5 2 Bright Defect Range 5 34 5 74 Buttons add a new user 3 15 advanced settings 6 42 C 3 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index archive restore enabling 6 72 autofont 5 16 5 18 and scaling 5 8 camera results 7 7 change all tool
92. font s 4 56 set unknown characters to 4 56 threshold 4 56 threshold bias 4 56 results maximum character confidence 4 72 mean character confidence 4 72 minimum character confidence 4 72 number of characters found 4 72 ocrtf character results 4 73 output string 4 72 status 4 72 used with match string enable 6 25 OCV inspection 5 1 result tracking button 6 79 symbols as templates 5 36 tips 5 105 tracking 6 40 OCVFont 5 3 5 21 apply automatic min contrast 5 23 sharpness 5 23 id test determination pct 5 24 shape positioning 5 17 5 20 show trained symbol shapes 5 24 tab 5 23 tool font editor button 6 24 OCVFont Tool 5 4 5 37 autofind pin 1 index 5 36 5 38 autofind pin 2 index 5 36 5 39 enable mask output 5 40 graphics level 5 41 individual symbol search x 5 40 individual symbol search y 5 40 mask number of dilations 5 40 runtime id checking 5 40 string downloading 6 63 test for character breaks 5 40 training 5 79 uploading the string 6 25 7 7 use autofind 5 38 OCVFontless Tool 5 4 5 55 apply automatic min contrast 5 59 sharpness 5 59 apply symbol group settings 5 62 autofind pin 1 index 5 58 autofind pin 2 index 5 58 enable mask output 5 62 tryout debug info 5 61 graphics level 5 62 individual symbol search x 5 60 individual symbol search y 5 61 mask number of dilations 5 62 min symbol size in pixels 5 58 num of border spaces to add 5 59 selected symbol group 5 61 single ocv symbol step 5 59 t
93. from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held Default Gray Level e Minimum Allowed Contrast The Contrast is the measurement that defines the grayscale foreground to background relationship of the symbol data To calculate the contrast value the average gray level value of the background pixels is subtracted from the average gray level of the foreground pixels Whenever Minimum Allowed Contrast has a value of 0 no contrast checks are performed QI Default 0 Range 0 to 255 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage e Auto Threshold Enabled Enables and disables the automatic calculation of a threshold for binarizing the image at both train and run time e p i tez oc gt e e When enabled the calculated threshold is displayed in the Manual Threshold property When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used for binarizing is whatever value is in the Manual Threshold property Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment are not used when this property is disabled Default Enabled e Auto Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 73 Chapter OCV Reference Default 0 Range 64 to 64 Manual Threshold Displays the dynamically
94. in the templates of the symbols The grouping of symbols is accomplished by setting a range of values Group Min Pixels and Group Max Pixels for a group By default only one symbol group is defined This group contains all OCVSymbolSteps because the range is automatically set to a minimum of 0 pixels and a maximum of 307200 maximum possible in a 640x480 symbol t tez oc gt e e The groups are defined in order of maximum character pixels so that group 2 s Group Min Pixels property is always equal to group 1 s Group Max Pixels property plus one group 3 s Group Min Pixels property is always equal to group 2 s Group Max Pixels property plus one etc The final group is always defined to have a Group Max Pixels equal to 307200 To add a group change Group Max Pixels of the current group from 307200 to a lower value Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 61 Chapter OCV Reference The Group properties Group on the OCVFontless Tool property page can be set on a group basis Refer to OC VSymbolStep on page 5 67 for more information Apply Symbol Group Settings Sets the group parameters for the currently selected group to the current values in the group properties Use Input Mask This property is applicable only when the OC VFontless Tool has a child step that produces a mask buffer as an output When such a child step is inserted into the OC VFontless Tool Use Inp
95. is defined in the product Custom Settings The OCVFont Tool OCVRuntimeTool Trajectory Step and OCRTrainableFont Tool require a Custom Settings dialog box for proper setup and training In Train and Tryout When the Trajectory Step is selected the Custom Settings button appears in the toolbar For more information about using the custom settings for the Trajectory Step see Chapter 1 of the Visionscape Tools Reference on your CD in PDF format e When the OCRTrainableFont Tool is selected the Font Folder button appears in the toolbar For more information about using the custom settings for the OCRTrainableFont tool see Chapter 9 of the Visionscape Tools Reference on your CD in PDF format When you select either the OC VFont Tool or the OC VRuntimeTool the Font Editor button appears in the toolbar For more information about using Font Editor see Custom Properties Create Modify OC VFonts on page 5 5 Exit Training to Main Setup This is a Supervisor level function Exit Training to Main Setup allows the Supervisor to leave Train and Tryout Mode and return to the Setup Mode window All tools should be trained before clicking Exit Training to Main Setup The Job definition is saved to the hard drive when Exit Training to Main Setup is selected 6 24 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Automatically Setting Tool Settings The I PAK HE interface automatically sets tool settings th
96. is displayed in the Match String dialog box Click OK to accept this new string or Cancel to revert to the old string Note The TCP IP input of match string must be terminated with a NULL 0 character 6 30 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Note I PAK expects the entire match string to be contained within one packet This means that you cannot type the match string in from a terminal program such as HyperTerminal Masking Tool When a vision tool that uses an input mask is selected the Masking Tool menu option becomes available Clicking on this menu option brings up the ROI Masking Tool dialog box as shown in Figure 6 19 FIGURE 6 19 ROI Masking Tool Dialog Box ROI Masking Too The dialog box allows a mask to be drawn into the buffer Then the associated tool uses this mask at run time Only tools that have input mask capabilities in other words Blob Flaw etc can use the ROI Masking Tool This dialog box allows you to select a pen style and drawing style for drawing a mask directly into the buffer You can also use the Fill Style or Eraser Style to fill an enclosed area or erase part of the drawn mask O Fill ROI Fills the entire ROI Clear ROI Clears the entire ROI When editing the mask is complete you must close the ROI Masking Tool to continue with Train and Tryout activities rom o re 52 Or o Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 3
97. is noted on the security log file When you create a new user Supervisor or Programmer you must specify whether or not that user is authorized to do retraining By default this setting is disabled no signature authority Existing users will be set to NOT have this Signature Authority feature and therefore will NOT be able to approve training Any existing users in your user group must get a new user name and enable this Signature Authority feature to approve training The Signature Authority function has been expanded so that when person 1 trains the OCV tools or match strings for the Barcode or Data Matrix tools I PAK HE checks to make sure that user has signature authority in addition to continuing to check for a valid user name password and security level How can I prevent my users from getting to the desktop Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Enable Desktop allows or prevents users from getting to the desktop By default this setting is enabled meaning you can Alt Tab and get to the Windows Desktop from I PAK HE For our Part 11 users this setting should be disabled unchecked so that users cannot get to the desktop or taskbar Disabling the Desktop prevents a user from the following keystrokes Alt Tab Ctrl Esc Start Menu and TaskBar Alt Esc This will prevent changes to the System Clock and will be a deterrent for people who want to use the PC for something other than I PAK HE How safe is th
98. layout string O D hn J2 oc gt oO e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 75 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 50 Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters Dialog Box MICROSC A aren Product peet Dern wes a Change Product Tiran and Tryout Statistics and Data Advanced Settings SEP2008 Approve Inspect Characters Inspect Chars Main Menu Inspection1 Snapshot OCVRuntimeTool Wait Step Se errno SEF yee The list of symbol names that is displayed on the left hand side of the Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters dialog box contains the names of all symbols in the layout in the order in which they appear as shown in Figure 5 51 5 76 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Substitute Ignore FIGURE 5 51 Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters Dialog Box Vislonscape 1 PAK HE dera de AN MICROSCAN Ter ent Product r9 um Ol Soot KE om nss 25M Cumer Tool OCVRurtmet oct Fort Selected Newf or Sessor Pann Onatied The Up and Down buttons scroll through the list to select a symbol name Clicking on a symbol name in the list also selects it Clicking on the scroll bar to the right of the list scrolls through the list O Z D kx oc gt e The FONT box contains the name of all symbols in the selected OCVFont The first item in the list is IGN which ignores characters
99. not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which may vary from state to state Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk microscan com PREFACE CHAPTER 1 Contents Welcome xvii Purpose of This Manual xvii Manual Conventions xvii Validation xvii Development Details xviii 21 CFR Part 11 xviii On the CD xviii Related Documenitation xix Visionscape I PAK HE Documentation xix Visionscape Documentation xix Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection 1 1 System Specifications 1 2 Minimum PC Requirements 1 2 HawkEye 1600T Communications 1 2 Product Specifications 1 3 Functional Specifications 1 4 Touch Input Software 1 6 Configurations with PCs 1 6 Recommended Configurations with PCs 1 6 Supported Camera 1 7 User Interface 1 7 Storing Inspection Results 1 7 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Contents CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 Moving amp Sizing Tools 1 7 A Visionscape I PAK HE Product 1 8 Scan for Sequence Steps Using Outputs 1 9 Software Systems 1 9 Il PAK HE Start up Procedure Typical 1 10 Running I PAK HE for the First Time 1 11 Il PAK HE Shutdown Procedure 1 13 Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials 2 1 Setup Mode amp Run Mode 2 2 Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool 2 3 Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool 2 20 Setting Up the Tool Set 2 20 Font Training 2 32 OCVRuntimeTool Training 2 36 What s Next 2 42 21 CFR Part 11 3 1 Components 3
100. of Data Matrix rows including the borders It will be filled in after a successful train Default 0 Range 8 to 144 0 for Unknown 4 24 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool No of Matrix Columns The number of Data Matrix columns similar to the row parameter Default 0 Range 8 to 144 0 for Unknown e Image Style Options include Mirror The Data Matrix is viewed as a mirror image Normal The Data Matrix is viewed as is Auto By default set and will be set to Normal Matrix Polarity Specifies the border and background color orientation Auto By default set and will be set accordingly after a successful train Light on Dark Light cells on a dark background Dark on Light Dark cells on a light background e Matrix Orientation Selections are Omnidirectional 0 90 180 270 45 135 225 and 315 When the Data Matrix orientation changes from run to run then Omnidirectional should be used When the orientation will not change selecting the correct orientation angle will produce a more robust read The orientation angle is formed by the x axis and the bottom of the solid border of the L shape The angle is positive in a counterclockwise direction Setting the orientation to a certain degree will not necessarily prevent a Data Matrix of different orientation from being located c o o0 To Sg F _ a5 15
101. of the OCV files in this directory Right click on any file and select Properties Turn Off Uncheck the Read Only attribute Click the OK button Create the C demo_img folder Copy the image tif files From C Vscape I PAK_ HE Demo To C demo_img Check Jobs Before Running Demo Mode Before using Demo Mode use Change Product to load the Job A Device Error dialog box may be displayed Click the Select a Different Device button and choose the Smart Camera that should run this Job If the Save Product dialog box appears click the Yes button You need to disable Enable Failed Image Queue and set the image upload rate before you use Demo Mode a Go to Setup Mode b Click Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results c Uncheck Enable Failed Image Queue d For Image Upload Max Rate Per Second click to select Maximum e Click OK and then click Close Advanced Run the product and verify that the counters increment and that the images update Repeat this procedure for each product that will be run in Demo Mode C 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Demo Mode Jobs Demo Mode Jobs Before entering Demo Mode you can create several products that show the functionality that you want to demonstrate These products should be configured so that they Load Images from File instead of Acquire from Camera You can modify this when you train the selected product When the current
102. of the step e CylUnwrapped Image The modified image I O Summary None Dynamic_Binarize Theory of Operation The Dynamic Binarize script is used when you want to binarize your image which means to convert all of the pixels below a threshold to 0 and all those above the threshold to 255 This script will dynamically calculate its binary threshold each time it runs Using Dynamic_Binarize This script provides you with an ROI like any other Vision tool in Visionscape would You can position and size the ROI over any area of your image and an output buffer will be created of the same width and height and containing the D 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool binary representation of all of the pixels within the ROI In Figure D 7 and Figure D 8 we demonstrate how the text on a chip can be binarized FIGURE D 7 Custom Vision Tool Running Dynamic_Binarize Perl Script 231 002700 L240693 ANO 9811 AA CHOSy3au KOREA v 2 Q0 FS eS Fc Oo gt lt b a Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 11 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques FIGURE D 8 Output Buffer produced by Dynamic_Binarize Perl Script 231 002700 L2A0693 NND 9811 AA CHO3980 KOREA Sol Ee bib pe ARRAY Description The Dynamic Binarize script will calculate either the average or median gray value of all the pixels within its ROI
103. only used when Auto Thresholding Enabled is enabled Range 0 to 255 Default 20 Graphics Level Single Character Two or More Characters Enables various graphics options at runtime Default Show Basic Graphics InputBuffer Single Character Two or More Characters Allows selection of the buffer to work on from the list of currently available buffers The default buffer will be the output buffer of its originator This is usually the output buffer of the closest enclosing Snapshot but can also be the buffer of any step that generates an output image Limit Character Height Two or More Characters This allows you to specify a minimum and maximum height for the characters found Default No height limits Limit Character Width Two or More Characters This allows you to specify a minimum and maximum width for the characters found Default No width limits 4 54 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool TABLE 4 7 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized continued Property Description Limit the Number of Characters When enabled the tool will return only a limited Single Character number of characters The characters with the Two or More Characters maximum confidence level up to that limit see Maximum Number of Characters description will be returned Default Disabled Min Character Area pixels This option is displayed only w
104. overall Verification Status for the inspection will be the lowest status of the enable parameters c oO DD Sg F lt 3 e Graphics Level Selects the amount of graphics displayed at the completion of step execution Show None When enabled no graphics are drawn Show Graphics When enabled Data Matrix locating graphics and any decoded text will be displayed e Contrast Report The units that will be used for the reporting of contrast These are Uncalibrated Self Calibrated and Reflectance Calibrated Reflectance Calibrated may be used if values from a Data Matrix tool calibration have been generated by reading a Calibration Standard that corresponds to the entered Target Contrast of the Calibration Standard e Calibration Contrast Max The value returned from a Data Matrix tool calibration that indicates the pixel brightness that represents white Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 31 Chapter Training Automatic Identification Calibration Contrast Min The value used by a Data Matrix tool calibration to represent what the Smart Camera sees as absolute black Because the gains and offset of the Smart Camera may not yield a value of 0 for black this must be determined experimentally by blocking the light from the Smart Camera and determining the average pixel brightness by moving the cursor across the presented image This must be manually entered for the Data Matrix tool t
105. pixels in the binary template and a bitmap representation of the binary template as shown in Figure 5 37 5 52 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 5 37 Step Tip Example 1 When the mouse is not positioned over a particular symbol area the Step Tip displays the currently trained Layout Characters or just the name of the OCVRuntimeTool when it is not trained as shown in Figure 5 38 FIGURE 5 38 Step Tip Example 2 QI When the OCVRuntimeTool has been run using Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key when the mouse is positioned over the symbol area as shown in Figure 5 39 FIGURE 5 39 Step Tip Example 3 e i oc gt e e ALII I 87A90 ale le Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 53 Chapter OCV Reference Inspection information includes The Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the trained binary template The X and Y position upper left corner of the symbol relative to the OCVRuntimeTool shape The X and Y allowed movement of the symbol The Legibility Percentage and the Legibility Tolerance The Sharpness Contrast and number of Breaks found along with the associated tolerances The Initial and Final Residue percentages along with the associated tolerances The Largest Final Residue Blob Percentage and its associated tolerance Note A 1 for
106. s easier to go to the Train and Tryout screen to adjust your tool settings 6 96 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings When complete close the Tool Settings dialog box Refer to the Visionscape Tools Reference for complete information on the latest tool settings FIGURE 6 66 Tool Settings Dialog Box Tool Settings Previous Tool Next Tool Tool Settings for Inspection1 OCVFont Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolari Al A Cc Aid Default Datum Order gt OCVFont Tool Inputs T Use AutoFind wi g AutoFind Pin 1 Index 1 g AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 fay Max Contrast Difference 100 g Individual Symbol Search X 3 g Individual Symbol Search Y 3 Ve Test For Character Breaks r T Runtime ID Checking wi H Graphics Level Show ROI Only O Windows Explorer Windows Explorer allows a Programmer to launch a Windows Explorer program for configuration management Reviewing the read only configuration files or moving copying or deleting files can now occur without leaving the I PAK HE interface Every time this button is clicked it launches another Windows Explorer session ha al am e O e Q 22 Note Do not move the Jobs from the I Pak HE Jobs folder while I PAK HE is running Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 97 Chapter Setup Mode Referen
107. snapshot per Smart Camera A 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Installing the Software Note On startup a message is displayed that indicates that only resolutions 1024 768 and 1280 1024 are supported gt Installing the Software This section describes how to install the I PAK HE software its driver and its support software The installation is allowed on the Windows 2000 and XP operating systems Visionscape Studio must be installed before you install I PAK HE o Sg LG zE le an Before installing any software ensure that you log into the computer with an account that has administrator privileges Be sure to disable any virus protection software you are running The I PAK HE CD contains the following folders e I PAK_HE Setup Contains the Visionscape I PAK HE software e Visionscape_setup Contains the Visionscape software vskit Contains the VSKit software and manual e Adobe Reader 8 12 Setup Contains Adobe Reader V8 12 install software Installing the Visionscape Software 1 To install the Visionscape software place the CD into the CD ROM drive If this web browser is not displayed automatically double click Setup html at the root of the CD 2 Click Install Visionscape Software The InstallShield Wizard starts and displays the following screens Several messages about Run or Save click Run Welcome screen click Next License
108. the OCV Tool s layout With Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller enabled you are able to enter fewer symbols than the number in the current layout I PAK HE software automatically ignores the extra symbol positions Lo e 9 c o 25 52 Or d9 Although the OCV Tool ignores the symbols during OCV inspection the AutoFind still uses those symbol positions as templates if they were assigned as templates when the tool was trained If you wish to ignore completely Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 73 Chapter Clear Statistics Setup Mode Reference symbol positions at runtime you must ensure that those symbol positions are not used by the AutoFind Results Reporting This section allows you to configure I PAK HE to output selected inspection results through the RS 232 Communications Port and or to a file on the PC This may be useful when you need a matrix match or read string or a Font Tool s string to be communicated to an external device at runtime in the case of RS 232 Runtime Result or to log inspections at runtime in the case of Save Runtime Results to a File In either case the setup is similar I PAK HE presents a list of inspection results to upload as part of the Inspection Step These are noted as Select Results to Upload on the Inspection Step s property page I PAK HE selects certain results our users are most interested in automatically These can easily be seen on the Run Mode Di
109. the inspection procedure When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Default 100 0 Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pixel count in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default symbol size Range 0 to symbol size The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection This property is good for catching smudges that are aesthetically poor but would pass after all inspection operations are performed on it A value of 100 or symbol size means initial residue is ignored Final Residue Method Selects between three algorithms for final residue analysis Total Residue Area This is the default This choice counts all On pixels in the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Limit pixel or percent as the tolerance Max Residue Blob Only counts the pixels in the largest blob of the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Max Blob Size as the tolerance Both Performs both methods Final Residue Limit Sets the amount of objectionable residue that is to be deemed passable when Final Residue Method is set to Total Residue Area or Both Final residue calculation is done after the image processing on the residue image that is associated with Maximum F
110. those that were not there at train time but are in the image at runtime fills while yellow pixels are those that were there at train time but are not there at runtime voids Show Details also displays the blob outline of the characters at train time The AutoThreshold properties page Figure 5 43 of the OCVFontless Tool is used for segmentation of the image during training FIGURE 5 43 AutoThreshold Properties Page OCVFontless Tool TwoPt Locator AutoFind Autot hreshold ComputePolarity g Bi z Default Datum Order AutoThreshold Inputs T Auto Thresholding Enabled wi g Edge Energy Threshold 20 E Threshold Adjustment 0 Hj Threshold 135 e Auto Thresholding Enabled Enables and disables the automatic thresholding When enabled a threshold is calculated using the ROI of the step This calculation uses edge detection to determine foreground and background information The calculated threshold is displayed in e ha oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 63 Chapter OCV Reference Threshold Although it is called AutoThreshold the Auto portion can be disabled When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used by the parent step is whatever value is in the Threshold property The Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment properties are not used when Auto is disabled Default Enabled Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pi
111. to be saved to a file Save Runtime Results to a File affects inspection time and system throughput The fewer items that are saved the more efficient PAK HE will be If the trigger method is set to continuous or the inspection is triggered at high rates the flood of inspection results can bog down the PC s resources making the mouse unresponsive After this product s tools are trained you can go into Run Mode Using a program such as Notepad you can verify the inspection results are being output from I PAK HE to the file specified as shown in Figure 6 56 FIGURE 6 56 Sample Save Results Output P InspectionResults dat Notepad File Edit Format wiew Help MyHawkEye_1600T Snapshot OCVF ontLess OCY Results O Status MyHawkEye_1600T SnapshotOCVFontLess OCV Results 1 XLoc The format of these inspection results is VisionDevice Snapshot Name symbolic name result lt delimiter gt Where lt Delimiter gt is one of these user defined symbols comma pound sign or asterisk Each grouping of results is terminated with a lt CR gt carriage return Note Sometimes inspection results reported are in the form of arrays or lists Data will be reported in full I PAK HE will not parse or interpret data results 6 78 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings At Runtime I PAK HE will write these inspection results to the file after every results upload The default file name is
112. to other step results or parameters Datums created by the package script are added to the user interface Input datums are shown as a box with a drop down list button The input datums can be linked to other similar type datums in the Job Clicking the drop down list button causes the Job tree to be displayed allowing you to select the datum to link to the input datum Resource datums are shown as user editable boxes that can be set to a value directly Output datums are not shown in the user interface for this step but can be seen in the Job tree that comes up when linking an input datum Note I PAK HE supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I PAK HE software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK HE g FailCode The FailCode script allows you to encode the failed statuses of various Steps in your Job into a single 32 bit integer value Typically this is used when you want to cut down on the amount of data that is uploaded from the inspection but also want to know the status of a large number of Steps When added to your Job the FailCode script will present you with a list of 32 inputs on the properties page as shown in Figure D 2 7 Qo FS W J Fc S O o hat a Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 3 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques FIGURE D 2 FailCode Script Custom Step Inputs
113. tool set 6 95 product settings 6 56 save product 6 54 system settings 6 63 tool settings 6 96 windows explorer 6 97 AIM Print Verification 4 35 Allow outlined cells 4 29 severe damage 4 29 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 1 Index steep angle 4 29 Allowed movement in x 5 29 5 69 y 5 29 5 69 overlap during read 5 42 5 52 5 106 thickening of symbol 5 39 5 48 5 60 thinning of symbol 5 39 5 49 5 60 Alt c 7 6 esc preventing getting to desktop 3 20 f 7 3 number of camera 7 2 s 7 6 Always Ask To Save Font 5 8 Angle step size D 16 D 17 variation 4 26 Appearance Flaw Break Test 5 32 5 71 Apply automatic min contrast 5 23 5 48 5 59 sharpness 5 23 5 48 5 59 symbol group settings 5 62 to all fontsymbols 5 35 default symbol 5 35 Archive path 6 72 pdfs 3 11 Archive Restore Button and pre programmed products 6 11 enabling 6 72 ocvfonts 6 16 Archiving Products 6 14 ASCII Setup 6 30 Assisted Learn 4 20 4 23 4 33 Audit Trail and alarms 3 22 failed login 3 20 login violation 3 5 overruns 3 22 sluggish updates to it 3 12 statistics file 3 21 decrypted 3 8 display button 3 18 enable configuration file 6 91 resetting 3 12 safety 3 20 translation 3 9 was it compromised 3 20 what it is 3 2 Auto Threshold adjustment 5 33 5 52 5 73 enabled 5 33 5 34 5 73 5 74 Auto Thresholding enabled 5 25 5 63 5 64 AutoFind 5 5 5 35 and lot changeover 5 90 ocv tool 6 73 pin index 5 38
114. useful when multiple barcodes are enabled in Enabled Codes in order to read different types of barcodes after train Table 4 2 lists and describes the code types TABLE 4 2 Code Types Code Type Description 16 PDF 32 Code 128 64 Code 93 128 Code 39 256 20f5 512 Codabar 1024 UPC EAN 4 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual TABLE 4 2 Code Types continued Barcode Reading Code Type Description 2048 UPC E 4096 UPC Supplemental 8192 BC412 16384 Postnet 32768 Pharmacode 65536 RSS 14 131072 RSS Limited 262144 RSS Expanded 524288 RSS Stacked 1048576 Composite 4 2097152 QR Code Number Found Number of barcodes found decoded or not e ReadStatus Status indicates true when a barcode is found and decoded regardless of whether the decoded string matches the match string value c o 6G DD Sg F 20 lt 3 e VerificationStatus As defined by Verification Status Upper Threshold and Verification Status Lower Threshold Grades 4 0 A F are divided into three ranges Good Grades above or equal to the Upper Threshold Fair Grades below the Upper Threshold but greater than or equal to the Lower Threshold Poor Grades below the Lower Threshold VerificationStatus is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Scan 0 9 Grade The ove
115. 0 25 52 Or ee If there are no Inspected Characters in the Job the third line of data will not be present RS 232 Syntax for a Multi Camera Job Each Inspection Step has the following format Complete data is terminated by the lt eot gt lt If gt lt cr gt Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 37 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Product product_name lt lf gt lt cr gt Date Time mm dd yyyy hh mm ss lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters1 lt lf gt lt cr gt I1 lt Lf lt cr gt P1 lt lf lt cr gt R1 lt lf lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters2 lt lf gt lt cr gt I2 lt Lf lt cr gt P2 lt lf gt lt cr gt R2 lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters3 lt lf gt lt cr gt I3 lt Lf lt cr gt P3 lt lf gt lt cr gt R3 lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters4 lt lf gt lt cr gt 14 lt Lf lt cr gt P4 lt lf gt lt cr gt R4 lt lf gt lt cr gt lt eot gt lt lf gt lt cr gt A dialog box is displayed to the Supervisor indicating statistics have been sent When there are no Inspected Characters in that inspection the Inspected Character line of data will not be present e TCP IP Protocol amp Syntax The TCP IP protocol and syntax for a transmission of statistics is as follows TCP IP Protocol I PAK HE is the Server The TCP IP default Server Port is 7000 You can chang
116. 1 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Statistics amp Data The Statistics amp Data button displays the Statistics and Data Toolbar as shown in Figure 6 20 Refer to the descriptions on page 6 32 through page 6 42 FIGURE 6 20 Statistics and Data Toolbar Save Save p Preview Clear Save Transmit Preview D V Statistics a coio Images Statistics coha Statistics Tracking i Statistics i This remainder of this section describes the following e Clear Statistics starting on page 6 32 e Save Stats File starting on page 6 33 e Save Config File starting on page 6 33 e Save Images starting on page 6 33 e Transmit Statistics starting on page 6 36 e Preview Config File starting on page 6 39 e Preview Statistics starting on page 6 40 e OCV Tracking on page 6 40 e Close Statistics starting on page 6 42 Clear Statistics This is a Supervisor level function Clear Statistics resets the Inspect Pass and Fail counts to zero 0 It also resets the Failure Counters on the Failure Report to zero 0 At this point PAK HE clears the counts sets them tozero that are stored in the registry A dialog box is displayed verifying that statistics have been reset Note There are limits on the counters based on display restrictions For example Inspected 10 characters up to 2 147 483 647 Pass 10 characters up to 2 147 483 647 Fail 10 characters up to 2 1
117. 1 Access Levels 3 2 Enabling 21 CFR Part11 3 3 The I PAK Administrator 3 4 Customer Responsibilities 3 5 Starting Il PAK HE Using Part 11 amp Adding I PAK HE Users 3 6 21 CFR Part 11 Functions 3 7 End of Batch Reports 3 7 Create PDFs 3 9 Print 3 10 Archive PDFs 3 11 Reset Audit Trail 3 12 Reconciliation of Configuration Files 3 12 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users 3 13 vi Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Contents Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern 3 19 How do activate 21 CFR Part 11 3 19 What are the Password Schemes amp Restrictions 3 19 How can prevent my users from getting to the desktop 3 20 How safe is the Audit Trail from being compromised 3 20 How safe are the Jobs files from being compromised 3 21 How safe are the Configuration amp Statistics files from being compromised 3 21 Can this data be saved to a non editable format 3 21 How do know who made the last batch or change 3 21 My company wants the number of login failures to be 3 but Il PAK HE defaults to 5 What can I do 3 21 If get an alarm on I PAK HE how will know someone saw it 3 22 What is the date format used inside the Part 11 files 3 22 All this writing to disk what if Il PAK HE runs out of hard drive space 3 22 CHAPTER 4 Automatic Identification 4 1 Barcode Reading 4 1 Other Steps Used 4 1 Theory of Operation 4 1 Description 4 2 Settings 4 5 Training 4 13 Results 4 14 I O Summary 4 16 Data Matrix Tool 4 18 Oth
118. 1 method 5 30 initial residue limit 5 30 legibility 5 29 manual threshold 5 33 5 34 5 73 5 74 maximum flaw size 5 31 min appear flaw break size 5 32 Index 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual minimum allowed contrast 5 33 sharpness 5 32 num of on pixels in template 5 29 output mask type 5 35 polarity 5 29 residue limit units 5 29 sharpness limit units 5 32 Forgotten Password 7 14 resetting a user s password 3 17 using 21 cfr part 11 7 14 Format config file 6 95 Four Camera Default I O Scheme 6 60 Functional Specifications 1 4 G General Tab 6 90 Go directly between run mode and training 6 84 to run mode 6 68 6 70 setup mode 6 68 6 70 Graphics level 5 41 5 50 5 62 Group max pixels 5 61 min pixels 5 61 properties 5 62 H HawkEye discovery 1 10 HeartBeat 6 61 and plc monitoring 6 61 Height 4 27 Help i o debug 6 8 menu 6 8 Histogram high clip D 13 low clip D 13 show 4 69 show font 4 69 Horizontal 4 7 4 27 then vertical 4 7 4 27 Hub B 1 Index l VO data valid 6 60 device type 6 59 tab 6 58 IAQG Print Verification 4 38 ID checking 2 37 5 21 5 24 5 105 test determination pct 5 24 5 105 IGN 2 39 5 77 5 78 Ignore extra layout symbols when input is smaller 6 73 single edges 4 28 IGNORE Character 6 13 Ignoring character 5 78 Image file name 6 35 menu 6 7 upload set the max rate per second 6 83 C 2 Include Button 4 60 Individual Symbol search x 5 29 5 40 5
119. 1A Comm Port 2 Baud Rate o gt Parity None Comm Port 2 not available Data Bits je CC gt j Stop Bits j H Timeout Seconds j s Field Delimiter Char Protocol PAK Selectable Main Porting IF Display Changeover Strings Main Comm Pot 1 2 Cancel Ethernet TCP IP After you click this button the Configure Communications dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 47 6 66 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 47 Configure Communication Ethernet Settings Configure Communication x r Ethernet Settings Local Port Number Foo T7 v Local Host Name siemens 1 01db62 Local IP Address j 61 218 121 84 Cancel Define the TCP IP Settings as follows O e Local Port Number The default is 7000 The range is 7000 to 7004 e Local Host Name Read only display of the local host Local IP Address Read only display of your PC s IP address This is the IP address that TCP IP clients will need to use when trying to connect to I PAK HE o e 9 o o gt 52 Or vw Note I PAK HE acts as a TCP IP Server meaning that it waits for TCP IP clients to connect to it in order to handle Ethernet communications Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 67 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Remote Commands Supported by RS 232 and Ethernet Remote
120. 1_0 tif ce fail_ Snap1_1 tif c fail_Snap1_ 2 tif c fail_Snap1_3 tif c fail_Snap1_4 tif c fail_Snap1_5 tif c fail_ Snap1_6 tif c fail_Snap1_7 tif c fail_Snap1_ 8 tif c fail_Snap1_ 9 tif When there were two cameras in the inspection the images would be saved as c fail_ Snap1_0 tif c fail_Snap2_0 tif c fail_Snap1_1 tif c fail Snap2_1 tif c fail_Snap1_2 tif c fail Snap2_2 tif c fail_Snap1_ 3 tif c fail Snap2_3 tif c fail_Snap1_4 tif c fail_Snap2_4 tif c fail_Snap1_5 tif c fail_Snap2_5 tif c fail_Snap1_6 tif c fail_Snap2_6 tif c fail_Snap1_7 tif c fail_Snap2_7 tif c fail_Snap1_8 tif c fail_Snap2_8 tif c fail_Snap1_9 tif c fail_Snap2_9 tif In these file names Snap1 indicates the first camera and Snap2 indicates the second camera A similar file naming scheme results from an inspection with three or four cameras The Base File Number can be greater than zero 0 making it easy to identify stored images from different batch runs Update Inspection Step s with Current Settings When you first enable the Part Image Queue on this screen you should click this button to set your new values into the Job Then you can return to Run Mode and images will be stored in the Part Queue on the Smart Camera Upload Images from Part Queue Now If you have already enabled the Part Queue on the Smart Camera and wish to upload the images click this button and uploaded images will be saved to
121. 2003 10 07 12 LoginName PakAdmin Action Exitting End of Batch 02 03 2003 10 57 49 LoginName NONE Action Starting Pak Running Visionscape l Pak v2 4 0 Beta 1 Pak Startup No One is Logged In Yet 02 03 2003 10 57 55 LoginName NONE Action Enter Run Mode Reverting to Operator Current Product newTest Pak Startup No One is Logged In Yet 02 03 2003 10 58 16 LoginName NancyP Action Login Attempted and Succeeded Returning to Setup Mode from RunMode Visionscape l Pak v2 4 0 Beta 1 RunTime Statistics File for Product newT est 3 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern From the numerous audits Microscan has hosted through the years there are certain questions that keep being asked regarding to how I PAK HE is technically compliant Here are some of these questions and our answers How do activate 21 CFR Part 11 By default I PAK HE does not activate Part 11 functionality as a factory setting As an off the shelf product not all of our users are required to use Part 11 To enable Part 11 see Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 on page 3 3 The activation state enabled or disabled of Part 11 is displayed lower right corner in the status bar of Setup mode as shown in Figure 3 17 FIGURE 3 17 21 CFR Part 11 Enabled SWSYYS 1 Part1 Enabled What are the Password Schemes amp Restrictions
122. 42 5 52 min read match 5 42 5 52 min symbol size 5 25 num border spaces to add 5 25 ocvfont tool allowed overlap during read 5 42 ocvruntime tool allowed overlap during read 5 52 selected font 5 42 5 51 tab 5 13 5 24 Learn assisted 4 23 Legibility 5 29 5 69 LF character defined 6 37 Lighting 6 57 Limitations memory 6 98 Live Button train and tryout 6 23 Load a different product 1 10 images from file demo mode C 3 software systems 1 9 Local host name 6 67 ip address 6 67 port number 6 67 Location jobs folder 6 14 stored fonts 5 5 Login 7 13 attempts set number of failed 3 22 user 3 4 Loop 6 22 Lot ChangeOver rs 232 5 90 Index 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual M Main comm port 6 65 Manual Threshold 5 33 5 34 5 73 5 74 Mask Number of Dilations 5 40 5 50 5 62 Masking Tool 6 31 Master Font 5 4 5 45 Match String 5 82 6 25 6 88 downloading 6 63 enable 4 13 4 24 6 25 6 92 used with barcode tool 6 25 used with data matrix tool 6 25 used with ocrtrainablefont tool 6 25 external input 5 82 mismatch action 5 83 6 89 value 4 5 Matrix orientation 4 26 polarity 4 33 size variation 4 26 Max contrast difference 5 39 5 49 5 60 flaw size 5 105 residue blob 5 30 5 70 Maximum flaw size 5 31 5 35 5 70 5 71 search angle D 16 D 17 Memory limitations 6 98 Menus calibration 6 6 file 6 3 help 6 8 image 6 7 setup mode 6 3 streamlining 6 94 Min appear flaw break size 5 32 5 72 re
123. 47 483 647 6 32 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Statistics amp Data If another inspection occurs after the counters have reached this limit then the counter is set to 2 147 483 647 and stops incrementing This limit 2 147 483 647 is based on the size of a VB LONG Save Stats File Save Stats File saves the last runtime statistics to a file The data saved includes Product date time and counters When Part 11 is enabled the statistics file is read only Save Config File This is a Supervisor level function Save Config File saves a human readable version of the current Product s Job definition and its essential data to a file PAK HE prompts for a name The data saved includes Product date time counters Inspected Character String and Fail Counters When Part 11 is enabled the configuration file is read only Note When there is more than one OCVFont Tool OCVRuntimeTool Barcode Tool or Data Matrix Tool only the last inspected tool s string is saved Save Images Save Images is lossless it saves every image of the type you specify in Part Image Storage Mode see page 6 34 After you click Save Images the Retrieve and Save Image As dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 21 6 Filling in the Retrieve and Save Image As dialog box is a two step process 3 5 e p Before you enter Run Mode fill in the Part Image Storage information 9 top half oo Q Aft
124. 49 5 60 5 69 5 106 search y 5 29 5 40 5 49 5 61 5 69 5 106 Initial Residue defined 5 2 limit 5 29 5 30 5 69 Input channel 5 92 5 100 6 30 6 63 RS 232 6 27 line n 5 80 5 85 match string button 5 84 5 85 5 88 Inspection how it can fail 5 37 5 46 5 55 ocv 5 1 passed 6 61 results storing 1 7 steps without snapshots 6 52 trigger 6 61 InspectionResults dat 6 78 6 79 IntelliFind and memory limitations on smart camera 6 98 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 9 Index cameras you can use with 1 1 Intensity Enhance 4 28 Interface user 1 7 Interval Counters 7 8 reset 7 5 IO Debug 6 8 I PAK Administrator audit trail 3 2 can view security file 3 7 configuration files 3 2 overview 3 4 password 3 4 reset audit trail 3 12 right to re train 3 6 user accounts 3 14 I PAK HE enclosure standard 6 65 selectable main port 6 65 shutdown procedure 1 13 shutting down 6 98 start up procedure 1 10 start up sequence A 5 system name 6 95 ipak usr stores 21 cfr part 11 info 1 xviii A 5 ISO Print Verification 4 37 J Job defined 1 8 Jobs 3 1 folder location 6 14 JobsBackup 6 14 K Key Button 7 13 Keyboard 6 27 input of match string 5 78 5 79 6 89 Keys moving amp sizing tools 1 7 L Layout box 2 39 step property tab 5 22 Layout Step automatic segmentation 5 11 5 24 LayoutStep allowed overlap during read 5 106 automatic segmentation 5 24 automatic threshold adjustment 5
125. 6 Range 2 to 256 bars 5 5 e Narrow Bar Width Default 1 Range 1 to 100 pixels E 8 e Wide Bar Width Default 100 Range 1 to 100 pixels e Search Direction Specifies the search method used within the ROI lt ke Horizontal Vertical Horizontal then Vertical default should work best for most cases Vertical then Horizontal Criss Cross e Hori Probe Spacing Sets the spacing in pixels between two horizontal barcode locating probes When reading short codes such as Postnet the value should be set to 8 Default 16 pixels Range 8 to 256 pixels e Vert Probe Spacing Similar to Hori Probe Spacing it sets the spacing in pixels between two vertical barcode locating probes This value Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 7 Chapter Automatic Identification does not apply to Postnet or Pharmacode which are not designed to be read at more than 45 Default 16 pixels Range 8 to 256 pixels Minimum Edge Strength When the contrast of the barcodes is low especially for low contrast BC412 images the edge strength value can be set between 5 and 18 gray scale values The edge strength can be raised to a higher value when the barcode has very high contrast With higher edge strength the tool will ignore most low contrast objects and get to the barcode area more quickly If the barcode s contrast is unlikely to change e g when a stable lighting source is employed t
126. 60 Contents of Failed Images Folder fe C scape I Pak_HE FailedImages File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O Back 7 2 2 Search i Folders ly C gt X l2 Address jo C Wscape I Pak_HE FailedImages Image_MyHawkEye_1600T_Snapshot1_BufOut_0O1 tif 314KB Microsoft Off Image_MyHawkEye_1600T_Snapshot1_BufOut_02 tiF 314KB Microsoft Off Image_MyHawkEye_1600T_Snapshot1_BufOut_03 tiF 314 KB Microsoft Off 6 82 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings When failed images are written to the hard disk I PAK HE overwrites any images that may already be in the I PAK HE FailedImages folder It is the Supervisor s or Programmer s responsibility to save any images that might be needed for debugging or other purposes at a later time Image Upload Maximum Rate To better utilize PAK HE s CPU usage you can set the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results gt Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second This setting is for the number of images transferred back to the PC per second At runtime the inspected images get transferred back from the Smart Camera to the PC and are displayed on the Camera views on the I PAK HE Run Mode interface In earlier software versions from Microscan we tried to display the maximum number of images possible In some cases however especially on slower PCs this flood of images can bog down the PC s CPU and may max out the CPU making the mouse unresponsive
127. 600T Smart Camera Guide cd 9 e 9 3 kan Q 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 59 Chapter 1 0 Input Output Setup Mode Reference TABLE 6 1 Smart Camera Default I O Scheme Function Trigger Comment Output Output Output Data Valid When TRUE Inspection Passed output can be sampled Output Inspection Passed TRUE if all Tools passed for Inspection Output Overrun TRUE if there is an Overrun on the Smart Camera Q N O oO gt wo mM Output Run Setup TRUE for Run Mode FALSE for Setup Mode Outputs TRUE when enabled Data Valid is an output that indicates the Inspection Passed output is valid The duration of Data Valid is user programmable via the Product Setting Menu Data Valid is TRUE for the duration specified Default 10ms Range 1 500ms Overruns This output is used to signal either a trigger overrun or process overrun condition from the running inspection I PAK HE will detect any overruns from the running device and then assert this output to signal your external controller of this error condition Trigger Overrun Occurs when trigger signals are received faster than the Smart Camera is physically capable of acquiring images Process Overrun Visionscape Devices are capable of acquiring images in the background while an image from a previous trigger signal is still being pro
128. 8 PM Product File Name EA Save gii Cancel 21 Type Test1 and click Save This displays the Setup Mode Training window as shown in Figure 2 17 2 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 17 Setup Mode Training Visionscape I PAK ME 3 7 2 Setup Mode Image Mashing Tool Helo MICROSCAN pare coos Progeameset gt j PEERI EDSA z Ver N lt amp gs a2 OF 2 cW ot a S lingaks OCWFontiess Tod l Not Tranad Kuru OCWFontiessTool is Not Traned Cumert Tool OCVFoetless Teol Seomstenot1 Pani Disatied inner 211 Pa 22 Click Live to start a continuous live video loop Use this to adjust your f stop and focus your Smart Camera 23 Click Live again to stop live video 24 Obtain an image that contains some text and or numerical data We will use the OCVFontless Tool and your text Your Setup Mode window should be similar to the one in Figure 2 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 15 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 18 Setup Mode OCVFontless Tool Visionscape I PAK HE Y3 7 Z Setup Mode meae Mashing Tool Hel a Current Product T e MICROSCAN Testi a Revan Dato Time nf Visions see oe ix er z 434 XeZOYe217 SWe100Me75 00 ias GCwrondeasTod i N t Trahad OoOO OOTT T Ae YTTT o TT oT DOST TT tput OCVFontinss Tool is Net Traine
129. Action System Settings Parameter changed Old Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 False a New Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 True Reason for Change is because 11 19 2008 09 24 34 LoginN ame NONE Action Exitting System Settings OK clicked 11 19 2008 09 24 38 LoginName NONE Action Advanced Settings Save Product Test1 11 19 2008 09 24 39 LoginName NONE Action Entering Advanced Settings Advanced SettingsButton Selected 11 19 2008 09 24 52 LoginName NONE Action Advanced Settings Create A Product 11 19 2008 09 24 52 LoginN ame NONE Action Advanced Settings Entering System Settings 11 1qQ 2f fi8 19 27 1701 annin are NONE Action Fvitting Sustem Settings OK clicked j Action View Create PDFs Create PDFs When you click Create PDFs the Reports that are selected checkboxes to the right of the description and to the left of the display will translate the latest reports into PDFs for added security This can include a translation of the encrypted Audit Trail into a human readable PDF of the Audit Trail PDFs are used because they are difficult to modify and provide a snapshot of the batch report details Print Archive PDFs Reset Audit File A message box is displayed after the PDFs are created so that you can see the file names and their paths on the hard drive of I PAK HE The folder where these Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 9 C
130. Agreement screen select the I accept radio button and then click Next Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual A 3 Appendix 4 5 Installation amp Software Select Destination screen we suggest you accept the default location C Vscape and click Next Start Copying Files screen click Next The installer displays the ReadMe wri file which you can read as the installer finishes The install process takes a couple of minutes It may appear that nothing is happening but that is not the case Don t try to do anything until you are prompted to reboot your PC All required components are automatically installed to your hard disk The default location is C Vscape Camera definition files are stored under Vscape Drivers Camdefs When the InstallShield Wizard prompts you to reboot your PC select the Yes want to restart my computer now radio button and then click Finish Wait for your PC to reboot Go to the next section to install the I PAK HE software Installing the Visionscape I PAK HE Software 1 2 After your PC reboots double click Setup html at the root of the CD Click Install Visionscape I PAK HE Software The InstallShield Wizard starts and displays the following screens Several messages about Run or Save click Run Welcome screen click Next License Agreement screen select the I accept radio button and then click Next Se
131. Appearance Flaw Break Test wi E Min Appear Flaw Break Size 3 Sharpness Limit Units Gray Level g Minimum Allowed Sharpness 0 Contrast Limit Units Gray Level g Minimum Allowed Contrast 0 Tg Auto Threshold Enabled YW g Auto Threshold Adjustment 0 g Manual Threshold 135 EZ Edge Energy Threshold 20 g Character Expansions D T Filter Bright Defects r EZ Bright Defect Range 0 H Output Mask Type Mask Template BinaryT emplate NZA B GrayT emplate NAA e Num of ON Pixels in Template Displays the number of foreground pixels in the trained binary template 5 68 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool e Polarity Allows the step to always train with polarity Light_On_Dark or always train with polarity Dark On Light The default is set by the OCVFontless Tool during training e Legibility Passes fails the symbol based on this minimum correlation percentage The symbol will fail inspection when the correlation percentage is less than this value Default 25 Range 0 to 100 Allowed Movement in X Sets the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the X axis relative to other symbols from its trained position Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting Individual Symbol Search X which limits the search range in X to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction Allowed Mo
132. By default scaled OC VFonts are stored in the Job file as part of the associated font based tool These scaled OC VFonts can be stored on the disk using the Save Scaled Font button 5 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts The Automatic Font Selection and Scaling dialog box has two lists The left hand list is a font list containing the names of all the OC VFonts in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder The right hand list is a symbol list containing the names of all the FontSymbols found in the OC VFont that is currently selected in the font list Choosing a Symbol Select a symbol from the symbol list This symbol will determine the best font It is important to select a complex uniquely shaped character For example a 5 would be better than a 0 or a 1 The character should appear in the current image and be crisply formed and printed i e no smudges or blurring Positioning the OCVFont Shape The OCVFont shape of the currently selected font sets up the automatic font selection and scaling process This shape needs to be positioned and sized around a character in the current image that matches the characterselected in the symbol list It is important that the shape be positioned and sized very tightly over the selected character do not leave any border This ensures that the system will not mistake any part of other characters as being part of the selected character QI
133. Characters Trained on 11 17 2006 10 50 28 AM APO EFERTOKO NCP TUMMEIMz fol 2 34 s5 js J z ls e Tez awi Eee pee lle Jl r Is t Li IL lk JL Ilm SS aS Sst T N a NN Include Vv ae 13 In the custom editor type the characters to be trained into the Text or Characters to Include text box Figure 4 14 Note Do not type spaces In the image in Figure 4 14 the ROI completely surrounds the characters 12345 The red lines defining the ROI should not touch the characters to be included The Maintain Case checkbox forces the Text or Character to Include to uppercase if the font consists of uppercase characters ABC For example if you type klm the characters will be converted to KLM when you click the Include button Maintain Case also forces characters to lowercase if the font consists of lowercase characters abc 14 Click Include Recently included characters will be highlighted in blue Characters remain highlighted until the font is trained and saved The most recently included characters are displayed in the status bar as shown in Figure 4 15 4 60 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 4 15 Recently Included Characters Highlighted xi Font Er EE EF lu EB ke Font Name Sample_Font r Characters Not trained Created 6 13 2007 A B C D E F NLS IKI LIKI Select Font WINFREY MII r
134. Characters window is displayed at the end of the Train learn layout with the string of Inspect Chars as shown in Figure 2 45 a oO es ae OF 7 cl or aL S Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 37 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 45 Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters MICROSC A Parren Product A tena AN Change Product Tran and Tryout Statistics and Data Advanced Settings Main Menu SEP2008 a Approve Inspect Characters Inspect Chars Inspection Snapshot1 Oc RuntimeTool Wait Step This allows characters to be substituted into the layout or ignored entirely 2 38 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool 5 Click Substitute to display the Layout and Font boxes shown in Figure 2 46 N FIGURE 2 46 Setup Mode Layout and Font Boxes MICROSCAN Suzent Product a 4 0 BEL Weka gt oa oO a2 OF c UW or a S Sock KE om Cert Toci OCVRurametoct Fort Selected New nt Seouseaots Pann Onabied nss 6 25am The list of symbol names displayed in the Layout box contains the names of all symbols in the layout in the order in which they appear The Font box contains the name of all symbols in the selected OC VFont The first item in the list is IGN which is used to ignore characters 6 To substitute one symbol for another select the character in the Layout box that you w
135. Disabled Mask Number of Dilations Sets the number of expansions that are performed on the output mask This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing 5 40 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFont Tool Default 1 e Graphics Level Sets up different levels of debug graphics at runtime The default Show ROI Only will only show the ROI boxes associated with the OCVFont Tool and the characters being inspected green for passed red for failed When set to Show None no graphics are shown at runtime When set to Show Basic Graphics a number indicating the symbol s position in the layout is shown along with the ROI boxes FIGURE 5 28 Graphics Level Example QI When set to Show Details residue graphics are displayed green pixels are those that were not there at train time but are in the image at runtime fills while yellow pixels are those that werethere at train time but are not there at runtime voids oO ha oc gt e e The LayoutStep for the OCVFont Tool selects an OCVFont and sets up the learn layout process Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 41 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 29 LayoutStep Properties Page Tool Settings AutoThreshold ComputePola g B Agl Default Datum Order LayoutStep Inputs
136. Do X X X X X oo ght Height ht uble 1 rm T 4 eAngle Angle Angle Datum An X X X X X 2 qo Note 1 gle 1 9g 5 eSymWid Symbol SymWidt Datum Do x xX X xX xX 2 T th Width h uble 1 kel 6 eCellSize Cell Size CellSizeR Datum Do xX xX xX xX Result esult uble 1 7 eCont Contrast Cont Datum lnt X xX x x 1 8 eContrGr Contrast ContrGra Datum Int X x x x ade Grade de A 9 eAxialNG Axial AxialNGra Datum Int x X X X rade Nonunifor de 1 mily Grade 10 ePrintGX Print PrintGX Datum lnt X X X X Growth X A 11 ePrintGY Print PrintGY Datum Int X X X X Growth Y A 12 ePrintGGr Print PrintGGra Datum Int X X X X ade Growth de A Grade Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 43 Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 4 6 Contents of VerifyDetails continued Text Symbolic Name Symbolic Current ISO Offset Offset italics Name Type AIM IAQG ISO aim DPM output 13 eUECGra UEC UECGrad Datum nt x x x x de Grade e 1 14 eGridNU Grid GridNUGr Datum lnt xX xX Grade Nonunifor ade Al mity Grade 15 eGridNU Grid GridNU Datum Int xX xX Nonunifor 1 mity 16 eFixPatD Fixed FixPatDa Datum lnt x x amGrade Pattern mGrade A Damage Grade 17 eModulGr Modulatio ModulGra Datum Int X X ade n Grade de A 18 eRefDec Referenc RefDecGr Datum lnt x x Grade e Decode ade sl Grade 19 eQual20Z Quality Qual20Z Datum In
137. E User Manual 5 7 Chapter OCV Reference Remove Symbols Displays the Remove Symbols dialog box see Remove Symbol Dialog on page 5 15 and allows for symbols to be easily removed from the selected font AutoFont and Scaling Instructs I PAK HE to determine automatically the best font from all fonts in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder for use on the current image see Automatic Font Selection amp Scaling Dialog on page 5 15 Revert Reads in the last saved version of the selected font This allows you to undo all changes since the last save Save Font Saves any changes made to the selected font By default the Always Ask To Save Font checkbox is checked If this box is checked when the Custom Properties dialog box is closed or Select Font is clicked you are asked if any changes should be saved If this box is not checked you must remember to save changes or they will be lost when the dialog box is closed or Select Font is clicked By default the Use Selected Font on Exit checkbox is checked If this box is checked when the Custom Properties dialog box is closed the OCVFont currently active in the Custom Properties dialog box becomes the selected OC VFont for the font based OCV tool that is being trained in I PAK HE If this box is not checked no change is made to the selected OC VFont for the tool being trained in I PAK HE 5 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual
138. E user interface to be minimized while running Inspections still occur and results are transferred back to the I PAK HE interface Default Disabled Note When you change these settings you must restart the PAK HE interface since this is a Windows call that goes into effect at start up of the interface e Enable Desktop Allows you to show or hide the PC Desktop When disabled I PAK HE will trap user keys like Ctrl Esc and the PC s Start button to prevent the Start menu from appearing Alt Tab to prevent the user from leaving the I PAK HE interface and Alt Esc from displaying the TaskBar I PAK HE does not trap or disallow the Ctrl Alt Del sequence as Microsoft recommends against such action as it would interfere with the PC s security Default Enabled 6 94 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings Config File Format This section allows you to configure the file format e US Letter Format By default the file format is set to US Letter about 66 lines page A4 Format Sets the file format to A4 Format about 72 lines page Il PAK HE System Name You can name the I PAK HE system which is a useful feature when you have several I PAK HE systems dumping Configuration files to a central PC and you need a way to identify uniquely each I PAK HE system Edit Tool Set This is a Programmer level function Edit Tool Set allows the Programmer to add delete or edit all the tool
139. Ensure that the ROI fits tightly around the character Default Disabled Check Character Confidence Single Character Two or More Characters When enabled the confidence level found by the font reading process for each character will be checked against a user input level See Minimum Confidence description Default Enabled Collect All Character Segments Single Character When this option is checked the tool combines all segments in the ROI into a single character The ROI can fit loosely around the character but different characters must not touch Default Enabled Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 53 c oO TD Sg F tar a lt 3 Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 4 7 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized continued Property Description Discard Boundary Characters Two or More Characters When this option is checked characters found touching the ROI will be discarded Default Enabled Discard Boundary Segments Single Character This option is displayed only when the Character Fills Entire ROI option is disabled When this option is checked segments of characters found touching the ROI will be discarded Default Enabled Edge Energy Threshold Single Character Two or More Characters Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This property is
140. Find Pin 1 Index 1 g AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 fay Max Contrast Difference 100 fay Allowed Thickening of Symbol sae Allowed Thinning of Symbol 0 g Individual Symbol Search 3 g Individual Symbol Search Y 3 Te Test For Character Breaks r T Runtime ID Checking VY T Enable Mask Output B 0 g Mask Number of Dilations e Use AutoFind Enables and disables the locator Switching between enabled and disabled requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up Default Enabled AutoFind Pin 1 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 1 When this property is set to a value less 5 38 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFont Tool than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When this property is set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 1 meaning use the first symbol Range to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols e AutoFind Pin 2 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 2 when the AutoFind is set up as a 2PinFind When this property is set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When this property is set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 999 use the last sy
141. Font is created and given the name of the source OCVFont with the addition of the change in width and change in height values For example OldFont_2_ 5 indicates that the OCVFont named OldFont was scaled by increasing the width of the symbols by 2 and decreasing the height of the symbols by 5 Each symbol that is in the source OCVFont is then scaled and added to the new OCVFont 5 20 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFont OCVFont When the Train Debug Delay property on the Custom Properties Main dialog box is set to a non zero value the scaled templates and other FontSymbol training details are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen An OCVFont step is a container of one or more FontSymbol steps It trains and groups a set of characters of a particular font style and size The OCVFont contains a default FontSymbol that is used only for setting default parameters parameters that any FontSymbol inherits when inserted into the OCVFont One or more OCVFonts are required for font based OCV Creating FontSymbols As a container step the OC VFont step creates FontSymbol steps Creating FontSymbol steps can be accomplished by individual training or automatic segmentation using the Custom Properties dialog box of the OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool QI FIGURE 5 18 OCV Font Example 1 00356699 88BBDDGQS By default I PAK HE is designed such that you perform individual training of characters Th
142. For this reason we limit the number of images that are displayed per second By default this is set to 4 You can decrease it to 2 or increase it to 4 8 or Maximum Increasing this setting enables more images to come back to the PC But as you increase this setting you increase CPU usage Decreasing this setting limits the number of images coming back to the PC Therefore you may not see every image that the Smart Camera processes O Setting a small number here will result in a sluggish update of the Smart Camera s images Setting a higher number will result in a more lively update of runtime images Microscan can only suggest settings for this field You need to run your production line at line speeds and judge the best setting for yourself Lo 0 c o 25 52 Or de Note You can reliably trust the Smart Camera s processing if the Smart Camera reports a Pass signal through the IO then the partis good Likewise a Fail IO signal should cause the part to be rejected You may not see all these failed images if you are running at high production rates parts per minute and depending on the Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second setting Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 83 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Note When using a Job that is inspecting frozen images or images from disk set this to Maximum for the best runtime user interface response
143. For this window the glidepoint input device is needed with the touchscreen to support 2 button mouse controls Lo rom ec o a 52 Or on Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 47 Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 33 Create a Product Acquire MyHawkEye_1600T Acquire 1 Cami Right click on Acquire 1 A screen similar to the one in Figure 6 34 is displayed FIGURE 6 34 Create a Product Step Program Insert A Step Insert A Step DynamThresh Tool Edge Tool Fast Edge Fast Edge Group Flaw Tool FlexArray Step Formatted Output FrameA yverage Filter GainOffset Filter GrayHistogram Tool GrayMorph Filter ImageArith Tool ImageView Step IntelliFind Tool IntersectLines Meas LeastS quaresCircle Fit LeastS quaresLine Fit Loop Step MeanLP Filter OCRFixedFont Tool OCATrainableFont Tool OC Font Tool OC Fontless Tool OCVRuntimeT ool OnePt Locator Projection Tool Pt to Line Distance Rect Warp RobustCircle Fit RiobustLine Fit Sequence Step Sobel Filter Template Find ThreePt Locator Tolerance Meas Trajectory Step TwoPt Locator VarAssign Step Vector Tool YectorGroup Tool Wait Step With Step Cancel Highlight a step in the Insert A Step dialog box and click OK A screen similar to the one in Figure 6 35 is displayed Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 35 Create a Product OCVFontless Tool Added Acquire 1 OC Fo
144. From Windows select Start gt Visionscape gt Visionscape I PAK_HE I PAK HE displays its Welcome screen as shown in Figure 2 1 FIGURE 2 1 Select a Device for I PAK HE Dialog Box Welcome to I PAK HE i x k U e 5 jm LL lt x a Q O a 2 i gt e You will need to Select a Device For I Pak to use before we can get started Note This screen only comes up the first time you launch I PAK HE or if the last loaded product cannot be found 2 Click OK I PAK HE displays the Select a Visionscape Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 3 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 2 Select a Visionscape Device Dialog Box Select a isionscape Device Hardware Selection N Select any Smart Camera from the List Below and Click Here Available Smart Cameras Network GB HawkEyeE1000E GP HawkEyeE1FFFB GP HawkEyeE1FFO0 OP HawkEyeE 10065 OP HawkEyeE 10028 MyHawkEye_1600T 3 Select a device Then click the Select any Smart Camera button Note If the Smart Camera is connected directly to a PC no network involved I PAK HE automatically chooses the Smart Camera and you will not see the screen in Figure 2 2 This starts I PAK HE the PAK HE Run Mode window is displayed as shown in Figure 2 3 2 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2
145. HawkEyeConnection Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region Area code 3 Phone number Connect using is In the Port Settings tab of the COM Port Properties dialog box select the values shown in Figure B 6 B 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Connecting Smart Cameras to a PCusing Static IP Addresses amp FIGURE B 6 COM1 Properties Dialog Box COM1 Properties ene Port Settings Bits per second RALI UJ Data bits Parity N one To gA He d2 Eo F 58 O Stop bits Flow control Restore Defaults 6 Now you should be in the main window of HyperTerminal To verify that you are communicating with your Smart Camera press Enter a few times You should see a prompt gt echoed back to you as shown in Figure B 7 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual B 7 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC FIGURE B 7 HyperTerminal Window HawkEyeConnection Hyper Terminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help If you type the letter i and then press Enter your Smart Camera should dump out a list of running processes to your HyperTerminal window If you are not communicating successfully with your Smart Camera please review Steps 1 through 5 Now that you are communicating with your Smart Camera we are ready to modify its network settings To do this we need to modify the Boot
146. I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool Note A 1 for any value above except the X and Y allowed movement indicates the test is disabled e The bitmap representation of the binary runtime symbol area When the OCVFontless Tool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key and moving the mouse inside the OCVFontless Tool ROI but not over the symbols as shown in Figure 5 48 FIGURE 5 48 Step Tip Example 4 DI OT iia eval l d la JI i r QI OCVSymbolStep An OCVSymbolStep is a collection of template images settings and tolerances that inspect a character or logo at runtime OCVSymbolSteps are created during the training of an OCVFontless Tool They are used by the OCVFontless Tool to inspect the print at runtime e i oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 67 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 49 Symb1 Properties Page Symb2 Symb3 Symb4 Symb5 Symb6 Symb7 4 29 H Z0 Default Datum Order Symb1 Inputs g Num of ON Pixels in Template 287 Polarity Dark on Light g Legibility 25 000 g Allowed Movement in X 50 EZ Allowed Movement in 50 Es Residue Limit Units Percentage g Initial Residue Limit 100 000 Final Residue Method Total Residue Area g Final Residue Limit 15 000 g Final Residue Max Blob Size 10 fay Maximum Flaw Size 1 Te
147. I Pak HE User Manual xix Preface XX Visionscape I PAK HE User Manual CHAPTER1 Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection Visionscape I PAK HE s primary focus is to inspect measure verify position verify characters and detect flaws on pharmaceutical packaging The implementation of I PAK HE is flexible allowing for expansion of I PAK HE into the other vision areas of pharmaceutical companies i e medical device manufacturing diagnostic drugs glass vials and laboratory automation I PAK HE is adaptive and can be used easily in many other industries Note You can use the IntelliFind geometric pattern mark tool if you purchased a HawkEye 1600TIS or 1600TIH For more information about IntelliFind see Chapter 7 of the Visionscape Tools Reference on your CD in PDF format Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 1 1 mo lt f am Q 9 5 Q a2 eg of 2 u or AL gt Chapter Visionscape J PAK HE Inspection System Specifications I PAK HE supports up to four HawkEye 1600T Smart Cameras connected to a Windows PC Ensure that you review carefully the PC and network requirements below Minimum PC Requirements e Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher or Pentium 4 1 66 GHz Core 2 Duo or higher e Minimum of 1GB memory e VGA display adapter 64K or true color e Microsoft Windows 2000 SP4 or Microsoft Windows XP SP2 or later Note We recommend you connect th
148. IGURE D 4 Input Image to Cylinder Unwrap Operation Example D 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool Description CylinderUnwrap Warp allows editing through the CylinderUnwrap Warp properties page as shown in Figure D 6 FIGURE D 6 Cylinder Unwrap Warp Properties Page CustomVision Tool AQC BI g Default Datum Order CustomVision Tool Inputs Outputs InputButter Snapshot SnapOutputBuffer LINE CylinderAxis lt Unassigned ES Avail Package Scripts Cylinder_UnWarp Re Parse Package Script Zeriek to executes Recreate Step Datums sclick to execute g Cylinder Radius 100 000 g DistanceFromCamera 100 000 Te UseCalibration r Settings g e Cylinder Axis An input line datum that is selectable This input line is usually the bisecting line of the right and left edges of the cylinder The point within the ROI where the image is correct i e the point of no distortion should lie along the cylinder axis e Re Parse Package Scripts This button causes the package script to be parsed when clicked Whenever any changes to the script are made this button needs to be clicked to make these changes take effect Qn FS W J Ec OR gt lt b a e Recreate Step Datums This button causes the input and output datum lists in the step to be recreated This button only needs to be clicked when a datum i
149. ISOV_APERTURE_TOO_ SMALL 127111 IP_ISOV_APERTURE_TOO_LARGE 127112 IP_ISOV_INSUFFICIENT_SPACE 127113 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_F_1 127114 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_F_2 127115 4 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_F_3 127116 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_A E 127117 QRCODE_DESIGN_UNIMPLEMENTED 128400 oo QRCODE_IP_GENERAL_ERROR 128401 2 5 QRCODE_IP_RATIO_ERROR 128402 os QRCODE_IP_FINDER_ERROR 128403 2 T QRCODE_IP_LINE_FIT_ERROR 128404 QRCODE_IP_LINE_INTERSECT_ERROR 128405 QRCODE_IP_CORNER_ERROR 128406 QRCODE_DEC_UNKNOWN_ERROR 128420 QRCODE_RS_LEVEL_INVALID 128421 QRCODE_FORMAT_INFO_FAILED 128422 QRCODE_VERSION_INFO_FAILED 128423 QRCODE_ROWS_COLS_INVALID 128424 QRCODE_DATA_CODEWORD_ INVALID 128425 QRCODE_TOTAL_CODEWORD_INVALID 128426 QRCODE_MODE_INDICATOR_INVALID 128427 QRCODE_MODE_UNIMPLEMENT 128428 QRCODE_RS_DECODE FAILED 128429 QRCODE_BCH15_ 5 UNDECODABLE 128430 QRCODE_MODEL_INVALID 128431 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 41 Chapter Automatic Identification DMR Verification DMR Step Output Datums AxialNonuniformity value DoubleDm 0 01 CellSizeResult value DoubleDm 0 1 CenterOffset value DoubleDm 0 1 DotCenter1 value DoubleDm 0 1 DotCenter2 value DoubleDm 0 1 DotSizel value DoubleDm 0 1 DotSize2 value DoubleDm 0 1 GridNonuniformity value DoubleDm 0 01 SizeOffset value DoubleDm 0 1 SymbolHeight value DoubleDm 0 01 Symbol Width value DoubleDm 0 01 DMR Step Output Datums DoubleDm UnusedErrorCorrecti
150. Individual Symbol Search Y which limits the search range in Y to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction e i tez oc gt e e e Residue Limit Units Inputs the residue limits in either a maximum pixel count value or a percentage value percentage value is based on the number of On pixels in the trained template When the value of this property changes the values of Initial Residue Limit and Final Residue Limit are changed to match the selected units Default Percentage Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 29 Chapter OCV Reference Initial Residue Limit Provides a quick check of the character quality and correctness The initial residue calculation is done before any image processing is performed on the residue image When the system looks at the symbol being inspected it determines the residue of the symbol which is a count of those pixels that differ between the trained template and the current image Based on the value of this property the system determines if the residue is within tolerances If it is not within tolerances the symbol fails Otherwise the system continues on with the rest of the inspection procedure When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Default 100 0 Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pixel count in the inspected image that will make the symbol fail t
151. InspectionResults dat and its path is the directory where I PAK HE was started e Enable OCV Failure Tracking When checked enables the failure tracking for every OCV tool in the product definition file OCVResultsDm Upload When OCV Failure Tracking is enabled for each OCV tool in the current product I PAK HE automatically selects the OCVResultsDm from the Inspection step s list of results to be uploaded When OCV Failure Tracking is disabled I PAK HE ensures that this inspection result is not selected for upload The OCVResultsDm holds all of the pass fail information for each symbol in the OCV tool At runtime this datum will be parsed in order that a grid of pass fail counts and failure types for each symbol can be filled Types of symbol failures are Correlation Failure Sharpness Failure Contrast Failure Appearance Flaw Break Failure Initial Residue Failure Final Residue Failure Max Blob Residue Failure B8 ID Test Failure Quad ID Test Failure Break ID Test Failure X Offset Failure Y Offset Failure Setup Mode Viewing of Failures With OCV Failure Tracking enabled a new button OCV Tracking is displayed on the toolbar of the Statistics and Data screen For complete information about OCV Tracking see OCV Tracking on page 6 40 O Run Mode Viewing of Failures With OCV Failure Tracking enabled a new button OCV Result Tracking is displayed on the Failure Report dialog box as shown in
152. K HE displays the font editor interface as shown in Figure 4 11 This editor is used for all font creation and training 4 56 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual FIGURE 4 10 Font Editor Button OCRTrainableFont Tool Programmer Statistics and Data Options Acquire Live FIGURE 4 11 Custom Editor Tool Zoom In Settings 11 18 2008 02 51 PM Advanced Settings Try Tool Zoom Out Try All Font Exit Training Editor to Main Setup Graphical view m Numeric view Display font histogram Display character array Undo Last Include rerties OCRTrainableFont Tool Characters IEICE le L IL iM Mlele eR r Mwe Lo 2 s lale Ils liz ls Ils Lalle ILe ale E lg lin WWI n o J Ise M4 bd Ji Ez EL EL EA E IB EZ EZ Mi j N _Empiy Number of Trained Characters A A A B8 0 1 5 Included A Not In Font Font Font Name OCRTFDemo Trained on 11 17 2006 10 50 28 AM c oO a Es 25 lt 3 r Text or Character to Include a eae Training Heman H ere PI Timeout 5 minutes m Revert Save Font Included Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 57 Chapter Automatic Identification 4 Minimize the FrontRunner Editor not the custom editor 5 Inthe custom editor click Select Font to select a new font to be trained The Font Manager dialog box is
153. MICROSCAN Visionscape I PAK HE User Manual Rev 3 7 4 Sept 2011 83 100016 02 Copyright and Disclaimer Copyright 2011 by Microscan Systems Inc 700 S W 39th Street Renton WA U S A 98057 425 226 5700 FAX 425 226 8682 All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than place a trademark symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support email helpdesk microscan com Microscan Systems Inc 700 S W 39th Street Renton WA 98057 U S A Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk microscan com Microscan Europe Tel 31 172 423360 Fax 31 172 423366 Microscan Asia Pacific R O Tel 65 6846 1214 Fax 65 6846 4641 Microscan Limited Warranty Statement and Exclusions Wh
154. Measures the difference in average spacing between the center of adjacent cells in the horizontal axis versus that of the vertical axis A square Data Matrix with the same number of rows and columns typically resembles a rectangular Data Matrix when Axial Nonuniformity is significant as measured per the AIM specification The grading is A when AN lt 0 06 B when AN lt 0 08 C when AN lt 0 10 D when AN lt 0 12 F when AN gt 0 12 The reported value is 100 Axial Nonuniformity Grade Contrast Refers to the difference in reflectance between the light and dark cells of the symbol It is measured according to AIM specification The Symbol Contrast Grade is given as follows A for 70 contrast B for 55 contrast C for 40 contrast D for 20 contrast F for less than 20 contrast 4 36 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool Contrast Grade The Contrast Grade is the difference in reflectance measured by grayscale values between the light and dark cells of the symbol The arithmetic mean of the darkest 10 of the pixels and that of the lightest 10 pixels within the Data Matrix area are computed The Symbol Contrast is the difference of the two means divided by the full gray scale range The Contrast Grade is given as A for 70 contrast B for 55 contrast C for 40 contrast D for 20 contrast F for less than 20 contrast Print Growth Grade Print growth measures both X the
155. Mode This cycle continues indefinitely until you manually exit Run Mode Disabling Demo Mode Each of these methods will disable Demo Mode xe e o E D m The first method is to change to a different user mode User Supervisor or Programmer If any password other than 78743366 is entered Demo Mode is disabled and the button removed from the Advanced Settings menu The second method can be used if you are in Demo Mode and I PAK HE is currently in Setup Mode In this scenario you can enter the Advanced Settings menu click Demo Mode which displays the Demo Mode Parameters dialog box and uncheck the Enable Demonstration Mode checkbox This prevents Demo Mode from being activated when Run Mode is clicked This option will not remove the Demo Mode button from the Advanced Settings menu The Demo Mode button is only removed when you change to a different user mode The third method is to close and restart PAK HE Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual C 5 Appendix ke Demo Mode C 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual appennxod Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques Custom Steps and Custom Vision Tools allow new steps and tools to be used in Visionscape using Perl an interpreted script language These steps are now available in Visionscape I PAK HE with a limited set of I DPAK HE supported Perl language Package Scripts Only the steps illustrated are supported w Note I PAK HE su
156. Mode 6 19 AutoStep Off 6 19 Train and Tryout Mode 6 19 Train and Tryout Toolbar 6 19 AutoStep 6 20 Train 6 20 Previous 6 20 Next 6 20 Next Camera 6 20 Tool Settings 6 21 Options 6 21 Acquire 6 22 Live 6 23 Zoom In 6 23 Zoom Out 6 23 Try Tool 6 23 Try All 6 24 Custom Settings 6 24 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual xi Contents Exit Training to Main Setup 6 24 Automatically Setting Tool Settings 6 25 Special Training of Tools 6 25 Match String 6 25 Training Match String Enabled Tools 6 25 Data Matrix Tool Wildcard Match Character 6 26 Match String Fields amp Buttons 6 26 Masking Tool 6 31 Statistics amp Data 6 32 Clear Statistics 6 32 Save Stats File 6 33 Save Config File 6 33 Save Images 6 33 Transmit Statistics 6 36 Preview Config File 6 39 Preview Statistics 6 40 OCV Tracking 6 40 Close Statistics 6 42 Advanced Settings 6 42 Create A Product 6 43 Program Settings Dialog Boxes 6 43 System Settings Dialog Boxes 6 45 Step Program Dialog Boxes 6 47 Special Features of Tools amp Steps in Job Creation 6 50 Inspection Steps Without Snapshots 6 52 Product Creation 6 52 Train and Tryout 6 53 Run Mode 6 53 1 0 6 53 Continue Product Creation by Training the Tools 6 53 Save Product 6 54 Product Settings 6 56 Cameras Tab 6 56 Data Valid Tab 6 58 l O Tab 6 58 System Settings 6 62 System Settings Communication Tab 6 63 Selection 6 63 Configure 6 63 System Settings Training and Results Tab 6 71 Product C
157. OCYFont Tool e MA0222 Edit Code V Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver 5 102 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command FIGURE 5 84 ChangeLayout Successful Details Lot ChangeOver Tool Path VisionSystem Inspection1 Snapshotl OCYFont Tool 6MAD222 Edit Code IV Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver ChangeLayout Debug Whether good or erroneous data is sent to I PAK HE these debug windows help users by providing an Ethernet debugging tool that allows Programmers to verify that string s are sent using correct formatting I PAK HE tries to specify the exact syntax error if any of the input I PAK HE displays and highlight errors on the I PAK HE screen for a longer period of time so that you know that a ChangeLayout error has occurred This causes user intervention to acknowledge the bad data When I PAK HE displays the Change Lot screen users can clearly see the newly entered strings to further provide debug assistance QI e Cc hn oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 103 Chapter OCV Reference Ethernet ChangeLayout Error Messages In the event of data errors the error messages shown in Table 5 5 are displayed TABLE 5 5 Ethernet Error Messages Error Message Change Layout Error Missing the Tool Name or the Layout Meaning Th
158. OI Once the layout is learned the OCVRuntimeTool creates a new OCVFont called a Runtime Font by training a new FontSymbol at each layout position using the current image data The OCVRuntimeTool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the data from the Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 45 Chapter OCV Reference Runtime Font to verify the quality and correctness of the characters being inspected Because the train image creates templates this code should be of good quality Training Training of the OCVRuntimeTool involves placing and sizing the OCVRuntimeTool box around the area containing the symbols to be inspected When Train is clicked the ROI is scanned for symbol candidates Symbol candidates are determined by searching for each symbol that is in the selected Master OC VFont chosen through the LayoutStep When all candidates have been found a new OCVFont is created and a new symbol is trained and added to this Runtime Font for each candidate position Then the OCVRuntimeTool box is reset based on the bounding rectangle of all symbols found and the values of the search extra properties The AutoFind is trained automatically whenever the OCVRuntimeTool is trained When the AutoFind Search Area Box is moved and or sized it is automatically retrained without requiring retraining of the OCVRuntimeTool Inspection If AutoFind is enabled the pins are located and the OCVRuntimeTool
159. Other Places APE Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Configuration Shortcut 24 01 2007 10 44 Ee Microsoft NET Framework Configuration Shortcut 23 03 2005 15 59 zmicrosoft NET Framework Wizards Shortcut 23 03 2005 15 59 ik Performance Shortcut 22 03 2005 10 44 My Computer Spe Services Shortcut 14 04 2005 12 32 e My Network Places g Control Parel My Documents lss Starts and stop services 1 55 KB p My Computer A 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual UPS amp UPS Software 16 Double click Services to display the list in Figure A 9 FIGURE A 9 Services gt Services File Action View Help m 2 By Services Local Mame Startup Type Leg On As B SQL Server Browser Provides SQL Server connection infor Started Automatic Network 5 Sy SQL Server W55 Wri Provides the interface to backupyrest Manual Local System By SQLAgent RFMAN Started Automatic Local System By SSDP Discovery er Enables discovery of UPnP devices on Started Manual Local Service o ge 2 g Sz e an By System Event Notifi Tracks system events such as windo Started Automatic Local System Sy TCP IP NetBIOS He Enables support for NetBIOS over TOL Started Automatic Local Service By Telephony Provides Telephony API TAPI suppo Started Manual Local System By Telnet Enables a remote user to log on to thi Disabled Local System By Terminal Services Allows multiple user
160. Percentage the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held When switched from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held Default Gray Level Minimum Allowed Sharpness Determines how crisp a symbol must be to pass inspection It is measured by average edge strength over the entire symbol Typical edge strengths are from 20 to 80 sharpness units Default 0 Range 0 to 256 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage Contrast Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Contrast property 5 72 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast is used to calculate a percentage of the trained contrast value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass When switched from Gray Level to Percentage the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held When switched
161. R Part 11 FIGURE 3 8 Commands for the I PAK Administrator Display Programmers Suspend an Existing User Display Supervisors Add a New User Display Operators Restore a User Account Reset a User s Password Change Your Password Display Login Violation Log Display User Changes Display Audit Trail In general these commands allow the I PAK Administrator to create and configure user accounts before users can begin using the feature Note The I PAK Administrator should create a user account with the Programmer security level right away so that the Vision System Settings can be adjusted when necessary If you re a Programmer you can use the commands shown in Figure 3 9 FIGURE 3 9 Commands for a Programmer Display Programmers Display Supervisors Display Operators Change Your Password e Display Programmers This command enables the Il PAK Administrator to see all the user accounts that have a security access of Programmer As a user you can review this list of already created Programmers as long as you are a Programmer A Supervisor or Operator cannot access this menu item 3 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions You are restricted in viewing the list of other users that are at or below your security level e Display Supervisors This command enables the I PAK Administrator to see all the user accounts that have a security access of Supervisor As a use
162. R Part 11 see Chapter 3 Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 Enabling this setting disables the traditional Programmer and Supervisor modes and replaces it with the I PAK Administrator mode Then an I PAK Administrator defines valid users their passwords and their security levels 6 The I PAK Administrator is your Configuration Manager He or she is not a Programmer not a Supervisor and not an Operator 2 e c I PAK Administrator User Name I PakAdmin I PAK Administrator Password 999999 20 Q e oO ao The I PAK Administrator must create the valid user accounts before users can begin using the feature Default Off e Enable Configuration File Audit Trail When this setting is enabled each time the Job definition file is saved to disk a new read only Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 91 Chapter Setup Mode Reference configuration file is saved to the archive directory i e C Vscape I Pak_HE Jobs ConfigurationArchives This configuration file is marked with the user name date and time Old configuration files will not be overwritten You can determine changes by looking at sequential configuration files Names for the configuration files are the product name with a date time identifier Default Off Enable User Logins for Training Approvals Enabling this option requires your user name password login when training the following tools Training a Font Tool or Runt
163. RW install the CD RW in place of the CD in the I PAK HE PC Installing the CD RW hardware is not included in this description Windows XP For Windows XP you can use the integrated CD burning functionality It is no longer necessary to install special CD writer software o Sg L2G zE le an Note If you use the integrated burn functionality it is only possible to copy files to a subfolder of the CD drive and not to the root of the CD drive Windows 2000 For Windows 2000 you must install CD burning software Normally this is delivered with the CD Writer hardware Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual A 15 Appendix Installation amp Software A 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual appenpxs Connecting Smart Cameras to aPC o To gA He D2 So O SE oS O Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC using Static IP Addresses amp a Network Switch To prevent issues with unexpected network disconnections we recommend that you connect your HawkEye 1600T Smart Cameras directly to your PC using either a multi port NIC card or an Ethernet Switch and static IP addresses In this appendix we describe how to connect up to four HawkEye Smart Cameras to your PC using an Ethernet switch and static IP addressing Connecting a PC amp Smart Cameras to an Ethernet Switch Figure B 1 shows how to connect your PC and up to four HawkEye 1600T Smart Cameras to a typical 5 port E
164. Snapshot1 BCRT ool Text ji lt Select all Clear all Specify the File Delimiter Comma C Hash C Asterisk Filename to be Used jY MV_NAS HUANdev vs37 prod ipak JnspectionF Browse O Cancel The Cancel button allows you to discard any modification that was done Only the OK button will take over the selection The Select all button allows you to select all entries in the list The Browse button allows you to navigate to the folder and file of the used file Clicking this button opens the Select DAT File dialog box j o rom c 20 25 52 Or d9 In this dialog box you can select an existing DAT file used for writing the Output data It is also possible to write a new filename into the filename field The file will be created and can be used You will see a listing of all the selected results from the Inspection Step s property page in the Select Results to Upload field Now you need to Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 77 Chapter Setup Mode Reference click any of these results to be output to a file You must also specify the file delimiter You can choose between the comma default or a or a By default the File name is InspectionResults dat If you wish to change the file name or its path specify this data in this dialog box Click OK to exit this dialog box Note You may select any or all of these inspection results
165. Table 4 7 lists the OCRTrainableFont Tool properties in alphabetical order and indicates in which property page the property appears either Single Character or Two or More Characters 4 52 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool TABLE 4 7 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized Property Adaptive Thresholding Single Character Two or More Characters Description When this option is checked a Sobel operation will be performed within the search area to determine the pixel value that separates a light from a dark pixel Otherwise the value given in the Threshold setting is used By default Adaptive Thresholding is enabled Allow Overlapped Characters Two or More Characters When this option is checked the boundaries of the characters found by the tool can overlap This is useful for fonts that allow the tops of uppercase characters to extend over the next lowercase character in a row Default Enabled Allow Segmented Characters Two or More Characters When this option is checked the tool will combine adjacent disconnected parts when searching for a character s boundary This should be enabled when locating dot matrix characters Default Disabled Character Fills Entire ROI Single Character Uses the ROI perimeter as the character s bounding box Use this option when two characters touch each other because the tool will not separate contiguous segments
166. Text or Character to Include WIREZIEIMIEI IT IB ERA aja j lt aJzl JINAN gt e n o J p a Lis J u v J w L z Training AADC Learn Stop Timeout Number of Trained Characters l a al A 0 1 5 10 Included Not In Font c oO a F _ 7o lt 3 Included 12345 5 samples included Ifthe characters do not train well right click and select Undo Include To undo the inclusion of the last set of characters right click somewhere in the dialog box and select Undo Include characters There is one level of undo Undo is available even after a font is trained If fewer characters than expected are found a message box appears as shown in Figure 4 16 Resize the ROI or make adjustments to the OCRTF tool Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 61 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 4 16 Fewer Characters Found Difference in character co Input characters FGHI 5 characters Found characters FGH 3 characters Samples will not be included Ifmore characters are found that expected only the found characters are included 15 Repeat steps 11 14 to include numerous character samples in the font As characters are included graphics appear in the image for each character FIGURE 4 17 Graphics for Each Character F Deranger ur or dra ard E 2 TT RASS e T La E 16 Click Acquire N
167. The default is 5 p bS Gen oc e Enable Saving Stats and Config Files from Stats Menu Enabling this option makes a more configurable I PAK HE user interface This setting enables and disables the buttons for Save Stats and Save Config Files saving the Statistics and Configuration files from the Statistics and Data submenus cd o 9 arent Q Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 93 Chapter Setup Mode Reference e Use OnScreen Keypad instead of PC Keyboard Enabling this option causes I PAK HE to display an OnScreen Keyboard for entering login and training approval user names and passwords Menu Settings This section allows you to streamline the menus Streamline Menus Presents a clean less cluttered Operator interface e Show All Menu Options Advanced Users Default Select this option to display the menus like they are presented in this user manual Enable Change Lot in Run Mode When checked the Change Lot button is visible in Run Mode meaning Change Lot is possible e Automatic Open Softkeyboard When checked the Softkeyboard is opened automatically if the selected dialog box requires data input This is available only when I PAK HE is running on a Touch panel PC Il PAK HE Windows Settings This section allows you to configure I PAK HE to run with other programs on the PC Enable PAK_HE to be Minimized Allows the I PAK H
168. Training V Reset Statistics after re training Reset Failures after re training r Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout r Go directly between RunMode and Training r Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout OCY Training r Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontT ools IT Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools External Communications Timeout lo Seconds Match String Mismatch Action V Keyboard Input of Match String Transmit Final Inspection String By default the Keyboard Input of Match String checkbox item is not checked which means that I PAK HE expects no keyboard match string input for the OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool When enabled checked I PAK HE expects a match string to be input by the keyboard whenever an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is trained OCVFont Tool amp OCVRuntimeTool Training The I PAK HE OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool use the Keyboard Input of Match String when enabled in the training sequence When Keyboard Input of Match String is enabled OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool training is unchanged until the Approve Inspect Characters window is displayed as shown in Figure 5 53 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 79 e ha oc gt e e Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 53 Match String Training Dialog Box Enter Line 1 of Match String Input Line 1 separate the symbol names with spaces A
169. Ver Enabled CustVer Datum En xX DPM um 1 Verificatio n Paramete rs 4 46 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual TABLE 4 6 Contents of VerifyDetails continued Data Matrix Tool Text Symbolic Name Symbolic Current ISO Offset Offset italics Name Type AIM IAQG ISO aim DPM output 55 eCSVThr Cell Size CSVThrU Datum lnt x Up VerStat p A UpThresh 56 eCSVThr Cell Size CSVThrL Datum Int x Lo VerStat o A LoThresh 57 eCOVThr Center COVThrU Datum Int X Up Offset p A VerStat UpThresh 58 eCOVThr Center COVThrL Datum Int X 4 Lo Offset 0 A VerStat LoThresh c 59 eSOVThr Size SOVThrU Datum Int x o O0 Up Offset p A T VerStat 8 UpThresh of p 60 eSOVThr Size SOVThrL Datum int x Se Lo Offset o A lt 2 VerStat LoThresh 61 eCMVThr Cell CMVThrU Datum Int X Up Modulatio p A n VerStat UpThresh 62 eCMVThr Cell CMVThrL Datum Int X Lo Modulatio e 1 n VerStat LoThresh 63 eBMVThr Border BMVThrU Datum lnt X Up Match p 1 VerStat UpThresh 64 eBMVThr Border BMVThrL Datum Int xX Lo Match o A VerStat LoThresh Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 47 Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 4 6 Contents of VerifyDetails continued Text mboli Nam mboli rren Offset eat italics a Ua U Kawa AIM IAQG ISO AM DPM output 65 eSCVThr Symbol SCVThrU Datum
170. When set to 0 the Smart Camera will use the value you entered in the Static IP parameter for its IP address We want to set this to 0 so DHCP will be turned off Type 0 and press B to Enter Sq HS FIGURE B 10 HyperTerminal Window D2 c So Name MyHawkEye_1600T oS Static IP 161 218 121 124 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 cE Gateway 0 0 0 0 SS DHCP j MAC Address 00 60 33 e1 00 0a 1 Modify User Parameters 2 Reset User Account 3 Exit to Application gt gt 1 Default network name MyHawkEye_1600T Static IP 161 218 1021 A240 292 268 2544 Subnet mask 25594 25955 29440 Gateway 20 0 80 Use DHCP t WY Save parameters to flash y n Now you will be asked if you want to save the parameters to flash 10 Type Y and press Enter 11 Now you ll be taken back to your original set of options Type 3 and press Enter to exit the boot parameter setup and restart the Smart Camera you may have to do this twice Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual B 11 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC Note If you will be using 2 3 or 4 HawkEye 1600T Smart Cameras then repeat Steps 7 through 10 for each of your additional Smart Cameras Use the following static IP addresses in Step 9 for the Smart Cameras 2nd HawkEye Smart Camera 192 168 254 6 3rd HawkEye Smart Camera 192 168 254 8 4th HawkEye Smart Camera 192 168 254 10 You are done Verifying the Set
171. Windows Explorer you can back up your Job definitions to another disk or CD Automatic Backup of Jobs I PAK HE performs an automatic backup of the current product definition to help you recover in the event of a PC disk error Every time that a product definition is about to be saved an automatic copy of the Job is created in a directory called JobsBackup that is located within your Jobs directory For example this automatic backup directory will be C Vscape I Pak_HE Jobs JobsBackup In the event ofa PC disk error you can recover the avp and avpsys files for your products minus your last edits The file is suffixed with a 1 to further designate that these file copies are one revision behind the current product definition Archiving amp Restoring Products Through the I PAK HE interface you can archive and restore products from a CD RW or any other valid path such as a directory or across a network I PAK HE Job files are rather large and typically do not fit on a floppy By using a CD RW you can archive your Jobs and restore them safely You must set up the CD RW software before you can use this feature see CD RW Support on page C 15 Setting Archival Pathname In the System Settings menu in the Product ChangeOver Activities dialog box you need to specify the path of the archive location For example when using a CDR this path might be D Job Archive Dialog Box When you go to the Product ChangeOver dialog b
172. a Software System this menu is disabled FIGURE 6 5 Calibration Menu Calibration Menu v Display Calibrated Results Open Calibration Save Calibration Save Calibration as Text Calibrate Camera 1 gt This menu allows you to calibrate camera views on any target in the system Camera views are simply Snapshot Steps on any target in the system but they are arranged according to the hardware camera on a target system Open Calibration Reloads calibration data from an existing file When reloading data calibration data is read from the file into the corresponding Snapshot on a one to one basis If the number of Snapshots does not equal the number of calibration data objects in the file then as many Snapshot steps that can receive calibration data do so 6 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Setup Mode Menus e Save Calibration Saves calibration data to a separate file When saving data calibration data from each Snapshot Step in every target is saved in one file with a cal extension e Save Calibration as Text Writes the entire calibration World tree to disk as a text file e Calibrate Starts the calibration process on Snapshot x of Camera y e Display Calibrated Results Enables or disables the display of the calibrated measurement results at Runtime in calibrated units Different Snapshot Steps which use the same Smart Camera are considered different views of
173. abled any character in the match string is treated as a regular character to be matched Match String This string will be compared against each decoded string during each run when Match String Enable is selected This property will be filled in after a successful train only when Match String Enable is selected while training Default Empty Tool Time Out ms Maximum time to search for a Data Matrix When a Data Matrix is not found and decoded by this time this step fails and the program execution continues After training if a Data Matrix takes x milliseconds to decode then the time out value should be set to more than x milliseconds when Search Direction is Horizontal or Vertical only The Tool Time Out ms value should be at least twice x when the Horizontal then Vertical or the Vertical then Horizontal parameter is used When x milliseconds is used as the Tool Time Out ms value when Horizontal then Vertical or Vertical then Horizontal parameter is used each search pass will time out in half of the x milliseconds Default 600 ms 0 No time out Height pixels The height of the Data Matrix in pixels This parameter will be filled in after a successful train Default 0 Range 20 to 1024 pixels 0 for Unknown Width pixels The width of the Data Matrix This property will be filled in after a successful train Default 0 pixels Range 20 to 1024 pixels 0 for Unknown No of Matrix Rows The number
174. activities Autosave Resetting statistics Resetting failures AutoStep Mode default on off in Training Go directly into Training when you exit Run Mode Train Multiple OCV Tools Define an End Batch option Enable the 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance options Login capability Configuration Audit trail Login Passwords Expirations Login Prompt on Training Feature These are Programmer level functions 6 62 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings For the System Settings dialog box with General tab selected see System Settings General Tab on page 6 90 The remainder of this section describes e System Settings Communication Tab starting on page 6 63 e System Settings Training and Results Tab starting on page 6 71 e System Settings General Tab starting on page 6 90 System Settings Communication Tab FIGURE 6 44 System Settings Dialog Box Communication Tab rr Selection Input Channel None Output Channel None r Configure R5232 Ethernet TCP IP Selection This section allows you to define the Input and Output Channel to communicate to a host for download of match string and OC VFont Tool string O e Input Channel Choose from None default RS 232 or Ethernet e Output Channel Choose from None default RS 232 or Ethernet Lo rom c 20 25 52 or 7p Configure This section allows you to co
175. ad match 5 42 5 52 5 106 symbol size 5 25 symbol size in pixels 5 55 5 58 Minimum allowed contrast 5 33 5 72 5 73 sharpness 5 32 5 72 quiet zone 4 8 Index search angle D 16 D 17 Mirror 4 25 Mismatch action 5 84 strings are different 5 87 Modes run 2 2 setup 2 2 Moving Tools 1 7 N New button 5 9 match string entry mode 6 26 new nnd 4 50 Next button train and tryout 6 20 camera button 6 20 tool button 6 96 No activity limit 3 4 3 7 quiet zone clutter 4 28 No of Matrix columns 4 33 rows 4 33 none Script D 2 D 6 NPt Locator 4 19 Num border spaces to add 5 25 of border spaces to add 5 59 5 111 of on pixels in template 5 29 5 68 Number base file 6 35 6 36 of images in queue 6 81 7 4 Numeric display 4 67 view button 4 67 O OCR Training 4 56 OCRTrainableFont Tool 4 49 font folder button 6 24 properties page adaptive thresholding 4 53 4 56 allow overlapped characters 4 53 allow segmented characters 4 53 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 11 Index character fills entire roi 4 53 check character confidence 4 53 collect all character segments 4 53 discard boundary characters 4 54 discard boundary segments 4 54 edge energy threshold 4 54 graphics level 4 54 input buffer 4 54 limit character height 4 54 limit character width 4 54 limit the number of characters 4 55 min character area 4 55 minimum confidence 4 55 pass on no data 4 55 polarity 4 55 selected
176. aining to Main Setup This returns you to the Setup Mode main window 32 Click Run Mode This returns you to Operator Mode and displays the Run Mode window as shown in Figure 2 21 2 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 21 Run Mode Window With Job Running N Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials Your Job will run in the Camera 1 View window in a continuous mode Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 19 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool This tutorial takes you through the process of setting up an inspection using the OCVRuntimeTool For more details refer to OC VRuntimeToo on page 5 45 Setting Up the Tool Set 1 From Windows select Start gt Visionscape gt Visionscape I PAK_HE I PAK HE displays its Welcome screen as shown in Figure 2 22 FIGURE 2 22 Select a Device for I PAK HE Dialog Box Welcome to I PAK HE x e 1 You will need to Select a Device for I Pak to use before we can get started Note This screen only comes up the first time you launch I PAK HE or if the last loaded product cannot be found 2 Click OK I PAK HE displays the Select a Visionscape Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 23 2 20 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 23 Select a Visionscape Device Dialog Box Select a isionscape Device Hardware S
177. al Grade BarCode Tool Final Grade Score and BarCode Tool Scan X Grade respectively where X ranges from 0 to 9 Outputs include see the ANSI specification for descriptions Code Type Erasure Bits Error Bits Final Grade Number Found One X Dim Ratio x where x is 0 through 2 Read Status Scan x Grade where x is 0 through 9 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 11 c oO DD Sg a lt 3 Chapter Automatic Identification Status Symbol Height Symbol Width SymResults Text Verification Details Verification Status Verification Status Upper Threshold Allows you to set the upper threshold at which the printed code is considered good When the final verification grade is greater than or equal to the value of this property the code will be considered to be of good quality This value should always be greater than or equal to the Verification Status Lower Threshold If it is equal to the Verification Status Lower Threshold the resulting status will be good 3 or poor 1 with no fair 2 status defined Valid Values 4 to 1 Verification Status Lower Threshold Allows you to set the lower threshold at which the printed code is considered fair When the final verification grade is greater than or equal to the value of this property the code will be considered to be of fair quality This value should always be less th
178. alog box as shown in Figure 6 17 This dialog box allows the Supervisor to temporarily disable the Trigger for Tryout Mode only You can verify that the tool is running properly by viewing the graphics and examining data along the Status Bar Click OK if you make any changes to this dialog box Lo rom c 20 25 52 or 7p Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 21 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 17 Options Dialog Box Tryout Options EEE x m Control Options IF Do Acquire IV Show 1 0 Results IF Triggered 1 0 or Sensor Fm Loop F Delay Cancel Control Options Allow you to set the Tryout operation Do Acquire Currently this option is disabled Show I O Results Sets the Opto Outputs as a result of running the Job definition in Tryout This allows for a near live simulation The default is selected Triggered I O or Sensor During a Tryout this allows I PAK HE to use the trigger mechanism When you select Trigger in the Trigger Acquire Method of the Product Setting Cameras dialog box this appears checked Loop Allows the system to loop continuously through the Job definition performing a Tryout inspection rather than running through just once If selected the Try All button s text changes to Try Stop The Supervisor can stop this continuous tryout cycle by then selecting Try Stop The default is not selected Delay Allows you to paus
179. also computes the barcode print quality according to the ANSI guideline To measure the print quality a total of 10 scans are made to get 10 scan reflectance profiles of the barcode The scans are approximately equally spaced within the barcode and are made parallel to the length of the barcode For each scan reflectance profile the following parameters are graded Edge Determination Minimum Reflectance Reference Decode Quiet Zone Minimum Edge Contrast Symbol Contrast Modulation Defects and Decodability Each parameter is given a grade as follows A corresponding to a numeric scale of 4 B corresponding to a numeric scale of 3 C corresponding to a numeric scale of 2 4 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Barcode Reading D corresponding to a numeric scale of 1 F corresponding to a numeric scale of 0 The lowest grade received from these parameters is used as the Overall Profile Grade for the scan profile The Final Symbol Grade is the simple average of all the overall profile grades using the standard weighting 4 A 3 B 2 C 1 D and 0 F The average is converted to the Final Symbol Grade 35 A lt 4 0 2 5 lt B lt 3 5 15 C lt 2 5 0 5 lt D lt 1 5 F lt 05 When Print Verification is set to ANSI the Final Symbol Grade and its corresponding average score as well as the ten Overall Profile Grades are available in Results to Upload They are represented by BarCode Tool Fin
180. an or equal to the Verification Status Upper Threshold If it is equal to the Verification Status Lower Threshold the resulting status will be good 3 or poor 1 with no fair 2 status defined Valid Values 3 to 1 Contrast Report The units that will be used for the reporting of contrast These are Uncalibrated Self Calibrated and Reflectance Calibrated Reflectance Calibrated is used if values from a Data Matrix tool calibration are available to enter into the Calibration Contrast Max and Calibration Contrast Min parameters that correspond to the Target Contrast of the Calibration Standard Cell Unit Report The units that will be used for the reporting of cell size and symbol height and width These are Pixels or Mils Mils may be used if the value from a Data Matrix tool verification is available to enter into the Calibration Cell Unit parameter 4 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Barcode Reading e Aperture Sets the synthetic aperture size in mils Default 0 for AUTO Range 4 to 20 e Calibrated Since contrast and pixel to mils calibration are performed with a Data Matrix tool and manually copied to a Barcode tool this parameter must be manually set to notify the software that it needs to use the calibration parameters e Target Contrast This is the contrast value of the calibration standard used with the Data Matrix tool to generate the calibration parameters e Calibration Contrast Max
181. anced tutorial using font based Font tools See Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool on page 2 20 This chapter serves as a guide Your results may vary Ensure that the HawkEye 1600T Smart Camera and I PAK HE software have been properly installed and configured see Appendix A Installation amp Software As you go through these tutorials refer to Chapter 5 OCV Reference Chapter 6 Setup Mode Reference e Chapter 7 Run Mode Reference Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 1 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials Setup Mode amp Run Mode I PAK HE incorporates two primary functional states Run Mode and Setup Mode Security access is restricted by the current user access level selected e Setup Mode Setup Mode allows a Supervisor to perform a Product ChangeOver retrain a Job and view and reset end of batch statistics Setup Mode allows a Programmer to create a Job define I PAK HE system parameters such as number of cameras triggering methods and so on This involves setup of all components of the application from positioning the part in the Smart Camera s FOV to training the vision tools The Run Mode button is grayed out until all tools in the current Job are trained For complete information about Setup Mode see Chapter 6 Setup Mode Reference e Run Mode Run Mode allows an Operator to view the operation of the HawkEye 1600T Smart Cameras while they are insp
182. and OCVRuntimeTool use the External Input of Match String and Transmit Final Inspection String features when enabled in the training sequence When External Input of Match String and or Transmit Final Inspection String is enabled OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool training is unchanged until the Approve Inspect Characters window is displayed This window displays only one button Input Match String as shown in Figure 5 60 5 84 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual External Input of Match String FIGURE 5 60 Input Match String Button On Input Match String Selected NewFont 0740_01 When Input Match String is clicked I PAK HE sends a header line to the external device to indicate which tool needs the inspection string Then for each line of characters found during training I PAK HE does the following e Displays a Waiting for Input Match String Line N message where N is replaced by the number of the line being waited for FIGURE 5 61 Waiting For Input of Match String Message Waiting For Input Match String Line 1 e Prompts the external device for the input string by sending a message with the following format Input Line N where N is the line number for the ring to be received QI e Waits for a response from the external device Note Strings must be null terminated A timeout error occurs if no response is received within the time specified in the Advanced Settings gt System Setting
183. ange Product The Change Product button displays the Change Product dialog box as shown in Figure 6 9 FIGURE 6 9 Change Product Dialog Box Change Product Ev E x Current Product Test2b Available Products Product Description Job Created Thursday January 24 2008 7 11 13 PM Archive Restore Change Lot Cancel The Change Product dialog box lists pre existing Jobs from the Jobs directory The Supervisor can select from these pre programmed Products by scrolling the list selecting the Product and clicking OK 6 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Change Product Once selected the product is read in from disk and all devices used by the product must be discovered and taken control of for a description of this process see I PAK HE Start up Procedure Typical on page 1 10 Once loaded the new Product name replaces all occurrences of the previously displayed Product name on all windows menus and dialog boxes Any changes to the former Job that were not saved are discarded The product description text up to 1000 characters is stored with the product definition in the avpsys file This allows each product definition to have aunique description The Supervisor can perform a Change Lot by clicking Change Lot The Supervisor can archive or restore pre programmed Products from a specified archive path such as a CD RW or network path by clicking the Archive Restore button Click Cancel to e
184. ant to substitute for Select the symbol from the Font box that you want to use to replace the layout symbol Click Substitute The Layout box and Inspect Chars are updated 7 To ignore one of the symbols in the layout exclude it from being inspected at runtime select the symbol to be ignored from the Layout box Select IGN Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 39 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials from the Font box Click Substitute The symbol is removed from the Layout box and Inspect Chars If you wish to retrain the tool with the OCVRuntimeTool selected click Train Tool in the Setup Mode Train window You can adjust the properties of the tool and retrain until you achieve the desired layout string 8 Once you are satisfied with the layout shown in the Inspect Chars string click Approve to return to the Setup Mode Train and Tryout wizard window 9 Position the AutoFind box for the OCVRuntimeTool over the area of the image in which the characters are allowed to move rotate This completes the training of the OCVRuntimeTool 10 Click Try all to verify the inspection as shown in Figure 2 47 FIGURE 2 47 Setup Mode Try All Current Product l Vision IPAK HE MICROSCAN Tez Propamer nage 2 40 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool This runs the Job once allowing you to observe your recently created Job 11 Click Exit Training to Main Setup This re
185. anual 4 19 Chapter Automatic Identification The Data Matrix Tool may fail to train when the ROI contains the full image In this case reduce the ROI so that it fits just around the Data Matrix and try to Train again Once the step has been trained the ROI can be adjusted without retraining If the tool still fails to train correctly try the assisted learn training method When placing the ROI just around the Data Matrix be sure to leave some white space around the Data Matrix usually a little greater than the size of an individual cell When Assisted Learn is enabled a second shape appears Figure 4 4 This shape defines the shape of the Data Matrix to be trained Adjust the corners of the assisted learn shape so that they are aligned with the corners of the training Data Matrix Only the ROI is used during the run of Data Matrix Tool Assisted Learn shape is used only during the training procedure FIGURE 4 4 Assisted Learn Data Matrix Tool Train ROI Assisted Learn ROI If a Data Matrix is located and decoded from running the Data Matrix Tool the Data Matrix is outlined and the decoded text displayed above it as shown in Figure 4 4 The status flag of Data Matrix Tool is set to pass when a Data Matrix is found and decoded and if the Enable Match String is selected the decoded string must also match The output status ReadStatus is set to true when a Data Matrix is found and decoded regardless of the decoded string
186. apter OCV Reference Buttons Done Returns you to the Custom Properties Main dialog box when you have finished with AutoFont and Scaling e Help Displays or removes help information from the Automatic Font Selection and Scaling dialog box as shown in Figure 5 14 FIGURE 5 14 Help Displayed Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Available Fonts symbols DefaultFont _ CC O 7 gt J C0 Save AutoFont Scale Scaled Font Help lt lt Done Place the currently displayed OC Font shape over a symbol in the image Select the name of the symbol in the symbol list Click the AutoFont Button to allow the best matching font scaled if needed to be automatically selected for the current tool Click the Scale Button to scale the current OCVFont and have it be selected for the current tool Automatic Font Selection The AutoFont Button The automatic font selection and scaling feature allows the system to scan through all of the OCVFonts in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder to determine which one will work best with the current image data When scaling an OC VFont is required to make it the best match the system determines the proper scaling factors to use to create a scaled version of the OCVFont This scaled version of the OCVFont will be created at the end of the automatic selection process The name of the scaled OC VFont will reflect the change in width and height used to perform the scaling
187. aracters in layout does not match characters sent Wrong Number of Symbols For a given Font Tool the number of characters in the layout string is different from the inputted number of characters Step FontTool Not Found The FontTool definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Inspection Not Found The Inspection definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Snapshot Not Found The Snapshot definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Vision device Not Found The Vision device definition is not found in the input string from the host The Font Tool is not trained Go back to Train and Tryout and train all the tools The OCVFont Tool with the given name is not trained Lot ChangeOver requires the tool to have a layout string before changeover can occur 5 98 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command Ethernet Input of Layout String Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Usage Prior to sending data the host must ensure there are no inspections taking place or pending Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Syntax For each FontTool in the Inspection Job there can be an Ethernet input of the Learn Layout string as shown in Table 5 4 By default the colon is the string delimiter The CHANGELAYOUT command string must end with the termination character EOT hex 04 The CHANGELAYOUT command can also be used to chang
188. as a string of characters that comes after a space dash space separator in the tool name For example if a tool is named OCVFont Tool Date Code the match criteria is Date Code After you train the tool and click Approve I PAK HE scans for and trains any OCVFont Tools in the snapshot that have the same match criteria you must use the notation to separate the tool name from the match criteria If there is no match criteria in the tool name no I PAK HE uses the entire tool name when searching for OC VFont tools to train O e Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontless Tools Allows a Programmer to quickly train multiple OCVFontless Tools Automatic training requires that an image be available for training and that the Programmer train the first tool in the group of multiple tools Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or de Default Disabled every OCVFontless Tool must be trained manually With Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontless Tools enabled when an OCVFontless Tool is trained the I PAK HE software scans the other tools in the snapshot looking for OCVFontless Tools with the same name or same match criteria as the OCVFontless Tool that was just trained Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 87 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Note Match criteria is defined as a string of characters that comes after a space dash space separator in the tool name For example if
189. at Is Covered Microscan Systems Inc warrants to the original purchaser that products manufactured by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of shipment This warranty is specifically limited to at Microscan s sole option repair or replacement with a functionally equivalent unit and return without charge for service or return freight What Is Excluded This limited warranty specifically excludes the following 1 Any products or parts that have been subject to misuse neglect accident unauthorized repair improper installation or abnormal conditions or operations 2 Any products or parts that have been transferred by the original purchaser 3 Customer mis adjustment of settings contrary to the procedure described in the Microscan Systems Inc owners manual 4 Upgrading software versions at customer request unless required to meet specifications in effect at the time of purchase 5 Units returned and found to have no failure will be excluded 6 Claims for damage in transit are to be directed to the freight carrier upon receipt Any use of the product is at purchaser s own risk This limited warranty is the only warranty provided by Microscan Systems Inc regarding the product Except for the limited warranty above the product is provided as is To the maximum extent permitted by law this express warranty excludes all other warranties express o
190. at are the most useful for users e When inserting a Data Matrix Tool Barcode Tool Runtime Font Tool or the OCVFont Tool I PAK HE automatically selects the text component of each tool in the Inspection step s Select Results to Upload field This data is shown on the Results Display dialog box in the String field Requested Result and Value fields Only one text field can be displayed in the String field The text fields hold either the Font Tool s current inspected character string or the Data Matrix or Barcode Tool s match string When inserting a Data Matrix Tool its tool graphics are set to show basic graphics Special Training of Tools The I PAK HE interface allows for special training of the Barcode Tool Data Matrix Tool and OCRTrainableF ont Tool when they are used with the Match String Enable checkbox as shown in Figure 6 16 Tool Settings Dialog Box on page 6 21 Match String Typically these tools perform a read at inspection time and report these results Some users want to use a pre determined code on their product and verify that the string read is what they expect This concept is known as Match String With Match String enabled these tools still perform a read at inspection time and compare it internally against the given Match String to decide if the inspection passed or failed When the data read is O The same as the Match String this inspection is deemed Pass e Not the same as the
191. ated or last changed his or her password are stored in a data file called ipak usr When you upgrade the I PAK HE software you must manually move the ipak usr data file to the current version of I PAK HE See Chapter 3 21 CFR Part 11 for complete information regarding 21 CFR Part 11 On the CD The CD contains the following Visionscape I PAK HE V3 7 4 Visionscape V3 7 4 Visionscape I PAK HE User Manual This manual is in PDF format in the I Pak_HE folder Double click Visionscape I PAK HE 374 User Manual pdf to view the manual Visionscape documentation set Visionscape VSKit programmers documentation and sample applications Adobe Reader V8 12 install xviii Visionscape I PAK HE User Manual Related Documentation All Visionscape documentation is provided on the CD in PDF format The PDFs are located in the Vscape Documentation folder You need Adobe Acrobat Reader included on the CD to open the PDF Double click any PDF to open Acrobat and view a manual Visionscape I PAK HE Documentation Visionscape I PAK HE V3 7 4 User Manual this manual Visionscape I PAK HE V3 7 4 ReadMe Visionscape Documentation Getting Started With VS 1 Smart Camera VS 1 also called the HawkEye 1600T VS 1 Smart Camera Guide VS 1 also called the HawkEye 1600T Visionscape Tools Reference Perl Script Custom Tool Programmer s Manual Visionscape V3 7 4 ReadMe Visionscape
192. atrix angle variation 4 26 matrix orientation 4 25 matrix polarity 4 25 matrix size variation 4 26 minimum border integrity 4 26 minimum edge strength 4 26 no of matrix columns 4 25 no of matrix rows 4 24 print verification 4 30 robust locate 4 30 samples per matrix cell 4 26 search direction 4 27 search speed 4 27 target contrast 4 32 threshold method 4 27 tool time out ms 4 24 4 27 train string only 4 23 use wildcard in match string 4 24 verification status lower threshold 4 31 verification status upper threshold 4 30 warp method 4 27 width pixels 4 24 width to height ratio 4 26 training 4 32 used with match string enable 6 25 Decode Near Center 4 8 4 29 Default password programmer 6 4 7 13 supervisor 6 4 7 13 Index 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual unique 7 9 DefaultFont ocv 5 9 DefaultSymb Tab 5 27 DefaultSymbol 5 105 Delay 6 22 Delete button 5 10 training 4 71 Demo Mode C 1 access password C 3 and failed image queue C 2 button C 3 C 5 disabling C 5 Demonstration Time for Each Product C 4 Desktop enable 3 20 Device select a different 1 10 Difference average spacing 4 36 reflectance 4 36 Dilation 5 3 5 34 5 74 Disapprove button 5 75 5 78 5 80 5 81 5 86 5 87 5 88 Discovery smart camera 1 10 Display audit trail button 3 18 calibrated results 6 7 failed image queue 7 3 login violation log button 3 7 login violations button 3 17 numeric ocrtrainable font tool 4 67 operato
193. aultSymb Apply Automatic Min Sharpness QI Apply Automatic Min Contrast Fm Show Trained Symbol Shapes e Apply Automatic Min Sharpness When enabled as FontSymbols are trained and added to this OC VFont a minimum tolerance for sharpness is calculated for the FontSymbol This value is 65 of the sharpness value calculated using the trained grayscale template of the FontSymbol e p i oc gt e e Default Disabled e Apply Automatic Min Contrast When enabled as FontSymbols are trained and added to this OCVFont a minimum tolerance for contrast is calculated for the FontSymbol This value is 50 of the contrast value calculated using the trained grayscale template of the FontSymbol Default Disabled Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 23 Chapter OCV Reference Show Trained Symbol Shapes When enabled the shapes of all FontSymbols that are part of this OCVFont are displayed whenever the shape for this OCVFont is selected in the buffer view Default Enabled ID Test Determination Pct When a FontSymbol is trained as part of an OCVFont it is compared against all of the FontSymbols already in the OCVFont When FontSymbols are found to be similar special tests are set up to check for the presence of the correct symbol at runtime Default 90 Range 10 to 100 ID Test Determination Pct adjusts the level at which symbols are similar enough to require spec
194. bbrechen For each line of characters found during training I PAK HE does the following e Displays an input box Input Line N message where N is replaced by the number of the line being waited for FIGURE 5 54 Match String Input Prompt Enter Line 1 of Match String Eg Input Line 1 Cancel m e Waits for a string to be input When a string is input I PAK HE examines it to determine which symbol names are in it If any of the input symbol names are not found in the OCVFont I PAK HE displays an error message as shown in Figure 5 55 and forces you to retrain by displaying only the Disapprove button FIGURE 5 55 Match String Error Message Bad Symbol Name Input Match String x Input Symbol Name 1 Not Found In OC Font 5 80 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Keyboard Input of Match String Ifthe number of symbols is not the same in each string an error message is displayed as shown in Figure 5 56 and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain FIGURE 5 56 Match String Error Message Incorrect Numbers of Symbols Input Match String Ifthe input string is not the same as the string of characters found during training an error message is displayed as shown in Figure 5 57 and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain FIGURE 5 57 Match String Error Message Strings Are Different Input Match String x Mismatch St
195. bles the ignore and substitute character functionality of I PAK HE See External Input of Match String Checkbox on page 5 83 for more information 6 88 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings e External Communications Timeout Setting this field determines the amount of time that the communications handshake waits e Match String Mismatch Action Defines the action that I PAK HE takes in the event that the string input from the external device does not match the string learned when the tool was trained The possible selections and their meaning are Use Input String Default I PAK HE uses the input string as the inspection string Use Learned String I PAK HE ignores the input string and set the string found during training as the inspection string Retry by Learning I PAK HE forces you to retrain the tool and allows the string to be entered again Retry by Input I PAK HE allows the string to be entered again Note The Match String Mismatch Action selected is applied to any OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool in the current Job Refer to Match String Mismatch Action on page 5 84 for more information e Keyboard Input of Match String Enabling this setting allows you to specify the intended inspection string for an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool This is accomplished by displaying an input box into which you can type the necessary information O
196. bol the number of On pixels in the binary template and a bitmap representation of the binary template as shown in Figure 5 45 FIGURE 5 45 Step Tip Example 1 QI E 38 AO AT Ol a at AJ li When the mouse is not positioned over a particular symbol area the Step Tip displays the name of the OCVFontless Tool as shown in Figure 5 46 FIGURE 5 46 Step Tip Example 2 0CUFontless Tool e i oc gt e e Po AOL Vil WA O AITO 1i Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 65 Chapter OCV Reference When the OCVFontless Tool has been run additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key when the mouse is positioned over the symbol area as shown in Figure 5 47 FIGURE 5 47 Step Tip Example 3 Siam fica TOA eval ath ad ee Inspection information includes e The Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the trained binary template The X and Y position upper left corner of the symbol relative to the OCVRuntimeTool shape The X and Y allowed movement of the symbol The Legibility Percentage and the Legibility Tolerance The Sharpness Contrast and number of Breaks found along with the associated tolerances e The Initial and Final Residue percentages along with the associated tolerances The Largest Final Residue Blob Percentage and its associated tolerance 5 66 Visionscape
197. box is repositioned based on the pin locations Each of the symbols found during training is expected to be at the same location within the OCVRuntimeTool box at runtime For each symbol position there are several ways that an inspection can fail e The symbol cannot be located e The symbol can fail because the sharpness value is out of tolerance e The symbol can fail because the contrast value is out of tolerance e The symbol can fail because a break larger than the user specified size appears in the character The symbol failed an ID Test It could not be determined that the correct symbol was present e The symbol can fail the initial residue check e The symbol can fail the final residue check either or both methods This residue analysis allows for detection of the following 5 46 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVRuntimeTool Symbol has become thicker or thinner Symbol has holes or missing features Symbol holes are filled in Symbol contains additional or stray markings FIGURE 5 34 OC VRuntimeTool Properties Page Tool Settings OCVRuntimeT ool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshold C4 gt E j z g Fal Defaut Datum Order OCVRuntimeTool Inputs T Use AutoFind wi g AutoFind Pin 1 Index 1 g AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 Te Apply Automatic Min Sharpness r Te Apply Automatic Min Contrast E g Max Contrast Difference 100 EZ Allowed Thickening of Symbo
198. button 2 39 5 75 5 77 5 78 Substitute Ignore 5 75 Substituting characters 5 77 Supervisor 6 98 configure access 3 6 6 5 password 6 1 Supported camera 1 7 pe 1 6 Suspend An Existing User Button 3 15 Switch 5 port ethernet B 1 Index 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Symbol choosing 5 17 height 4 14 sorting sensitivity 5 59 width 4 14 System settings communication tab 6 63 general tab 6 90 training and results tab 6 71 specifications 1 2 T Tabs acquire C 3 autothreshold 5 25 cameras 6 56 communications 6 63 computepolarity 5 26 data valid 6 58 defaultsymb 5 27 general 6 90 i o 6 58 layout 5 24 layout step property 5 22 layoutstep 5 13 ocvfont 5 23 training and results 6 71 Target Contrast 4 12 TCP IP 6 30 6 66 protocol 6 38 protocol amp syntax 6 38 syntax for a multi camera job 6 39 syntax for single camera job 6 38 Template Method 5 36 Test For Character Breaks 5 40 5 49 5 61 Text product description 6 11 Threshold 4 56 5 26 5 64 adjustment 5 26 5 33 5 43 5 52 5 64 method adaptive 4 28 offset D 13 Timeout 6 65 external communications 6 89 Index Tips for marking ocr fonts 4 72 ocv 5 105 step 5 43 5 52 5 65 training ocrtrainable font tool 4 71 Tool limit 6 51 set edit 6 51 settings button 6 21 6 53 C 3 setting automatically 6 25 Tools moving 1 7 sizing 1 7 special training of 6 25 Total Residue Area 5 30 5 70 Touch Input Software 1 6 Tracking ocv 6 40 Tradi
199. button that colored dark blue in its window e Open Softkeyboard The Softkeyboard allows you to enter text by pressing keys of the keyboard displayed in this program The text can be entered via left mouse clicks or touching the key on the touchscreen Touch inp P S EDED O If you are working on a Panel PC with an integrated Touch Screen and no keyboard is connected to the PC you can open the Touch Input Software using the following button Lo rom c o 25 52 Or d9 The button is only available in Windows or dialog boxes where it is possible to enter data You can also open the Touch Input via Help gt Open Softkeyboard in Setup Mode If I PAK HE is not running on a Panel PC or the Touch Input Software in not installed on the Panel PC the button is not available Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 9 Chapter Setup Mode Reference e Visionscape I PAK HE User Manual When you select Visionscape Il PAK HE User Manual the PDF for the manual is opened immediately If the PDF cannot be found in the installation path the Open PDF File dialog box is displayed Navigate to the PAK HE User Manual PDF and click Open Acrobat Reader starts and you can review the manual When you go into Run Mode Acrobat Reader closes automatically e About Visionscape I PAK HE When you select About Visionscape Il PAK HE a dialog box is displayed showing the version number of the product Ch
200. ce Close Advanced Run Mode This is a Programmer level function Close Advanced quits the Advanced Settings Toolbar and returns you to the main I PAK HE Setup Mode window Use the Run Mode button when you want to leave Setup Mode after performing a Product ChangeOver configuring or retraining a Job and return to Run Mode with your access level reset to Operator At this time the inspection Job is downloaded to the Smart Camera s Windows Registry information is updated with the name of this Job This provides recovery in the event of a power loss and enables I PAK HE to recover to Run Mode running this last Product Run Mode can be accessed by any user I PAK Administrator Programmer Supervisor or Operator All tools must be trained before you can run your product in Run Mode The Run Mode button is grayed out until all tools in the current Job are trained Troubleshooting Memory Limitations on the HawkEye 1600T There are limits to the size of Job that can be run on the HawkEye 1600T In general AVP files that are larger than 2 7M to 3M will not fit in the HawkEye s available memory In some cases Jobs that are smaller than this may run out of memory as well Specifically Jobs that use several IntelliFind tools with large templates or Jobs with many OCV tools and or large font libraries may run out of memory Keep this in mind when building your inspections Shutting Down I PAK HE The I PAK HE program should b
201. cessed Visionscape will simply acquire the image and store it into a buffer and the inspection will get it to it when it has time However if the trigger rate is too fast you will eventually run out of buffers and you will have nowhere to stash new images This is called a process overrun 6 60 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings e Inspection Passed is an output to indicate a good part This Output will be turned ON if the inspection passed all of the criteria set by you it will be turned OFF if your inspection failed Note When you return to Setup Mode from Run Mode all Inspection Passed outputs are set FALSE e Run Mode This output will turn ON when you switch I PAK HE to Run Mode and it will turn OFF when you return to Setup Mode This can be checked by an external controller to verify that I PAK HE is ready to run e HeartBeat By default this output is disabled When enabled at system start up time the HeartBeat output begins its operation by being set TRUE for 1 second and then FALSE for 1 second alternatively to indicate that I PAK HE is functional At this one second interval the I PAK HE software is verifying the operational mode of the Smart Camera If the Smart Camera is not operational the HeartBeat output is set to FALSE and remains FALSE until the Smart Camera is again operational When in Setup Mode and training OCVFont Tools the timing of HeartBeat may deviate from
202. ch Functionality I PAK HE Windows Setting JV Enable Desktop Tum off Always on Top r21 CFR Part 11 Configuration Fm Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 J Enable Pak_HE to be Minimized F Enable Configuration File Audit Trail m Config File Format US Letter Format C amp 4 Format Enable User Logins for Training Approvals F Set Passwords to Expire I PAK HE System Name System Name default Set Time Limit for System Inactivity Revert to Operator Mode C SWMinutes 15Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes Set Number of Failed Login Attempts 5 TT V Enable Saving Stats and Config Files from Stats Menu F Use GnScreen Keypad instead of PE Keyboard Observe the default settings All options must be available for training and tryout during this tutorial 15 Make sure Show All Menu Options Advanced Users Figure 2 12 is selected Click OK This displays the Acquirel window as shown in Figure 2 13 FIGURE 2 13 Product Creation Acquire 1 MyHawkEye_1600T Acquire 1 Cami 16 Right click on Acquire 1 This displays the Insert A Step dialog box as shown in Figure 2 14 2 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 14 Insert A Step Dialog Box Insert A Step nnularUnwrap Warp DynamT hresh Tool Edge Tool Fast Edge Fast Edge Group Flaw Tool FlexArray Step Formatted O
203. ck the Key button as shown in Figure 7 14 FIGURE 7 14 Exit to Setup Mode nase sample ocyfonttoals tame m be Operator ha am e oc Change Lot All camera displays will be closed automatically All open reports failure reports and result displays will be closed automatically I PAK HE saves the last runtime image for each Smart Camera These images are used in subsequent training sequences The inspection counters are saved to the registry When running with 21 CFR Part 11 with Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 on a Login dialog box is displayed Enter your user name and password Otherwise you are presented with a keypad to enter your Supervisor or Programmer password In either scenario after your password is successfully entered your inspection stops running and you are transferred to Setup Mode Default Passwords The default Programmer password is 0101 The default Supervisor password is 1010 Note Microscan strongly advises that you change these default passwords in a production environment Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 13 Chapter r Run Mode Reference Forgotten Passwords Should you forget your password Microscan provides a mechanism to reset the password and get into the system ONCE At the password keypad enter 228489 A random string will appear on the password keypad Note Make a note of the random strin
204. contrast minimum The symbol fails if the calculated value is less than the minimum Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 1 Chapter OCV Reference Sharpness Sharpness is an indication of symbol border definition or symbol crispness A sharpness value is calculated for the symbol and compared to a user selectable sharpness minimum The symbol fails if the calculated value is less than the minimum Break The current symbol data is compared to the trained symbol data If a break appears in the current data that was not in the trained data the symbol fails Initial Residue Initial residue of the symbol is basically a count of those pixels that differ between the trained template and the current image A binary residue template is created that contains On pixels only where a difference occurs between the current image data and the trained symbol template The sum of the On pixels in this residue template is the initial residue value If this value is greater than the user selectable maximum the symbol fails Refer to Figure 5 1 Note Typically this test is not used in pharmaceutical applications FIGURE 5 1 Initial Residue Examples Template Symbol Initial Residue Final Residue Total Count After performing a set of morphological operations on the residue image the final residue is calculated again as the number of On pixels in the residue image If this value is greater than the user selectable maxim
205. cords The data contained in the Statistics file is completely free from editing because it is written into the encrypted Audit Trail Additionally these files can be made into Acrobat Reader PDFs that can be stored on the local drive or archived to another drive network or CD YE ajd am ia oc TI N Can this data be saved to a non editable format The Audit Trail the Configuration file and the Statistic file can be made into Acrobat Reader PDFs that can be stored on the local drive or archived to another drive network or CD How do I know who made the last batch or change The Configuration Data and Statistics files are updated to include the last login name and timestamp to the files This Statistics information is written to the Audit Trail file as well including that login data My company wants the number of login failures to be 3 but Il PAK HE defaults to 5 What can I do Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Set Number of Failed Login Attempts allows a Programmer to define the number of login failure Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 21 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 attempts By default this value is 5 the range is 1 to 10 For more information see Set Number of Failed Login Attempts on page 6 93 If get an alarm on I PAK HE how will know someone saw it For Alarms Overruns you are required to acknowledge alarms with a login of Supervisor or higher to c
206. cription The Barcode Tool allows editing through the Barcode Tool properties page as shown in Figure 4 2 Click the A button to display advanced Barcode Tool properties 4 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Barcode Reading FIGURE 4 2 Barcode Tool Properties Page zg Default Datum Order zl Advanced Properties 4 InputBuffer Te Train String Only Ve Match String Enable g Match String g Tool Time Out rs EB Enabled Codes fy Minimum Code Height ay Maximum Code Height gay Minimum Code Length fy Maximum Code Length g Minimum No of Bars fy Maximum No of Bars fay Narrow Bar Width g Wide Bar Width E Search Direction g Hori Probe Spacing g Vert Probe Spacing EZ Minimum Edge Strength EZ Minimum Quiet Zone g Barcode Confidence Threshold EB Finetune Method EER Print Verification EZ Verification Status Upper Threshold EZ Verification Status Lower Threshold Contrast Report Cell Unit Report fay Aperture T Calibrated fay Target Contrast g Calibration Contrast Max g Calibration Contrast Min g Calibration Cell Unit BarCode Tool Inputs Snapshot1 SnapOutputBuffer r r NA 600 Code 128 Code 93 Code 39 2 of 5 Codabar 4 1024 20 1024 2 255 1 100 Horizontal then Vertical 16 16 18 12 0 lt none gt c o 6G F 70 as None 3 2 Uncalibrated Pixels Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 3
207. ction Default 10 Range 1 to 512 p i oc gt e e e Maximum Flaw Size Represents the maximum width in pixels that a discrepancy is allowed to be before it is considered objectionable The larger the number assigned the larger a discrepancy is allowed before causing the symbol inspection to fail Default 1 Range 0 to 20 Appearance Flaw Break Test Determines whether the OCVSymbolStep is to inspect for character breaks in the symbol When Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 71 Chapter OCV Reference enabled the inspection fails if a break is found in the symbol When disabled the inspection ignores breaks in the symbol Default Enabled Min Appear Flaw Break Size Is the smallest size break that causes a character break failure Default 2 pixels Range to 10 pixels Sharpness Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness is used to calculate a percentage of the trained sharpness value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When switched from Gray Level to
208. cy of menu flow description all steps and sequences are shown and all general details listed O Program Settings Dialog Boxes In these dialog boxes Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 the Programmer defines the camera settings and I O configuration Click Next to move ahead to the next menu in the Create A Product wizard series Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or d9 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 43 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 27 Create a Product Product Settings Camera MyHawkEye_1600T Camera Type HET 6O00TS 648x494 Trigger Acquire Method Continuous Trigger 1 0 none Trigger Polarity High to Low Lighti ighting On Strobe Power Strobe Exposure Time micro secs j 6000 Camera Button Text MyHawkEye_1600T FIGURE 6 28 Create a Product Product Settings Data Valid MyHawkEye_1600T Data Valid Duration me fi 0 6 44 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 29 Create a Product Product Settings I O 8 Point IO Board Fixed l Points r General Purpose I0 Points 1 fou OstaVaidinspectont z 2 fou finspectontPased o 3 fou z fOvenunCamerst CC lt 4 fou RUNMede CC CC TT j O System Settings Dialog Boxes In these dialog boxes Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 the Programmer defines the Communication and Reset settings j o e 9
209. d Camera Supported Camera I PAK HE supports all models of the HawkEye 1600T Smart Camera including Hi Res models and those that support the IntelliFind tool I PAK HE V3 7 4 supports up to four HawkEye 1600T Smart Cameras one inspection and one snapshot per Smart Camera lt c oS oo Q o 2 g o N cW or a gt User Interface The UI is English only and independent of the language setting of the operating system Storing Inspection Results You can store inspection results to a file If the file does not exist when you store inspection results it will be created If the file does exist inspection results are appended to the end of the file Note Only Programmers and Supervisors can edit or select a file name Moving amp Sizing Tools Table 1 2 lists the keys and key sequences to move and to size tools TABLE 1 2 Keys to Move and Size Tools Key s Resulting Action Up Arrow Moves shape up by one pixel Down Arrow Moves shape down by one pixel Right Arrow Moves shape to the right by one pixel Left Arrow Moves shape to the left by one pixel F Flips shape by 90 if shape is rotatable L Rotates shape one degree to the left counter clockwise if shape is rotatable R Rotates shape one degree to the right clockwise if shape is rotatable Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 1 7 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection TABLE 1 2 Keys t
210. d inspections observed Time Total inspection time in milliseconds String The Font Tool s character string being inspected or the match string for the Data Matrix or Barcode Tool Note When inserting a Data Matrix Tool Barcode Tool Runtime Font Tool or the OCVFont Tool I PAK HE selects automatically the text component of each tool in the Inspection step s Select Results to Upload field This data shows in the String field and the Requested Result and Value fields Only one text field can be displayed in the String field e Requested Result Reports on the items selected at Select Results to Upload in the Inspection properties page Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 7 Chapter r Run Mode Reference e Value Inspection results associated with the Requested Result items described above Each camera view contains an image display area showing the Smart Camera s FOV Zoom control and scroll bars are provided to allow you to access all areas of the image The inspected images appear in the image area with tool graphics optionally overlaid Each of the Camera Views contains a toolbar that displays the current Runtime Inspection statistics for that Smart Camera This read only informational includes Number of parts Inspected Number of parts Passed Number of parts Failed and the inspection time of the last part inspected The inspection time does not include image acquisition Under this ma
211. d the edge of the box that defines the FontSymbol Default 1 pixel Range 0 to 19 pixels AutoThreshold Tab The AutoThreshold tab of the OC VFont is part of the LayoutStep that is used for automatic segmentation of the image when enabled as shown in Figure 5 23 O1 FIGURE 5 23 AutoThreshold Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Threshold 135 e ha oc gt e e e Auto Thresholding Enabled Enables and disables automatic thresholding When enabled a threshold is calculated using the ROI of the step This calculation uses edge detection to determine foreground and background information The calculated threshold is displayed in the Threshold property Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 25 Chapter OCV Reference When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used by the step is whatever value is in the Threshold property The Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment properties are not used when Auto is disabled Default Enabled Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This property is only used when Auto Thresholding Enabled is enabled Default 10 Range 0 to 255 Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto is enabled Default bias 0 Range 64 to 64
212. der is created on the CD using the current time date stamp concatenated with the current product s name The PDFs are written to the CD using the previous names with the time date stamp This ensures that the files are not modified as the file date times themselves MUST be consistent with the file and folder names A few seconds differences in these is all that can be expected to be different Note You should create an SOP to verify these date times on the folder and file names and inside the files themselves to ensure no one is corrupting your data A message box Figure 3 6 is displayed after the PDFs are written so that you can see the file names and their paths on the archive device of I PAK HE Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 11 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 FIGURE 3 6 Archiving PDF End of Batch Reports isionscape I PAK_HE 3 7 2 x Archived to archive device JJ 11 19 2008 10 04 22Test01 IpakStats 11 19 2008 10 02 53 pdf 11 19 2008 10 04 22Test01 IpakDatum 11 19 2008 10 02 53 pdf 11 19 2008 10 04 22TestO1 AuditTrail 11 19 2008 10 02 53 pdf 11 19 2008 10 04 22TestO01 TestOl avp 11 19 2008 10 04 22TestO1 TestOl avpsys Once the archive is complete and you click OK I PAK HE restores this dialog box back to the viewing status of all three files Reset Audit Trail As an I PAK Administrator after creating a PDF of the Audit Trail which can then be stored onto CD or long term storage dev
213. dialog box If there are no Data Matrix Tools Barcode Tools OC VFont Tools or OCRTrainableFont Tools in the product definition the Change Lot dialog box is displayed empty with none of the tool or string fields filled in Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 9 Chapter r Run Mode Reference Figure 7 10 Otherwise the dialog box displays the tools names and the associated match or layout strings Figure 7 11 FIGURE 7 10 Lot ChangeOver Empty Lot ChangeOver Tool Path Status No tool available to change lot e If Show Full Path is checked I PAK HE displays the full path to the tools as shown in Figure 7 11 FIGURE 7 11 Full Path to Tools Shown Lot ChangeOver Tool Path saat 600T 2 Inspection Snapshotl My OCVFont Tool 1 SEP2008 Edit Code Char saat 600T 2 Inspection Snapshotl My OCYFont Tool 2 Jemanz62 Edit Code Char 7 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver Status Ni Run Mode Window If Show Full Path is not checked I PAK HE displays the simple tool name as shown in Figure 7 12 FIGURE 7 12 Simple Tool Names Shown ha am e oc OCVFont Tool Visons Edit Code OCVFont Tool Visons Edit Code Use Previous and Next to display all the tools in the Job To change a Code click Edit Code for the specific tool This allows the contents of
214. dialog box is displayed At this point all inspections are stopped and the I PAK HE enters an off line state You should be sure that your production line is stopped when you are performing a Change Lot operation Once complete all inspections will be restarted and I PAK HE will be back On Line 5 i m i e c oc Password 21 CFR Part 11 Access If 21 CFR Part 11 is active you are prompted for user name and password You must enter a valid user name withthe correct password to access the Change Lot dialog box If System Settings gt General gt Enable User Logins for Training Approvals is enabled the user name entered must have training authority When Enable User Logins for Training Approvals is e Off Operators can Change Lot in Run Mode e On Operators cannot Change Lot in Run Mode Password Standard Access If 21 CFR Part 11 is not active you are prompted to enter either the current Supervisor password or the current Programmer password You must enter a valid password to access the Change Lot dialog box I PAK HE provides a unique default password 1101 that allows an Operator who does not have Supervisor or Programmer access to use the Change Lot function This allows the Operator to perform a Change Lot but does not allow the Operator to enter Setup Mode Change Lot Dialog Box The Run Mode Change Lot dialog box is the same as the Setup Mode Change Lot
215. displayed Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual A 9 Appendix Installation amp Software FIGURE A 5 UPS Configuration Dialog Box J Enable all notifications Seconds between power failure and first notification 5 Seconds between subsequent power failure notifications 30 S r Critical alarm A critical alarm occurs when the UPS battery is almost exhausted or optionally after a specified time on battery power IV Minutes on battery before critical alarm 224 Configure Next instruct the computer to Shut down IV Finally turn off the UPS Cancel 10 Adjust the values so that they are the same as those shown in Figure A 5 11 If you are running Windows XP go to Step 19 12 Since you are running Windows 2000 it is necessary to run a program when the alarm occurs This program is installed onto your PC during the setup of I PAK HE 13 Click Configure in the UPS Configuration Dialog Figure A 5 to select the program The following dialog box is displayed A 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual UPS amp UPS Software FIGURE A 6 UPS Configuration Dialog Box Savecounts exe Specified MV Enable all notifications gt Seconds between power failure and first notification ja Seconds between subsequent power Failure notifications a4 Critical alarm 4 critical alarm occurs when the UPS battery is almost exhausted or optionally
216. displayed as shown in Figure 4 12 FIGURE 4 12 Font Manager Dialog Box iw Font Manager a xj Available Fonts 1 8 Select A Z_uppercase 4_thraugh_M FirstFont 0 0 test Duplicate SS Rename e Delete 6 Click New The New Font dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 4 13 4 58 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 4 13 New Font Dialog Box w New Font GH Name Sample Font OK F Initial Character Set BSG lt Empty gt 10 11 12 0123456789 C ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORS TUVWXYZ abedefghikimnoparstuywexypz abedefghijklmnoparstuywxyz01 23456789 C ABCDEFGHIJKLM C NOPQRSTUVWXYZ abedefghiklm noparstuvwxy2 Type a name for the new font Select the initial character set characters may be deleted or added later Click OK to close the New Font dialog box c o 6 a lt 3 The Font Manager is displayed again Highlight the newly created font and click Select In FrontRunner click Acquire New Image to capture a new image Acquiring a new image clears the image of all overlay graphics Size the ROI to completely surround the characters to be trained as shown in Figure 4 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 59 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 4 14 Sizing the ROI Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool ass ul EB Ol Font Font Name OCRTFDemo
217. dows XP A 15 Windows 2000 A 15 APPENDIX B Connecting Smart Cameras toa PC B 1 Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC using Static IP Addresses amp a Network Switch B 1 Connecting a PC amp Smart Cameras to an Ethernet Switch B 1 Setting the PC to Use a Static IP Address B 2 Setting the Smart Cameras to Use Static IP Addresses B 4 Verifying the Setup Using the Network Browser B 12 APPENDIX C Demo Mode c 1 Copying Job Font amp Image Files C 1 Check Jobs Before Running Demo Mode _ C 2 Demo Mode Jobs C 3 Enabling Demo Mode C 3 Running in Demo Mode C 5 Disabling Demo Mode C 5 xiv Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Contents APPENDIX D Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques D 1 Il PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool D 1 Properties Pages D 1 Custom Step D 2 none D 2 FailCode D 3 Settings D 5 Results D 5 Custom Vision Tool D 5 none D 6 Cylinder_UnWarp D 7 Theory of Operation D 7 Cylinder Unwrap ROI D 7 Using the Cylinder Unwrap Warp D 7 Description D 9 Settings D 9 Training D 10 Results D 10 I O Summary D 10 Dynamic_Binarize D 10 Theory of Operation D 10 Using Dynamic_Binarize D 10 Description D 12 Settings D 13 Results D 13 FailCode D 14 FindRotated D 14 Using FindRotated D 14 Description D 16 Settings D 17 Results D 17 Index Index 1 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual XV Contents xvi Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Preface PREFACE Welcome Purpose of This Manual Manual Co
218. e 8 Click to select Automatic Segmentation k U e 5 jm LL lt 9 Move the Custom Properties dialog box so that you can see the image and the training box o Q c S 9 gt 10 Position the training box over all the characters in the image to be included as shown in Figure 2 42 FIGURE 2 42 Positioning the Training Box Over the Characters EXPIRATION R mia 4 I SEP 2008 6N ag thie xal e 11 Click Train Symbol s on the Custom Properties dialog box to start the training process As each symbol is located a green box is placed around the character in the image Figure 2 43 and the Symbol Name dialog box is displayed prompting you to type a unique name for that symbol FIGURE 2 43 Training Symbols S Already Trained E Yet to be Trained SEB 2008 12 Enter a name for the symbol and click OK For example for the first symbol enter S for the second symbol enter E and so on Continue performing this step until all symbols have been added Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 35 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials Each symbol is stored as part of the OCVFont After you click OK the current box turns red and a green box is placed around the next character in the image Click Skip to pass over a character that is a duplicate You can Cancel training at anytime in which case no more symbols are added to the OCVFont 13 Af
219. e a00 gt Parity None Data Bits la l Stop Bits hoo Timeout Seconds 15 3 Field Delimiter Char Comm Port 2 not available Protocol l Pak Enclosure Standard fig Display Changeover Strings Main Comm Port QI e Ifthe selected RS 232 protocol is I PAK HE Enclosure Standard B Figure 5 74 RS 232 communications are accomplished through COM T Port 1 of I PAK HE With this protocol the default RS 232 setting for this D COM Port 1 are D oc Baud Rate 9600 gt e Parity None e Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 These settings may be adjusted to properly configure the communications with the host device e Ifthe selected RS 232 protocol is I PAK HE Selectable Main Port Figure 5 75 as shown in Figure 5 75 you can select the COM Port used by I PAK HE for RS 232 communications Then the RS 232 settings for the Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 93 Chapter OCV Reference selected port may be properly configured for communications with the host device FIGURE 5 75 System Settings RS 232 R5232 Settings Comm Port 1 Comm Port 2 r Baud Rate a00 Parity None Data Bits la gt Stop Bits i tis Timeout Seconds s Field Delimiter Char Ll Comm Port 2 not available Protocol Pak Selectable Main Port Display Changeover Strings Main Comm Por 1 C RS 232 ChangeLayout Error Debug Any err
220. e image displayed is the last runtime image for that Smart Camera If you are on the Inspection step it will show you the first snapshot s image for that inspection When you click Acquire or Live I PAK HE replaces that stored runtime image with the newly acquired image O Zoom In Zoom In causes the currently displayed image to show more detail Zoom Out Zoom Out causes the currently displayed image to show less detail Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or e Try Tool This is a Supervisor level function Try Tool causes the currently selected tool to run Any tools that the current tool depends on for execution are also run Runtime debug graphics are displayed over the image Debug information is displayed in the status bar below the Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 23 Chapter Setup Mode Reference image This selection uses the triggering mechanism you defined in the Tryout options Be sure to provide a trigger if one is defined in the product Try All This is a Supervisor level function Try All causes all tools in the Job definition to run Runtime debug graphics are displayed over the image Debug information is displayed in the Status Bar below the image Clicking Try All changes the caption to Try Stop Clicking Try Stop stops the tryout of the program and returns the caption to Try All This selection uses the triggering mechanism you defined in the Tryout options Be sure to provide a trigger if one
221. e Audit Trail from being compromised The Audit Trail is an encrypted file You cannot just open it with a common editor and make sense of the data Further the Audit Trail can be made into an Acrobat Reader PDF that can be stored on the local drive or archived to another drive network or CD The Audit Trail provides a detailed who what when log of all I PAK HE changes You can view the translated contents of this file as an 3 20 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern authorized user I PAK Administrator Programmer or Supervisor Also you can use the mouse to select some data to be printed This could be used to show a single Job s production run from Product ChangeOver to Reconciliation of that Batch records How safe are the Jobs files from being compromised Since the Jobs are binary files you can only edit them with I PAK HE If someone tries to edit a Job with say Notepad and saves those changes the file will be corrupt and I PAK HE will not read it in without error The Jobs are backed up automatically within I PAK HE so even if the file gets corrupted you can easily recover Go How safe are the Configuration amp Statistics files from being compromised In addition to the read only property for the support files Configuration and Statistics files I PAK HE hides these files This offers a more secure method of saving support files that will prevent editing re
222. e Format US Letter Format C amp 4 Format I PAK HE System Name System Name default The General Tab window contains the following sections End Batch on page 6 91 Job Settings on page 6 91 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration on page 6 91 e Menu Settings on page 6 94 IL PAK HE Windows Settings on page 6 94 e Config File Format on page 6 95 IL PAK HE System Name on page 6 95 6 90 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings Job Settings This section allows you to select or change Runtime Inspection Priority This is the runtime priority of the current process The options are Normal High and Realtime Note You must have access rights to change the process setting End Batch Enable End Batch Functionality allows you to automatically save the read only statistics file to the hard drive when you exit Run Mode When Enable End Batch Functionality is enabled disabled by default I PAK HE displays the End this Batch dialog box e Click Yes to display the Save Statistics To a Data File As dialog box Enter a file name and click Save I PAK HE saves the counters in the PC registry e Click No to simply enter Setup Mode 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration This section allows you to set the 21 CFR Part 11 compliance features for user access control logins and creating an audit trail For complete information about 21 CF
223. e HawkEye 1600T Smart Camera to the PC using dedicated network cards and static IP addresses to mmimize problems with disconnections Refer to Appendix B Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC for a description of how to configure your PC and HawkEye Smart Cameras to talk to each other via static IP addresses HawkEye 1600T Communications Each Smart Camera acts as an asynchronous processing engine In other words each Smart Camera contains its own processor and IO architecture and is therefore able to capture images process those images and send results via IO RS 232 or Ethernet independent of the PC and of the other Smart Cameras Each Smart Camera is fully independent Communications between the I PAK HE user interface and the HawkEye 1600T are conducted via TCP IP I PAK HE provides communication to external processors via Digital IO TCP IP and RS 232 1 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual CHAPTER1 Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection Visionscape I PAK HE s primary focus is to inspect measure verify position verify characters and detect flaws on pharmaceutical packaging The implementation of I PAK HE is flexible allowing for expansion of I PAK HE into the other vision areas of pharmaceutical companies i e medical device manufacturing diagnostic drugs glass vials and laboratory automation I PAK HE is adaptive and can be used easily in many other industries Note You can use the Intell
224. e I Pak_HE jobs PDFs 4uditTrai 11 19 2008 10 02 53 pdf 1 Print When you click Print the Reports that are selected checkboxes to the right of the description and to the left of the display will be sent to your printer 3 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions Note Make sure you have set up previously a network or local printer PAK HE will look for the printer defined on the system Archive PDFs When you click Archive PDFs the Reports that are selected checkboxes to the right of the description and to the left of the display and that have PDFs created will be archived to your archive device Also you can archive to every path selected in System Settings independent from the device type This can also be a USB Stick or any device that is connected to the PC and ready to store data Go Microscan strongly suggests you use the internal CD R W device as your archive device and set the path to D or whatever is your local CD R W drive path Note You need to set up the archive path via the System Settings Menu You need to put a blank CD into the CD R W drive and format it using Direct CD format it to allow multiple file writes from a program such as Windows Explorer Format the media before trying to use this feature Yen Yen az q al oc L 8 Ye N When creating these archives on CD several things are happening for top security First a fol
225. e Jobs folder as follows C Vscape I Pak_HE Jobs I PAK HE software performs special functions to make using the Visionscape device easier In the case of Font Tools and Data Matrix Tools where many users are often interested in verifying the inspection strings just read I PAK HE automatically adds steps to your Job to get this information out of the Visionscape device and on to the PC user interface 1 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual an Software Systems Scan for Sequence Steps Using Outputs Another useful automatic feature of I PAK HE is Scan for Sequence Steps Using Outputs which checks the logic so that when a snapshot step fails e g camera unplugged the outputs used in sequence steps are set to false This prevents an inspection from passing when monitoring sequence step outputs when the snapshot fails lt c o 5 o 2 o of 2 u or AL gt Software Systems Software Systems simulate actual Visionscape hardware They support the Load Images from File mode when acquiring images A Software System can only get and set virtual IO Jobs that run on a Software System run locally on the PC using its CPU and memory much like the Visionscape 0740 and 0800 boards not supported in this version A dongle is required to run Jobs on a Software System fully otherwise the Jobs can be loaded or modified and run on a Software System but they cannot be saved Alth
226. e any of these using the System Setting dialog box Communications tab TCP IP Syntax for Single Camera Job Product product_name lt lf gt Date Time m d yyyy h mm lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters lt lf gt I lt f gt P lt lf gt R lt f gt lt cr gt 6 38 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Statistics amp Data If there are no Inspected Characters in the Job the third line of data will not be present TCP IP Syntax for a Multi Camera Job Product product_name lt lf gt Date Time m d yyyy h mm lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters1 lt If gt I1 lt lf Pl lt I R1 lt f gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters2 lt If gt I2 lt lf P2 lt I R2 lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters3 lt lf gt BZ lt f gt P3 lt I R3 lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters4 lt lf gt 14 lt lf P4 lt I R4 lt lf gt lt cr gt If there are no Inspected Characters in that inspection the Inspected Character line of data will not be present O Preview Config File This is a Supervisor level function Preview Config File displays the contents of the current Product s Data File Statistics as shown in Figure 6 22 Lo e 9 c o 25 52 Or de Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 39 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 22 Preview Config File Data File for Prod
227. e are no limits on the number of characters however character sets must be combined in groups of at most 45 Each set of 45 characters constitutes a single font Execution time is proportional to the number of fonts that read the input mark or label At the Step level the OCRTrainableF ont Tool encapsulates the user interface elements to configure the Segment Agent the FeatExtract Agent the classifier inputs Font files and confidence thresholds It also allows the learning of new fonts Font files are stored into text files and will be installed in a Fonts directory at install time inside the Vscape Jobs directory A font file consists of the following files Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 49 Chapter Automatic Identification e A fontname nnd file contains runtime data necessary for OCR to read labels and marks using that Font e A fontname nna file contains the data necessary to incrementally train a font A fontname nnc file contains the data defining the Font alphabet ASCII characters and statistics information necessary to support confidence levels By default a special Font called new i e new nnd is always available and is necessary both for creating new fonts and for use at runtime by the OCR tool itself The OCRTrainableFont Tool provides both runtime and training capability for the OCR algorithm e Runtime The tool is responsible for reading a mark or label within an ROI using one
228. e briefly between tools to analyze resulting graphics The default is not selected Acquire This is a Supervisor level function 6 22 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Acquire takes an image using the pre defined trigger criteria fire strobe etc from the Options dialog box The image is displayed on the display buffer in the lower part of the screen This is useful when using a strobe allowing you to view a production image The image last Acquired is saved by I PAK HE In the Training and Tryout menu as you go through the Job by clicking Next and Previous the image displayed is the last runtime image for that Smart Camera If you are on the Inspection step it will show you the first snapshot s image for that inspection When you click Acquire or Live I PAK HE replaces that stored runtime image with the newly acquired image Live This is a Supervisor level function Live takes a live image from the Smart Camera and displays it on the display buffer in the lower part of the screen When you click the button once to activate Live Mode the button appears depressed The image area is updated dynamically with live video of the image Click Live again to exit Live Mode and the button resumes a normal position Live Mode does not wait for a trigger The last image acquired from Live is saved by I PAK HE In the Training and Tryout menu as you go through the Job by clicking Next and Previous th
229. e code and click Change this Tool s Code This will change the match or layout string to the contents you just specified I PAK HE will display an error message if the number of characters in the new string is not equal to the number of characters in the old string I PAK HE will display a message if any of the characters in the new string are not defined in the OC VFont used by the tool When no errors are encountered I PAK HE displays a success message O Ifa Job has multiple tools that have identical match or layout strings you can change them all at once by editing the code for any one and then clicking Change all Tool s Code Then I PAK HE will go through the Job and change the match or layout string to the contents you just specified for all tools that had the same code Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or d2 Note The Font Tool IGNORE character and Data Matrix Tool IGNORE character are allowed in this dialog box This feature supports up to 99 Font Data Matrix and Barcode tools total in any one Job Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 13 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Location of Jobs Folder The Jobs folder is created in the directory in which I PAK HE was installed and from which you run I PAK HE For example if you install the I PAK HE software in C Vscape then when you first run I PAK HE it automatically creates the Jobs folder as follows C Vscape I Pak_HE Jobs Using
230. e input string did not contain either the name of the OCVFont Tool or the new layout string Change Layout Error The Tool name is not in the Job Check you input syntax Input Symbol Name not found in OCVFont An OCVFont Tool with the given name could not be found in the Job The new layout string contains a Symbol Name that cannot be found in the selected OCVFont Missing 1st colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format Missing 2nd colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format Number of characters in layout does not match characters sent Wrong Number of Symbols For a given Font Tool the number of characters in the layout string is different from the inputted number of characters Step FontTool Not Found The FontTool definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Inspection Not Found The Inspection definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Snapshot Not Found The Snapshot definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Vision device Not Found The Vision device definition is not found in the input string from the host The Font Tool is not trained Go back to Train and Tryout and train all the tools The OCVFont Tool with the given name is not trained Lot ChangeOver requires the tool to have a layout string before changeover ca
231. e input to the Perl Package Script O The CustomVision Tool consists of an input image required optional input datums optional output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the Custom Vision Tool CustomVision Tools can perform vision operations because they require a buffer to be input to the Perl Package Script p bS Gen oc e J PAK HE supports a limited set of Perl Language Package Scripts These scripts allow changing the functionality of a Custom Step or CustomVision Tool by simply selecting a different script cd 9 e 9 arent Q 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 51 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Note I PAK HE supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I PAK HE software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by Microscan See Appendix D Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques for full details about Perl Inspection Steps Without Snapshots I PAK HE allows you to use Inspection steps in a product definition even when those Inspection steps contain no snapshot child steps Inspection steps without snapshots are useful when I O handling is required outside of the vision inspections For example an Inspection step could be
232. e shut down before disconnecting connecting or reconfiguring the Smart Cameras If I PAK HE is running when the cameras are disconnected and reconnected Setup Mode may not properly display images in which case it will be necessary to shut down the I PAK HE application and then restart it 6 98 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual aN p lt 5 i am i 9 e c oc cHapten Run Mode Reference This chapter describes the Visionscape I PAK HE Run Mode functionality Notice It is critical that you use a UPS with your I PAK HE to ensure your inspection counts are retained Inspection counts are written to the system registry on the way out of Run Mode In the event of power loss a UPS ensures that your counts are written to the registry and that I PAK HE and Windows shutdown gracefully Overview By default when I PAK HE starts up the Run Mode window is displayed as shown in Figure 7 1 This is the main user interface for the PAK HE Operator and allows viewing of images inspection counts and results for the currently running product Note You must let I PAK HE fully download your Job and assert the Run Mode output before giving it triggers The first time I PAK HE starts up you will be prompted to select a Smart Camera and a sample job will be created and downloaded to that Smart Camera as described in Running I PAK HE for the First Time on page 1 11
233. e templates used by the AutoFind When set to OCV Symbols As Templates the AutoFind uses symbol positions from the OCV tool s trained layout to automatically train templates for the locator When set to User Defined Templates you must manually position and size the locator template and search boxes 5 36 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFont Tool Default OCV Symbols As Templates OCVFont Tool An OCVFont Tool uses an OC VFont to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OCVFont are in which locations in the ROI Once the layout is learned the OC VFont Tool expects to find these symbols at the same locations in the ROI during inspection It uses the data from the FontSymbols in the OCVFont to verify the quality and correctness of the characters being inspected Training Training of the OCVFont Tool involves placing and sizing the OCVFont Tool box around the area containing the symbols to be inspected When Train is clicked the ROI is scanned for symbol candidates Symbol candidates are determined by searching for each symbol that is in the selected OC VFont chosen through the LayoutStep Then the OCVFont Tool box is reset based on the bounding rectangle of all symbols found and the values of the search extra properties The AutoFind is trained automatically whenever the OCVFont Tool is trained When the AutoFind Search Area Box is moved and or sized it is retrained automatically withou
234. e the match string of a Barcode Tool Data Matrix Tool or OCRTrainableFont Tool TABLE 5 4 Ethernet Input Syntax Ethernet Input Syntax Comment 5 CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool1 Input String for Camera 2003 02 lt EOT gt 1 s Font Tool 1 Date CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool2 Input String for Camera rb 251250430999 lt EOT gt 1 s Font Tool 2 Lot Code CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool1 Input String for Camera J 2003 02 lt EOT gt 2 s Font Tool 1 Date E CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool2 Input String for Camera gt 251250430999 lt EOT gt 2 s Font Tool 2 Lot Q Code O Note A maximum of one 1 input string is allowed in a single transmission The Ethernet Input Syntax requires user selectable tool names as input rather than symbolic tool names When there are multiple OCVFont Tools Barcode Tools Data Matrix Tools or OCRTrainableFont Tools in the product definition and one or more of the tools is not inserted directly into the Snapshot Step the Ethernet Input Syntax described above may be ambiguous In order to ensure that I PAK HE uses the correct tools Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 99 Chapter OCV Reference for setting the Layout String or Match String the tools must be given unique names when the product definition is being created or edited Il PAK HE Use
235. eBordMat Border BordMatc Datum Int X chGrade Match hGrade 1 Grade 39 eBordMat Border BordMatc Datum lnt X ch Match h 1 40 eOvalityG Ovality OvalityGr Datum Int X rade Grade ade A 41 eOvality Ovality Ovality Datum Do X uble 1 42 eCalibrate Calibrated Calibrated Datum St X X X X X d atus 1 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 45 c o G6 F F lt 3 Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 4 6 Contents of VerifyDetails continued Text Symbolic Name Symbolic Current ISO Offset Offset italics Name Type AIM IAQG ISO aim DPM output 43 eECCLev ECC ECCLevel Datum Str xX xX xX xX X elResult Level Result ing 1 Result 44 eVThrUp Verificatio VThrUp Datum Int X X X X X n Status Al Upper Threshold 45 eVThrLo Verificatio VThrLo Datum Int x x x x x n Status Al Lower Threshold 46 eContRpt Contrast ContRpt Datum En xX xX X xX xX Report um 1 47 eCellUnit Cell Unit CellUnitR Datum En x x x x x Rpt Report pt um 1 48 eAperture Aperture Aperture Datum Int X x x x x A 49 eTargtCo Target TargtCont Datum Int xX xX xX xX xX nt Contrast A 50 eContMa Calibratio ContMax Datum Int xX xX xX xX xX x n 1 Contrast Max 51 eContMin Calibratio ContMin Datum Int xX xX xX xX xX n A Contrast Min 52 eCellUnit Calibratio CellUnit Datum Int xX xX xX xX xX n Cell Al Unit 53 eAxialN Axial AxialN Datum Int x x Nonunifor at mity 54 eCust
236. ecting ASCII Setup Cancel O j o rom c 20 25 52 or 7p Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 29 Chapter Setup Mode Reference ASCII Setup Your RS 232 device settings should be set as shown in below This example is from HyperTerminal ASCII Setup 2 x r ASCII Sending F Send line ends with line feeds MV Echo typed characters locally Line delay jo milliseconds Character delay ji milliseconds m ASCII Receiving Append line feeds to incoming line ends I Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII IV Wrap lines that exceed terminal width ji Cancel Note DO NOT check Send line ends with line feeds This causes the match string to include this line feed as an actual character in the match string e TGP IP To enter the new Match String via TCP IP you need to define the Input Channel on the System Settings menu to be TCP IP and define its TCP IP protocol Once the Match String dialog box is displayed you will need to click Input Channel I PAK HE acts as a Server application and is in Listen Mode until the Client machine connects to it Before sending data the client has to request a connection Once the connection has been made I PAK HE can receive the match string If the connection is broken the application resets and places itself in Listen Mode In this case the client needs to reconnect When I PAK HE does receive the match string the string
237. ecting product After a Product ChangeOver or after a new product is defined the Supervisor clicks on the Run Mode button in the Setup screen to switch to Run Mode This causes the current product to be downloaded to all of the Smart Cameras defined in the Job and then all of their inspections are started which means that the Smart Cameras will begin waiting for inspection trigger signals When an input trigger is received the inspection Job executes the digital outputs are set and inspection images and their results are displayed on the I PAK HE monitor Note The Runtime and Setup screens have the standard Microsoft Windows Minimize button on the upper right corner of the screens when the System Settings gt General gt Enable I PAK_HE to be Minimized When clicked this button minimizes the I PAK HE application When the run screen is minimized it automatically minimizes the child windows camera views runtime stats etc For complete information about Run Mode see Chapter 7 Run Mode Reference 2 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool In this tutorial you will create a simple I PAK HE product that uses an OCVFontless Tool It is assumed that all System Settings are set to their default values If you have modified any System Settings the figures and descriptions in this tutorial may vary from the results you experience N 1
238. ection String O e Product ChangeOver Activities on page 6 71 e Results Reporting on page 6 74 e Training on page 6 84 e OCV Training on page 6 86 j o rom c 20 25 52 Or d9 Product ChangeOver Activities This section allows you to set the automated reset of statistics and failure upon Product ChangeOver e Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver Enabling this setting automatically resets the Runtime statistics to zero when you perform a Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 71 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Product ChangeOver and when you create a new product This makes I PAK HE ready to go On line with counters set to zero Default Selected e Archive Path Enabling this setting enables the Archive Restore button on the Product ChangeOver dialog box Through this feature you can archive and restore products from a CD RW or any other valid path such as a directory or across a network I PAK HE Job files are rather large and typically do not fit on a floppy You ll always need to archive and restore both the avp and avpsys files for a product to run in I PAK HE You can select the Archive Path using a browser by clicking on the ellipsis to the right of the Edit field Default Left Blank e Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot Setting Enables and disables the display of only unique codes in the Lot ChangeOver dialog box FIGURE 6 49 Lot ChangeOv
239. ed to be an edge pixel This is only used when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled Default 10 Range 0 to 255 Character Expansions Useful when dealing with print from a dot matrix printer or any print that is broken up in segments The more sparse the print the higher the value of this property should be This allows for the broken print to become solid by expanding the segments until they come together Dilations expand each segment Then erosions decrease the size of the character in every direction except the direction in which the segments have connected Dilations and erosions work together to make the segments solid without making the character fatter Default 0 Range 0 to 9 Filter Bright Defects When enabled runtime inspection of the symbol includes a pre processing step for filtering out any bright defects in the image Default Disabled Bright Defect Range The value is a percentage that determines the threshold at which the bright defect filter processes The threshold is calculated by taking this percentage of the range between the binarizing threshold and 255 This means that the binary threshold would be used when Filter Bright Defects is enabled Default 0 Range 0 to 100 5 34 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual AutoFind AutoFind Output Mask Type Used in conjunction with the DynamicMask step The selections are None Adds nothing to the mask Mask Template defa
240. elationship of the symbol data To calculate the contrast value the average gray level value of the background pixels is subtracted from the average gray level of the foreground pixels Whenever this property has a value of 0 no contrast checks are performed Default 0 Range 0 to 256 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage e p i tez oc gt e e Auto Threshold Enabled Enables or disables the automatic calculation of a threshold for binarizing the image at both train and run time When enabled the calculated threshold is displayed in the Manual Threshold property When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used for binarizing is whatever value is in the Manual Threshold property The Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment properties are not used when disabled Default Enabled e Auto Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 33 Chapter OCV Reference Default 0 Range 64 to 64 Manual Threshold Displays the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled When Auto Threshold Enabled is disabled the value of this property is the threshold that is used for binarizing the image Default 135 Range 0 to 255 Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is consider
241. election Select any Smart Camera from the List Below and Click Here N k U e 5 jm LL lt x a Q O a if gt Available Smart Cameras 5 Network GP HawkEyeE1000E E HawkEyeE1FFFB E HawkEyeE1FFOO GR HawkEyeE 10065 OF HawkEyeE 10028 MyHawkEye_1600T 3 Select a device Then click the Select any Smart Camera button Note If the Smart Camera is connected directly to a PC no network involved I PAK HE automatically chooses the Smart Camera and you will not see the screen in Figure 2 23 This starts I PAK HE the PAK HE Run Mode window is displayed as shown in Figure 2 24 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 21 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 24 I PAK HE Run Mode Window MICROSCAN Senttagenntt Scotts 160071 Scotts160071 View no image shown No images shown downloaded eotte1600T1 11 19 2008 205PM Note Steps 1 2 and 3 are only seen the first time that I PAK HE starts or if the device that should be used in the start up Job cannot be detected 4 Click the Key icon see Figure 2 24 This displays the Password dialog box as shown in Figure 2 25 2 22 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 25 Password Dialog Box Password N Input the Programmer or Supervisor Mode Password Cancel lt 2 es a2 OF 2 cl ot a S
242. ell unit 4 12 4 14 4 34 4 35 contrast max 4 12 Index 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual min 4 12 menu 6 6 open 6 6 save 6 7 save as text 6 7 Camera button text 6 57 results inspection 7 7 passed 7 7 requested result 7 7 string 7 7 time 7 7 value 7 8 viewing 7 7 supported 1 7 type 6 56 x 7 2 button text 7 2 Cameras tab 6 56 CD RW 6 11 Cell size 4 26 unit report 4 14 4 34 Change all tool s code button 6 13 6 73 7 11 change lot password access level menu 6 4 lot 6 11 button 6 11 lot button 6 6 6 12 7 9 password access level menu 6 4 product 6 10 6 68 6 70 button 6 10 this tool s code button 6 13 6 73 7 11 your password button 3 15 CHANGELAYOUT 6 68 CHANGELAYOUT Command 5 90 ethernet 5 99 rs 232 5 90 CHANGEPRODUCT 6 68 Changing Lot at Run Time 6 4 6 6 Index Character array show 4 69 expansions 5 3 5 34 5 74 ignoring 5 78 related features 4 68 statistics 4 68 substitution 5 77 Check Character Confidence 4 55 Checkboxes always ask to save font 5 8 external input of match string 5 83 keyboard input of match string 5 79 match string enable 6 25 Choosing symbol 5 17 Chr 10 6 37 6 69 Chr 13 6 37 6 70 Chr 2 6 76 Chr 3 6 76 Chr 4 6 37 6 68 6 70 6 76 Clear roi 6 31 statistics 6 68 6 70 CLEARSTATISTICS 6 68 Codes enabled 4 2 COM1 properties 6 28 Commands remote 6 68 Committed Samples 4 67 Communication Tab 6 63 Communications 1 2 Completing autostep mode 6
243. enable Train String Only After configuring the Barcode tool and setting its Match String Enabled to enabled when you select the Train button in Train and Tryout only the match string field will be updated None of the other barcode parameters will be modified c oO a a lt 3 Match String Enable When enabled the match string will be compared against the decoded string of a Data Matrix during a run to determine if the step is run successfully The status result parameter will be true if a Data Matrix is successfully decoded and the decoded string matches the match string value when this box is checked During training the decoded string from the training Data Matrix will be placed in the Match String Value box only if this box is checked Calibration Enable This parameter is set On prior to presenting a calibration standard to the Smart Camera When the next read occurs this parameter will be automatically turned back off Calibrated If the read of the calibrationstandard was successful this flag will be set on and valid Calibration Contrast Max Calibration Contrast Min and Calibration Cell Unit values will be created Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 23 Chapter Automatic Identification Use Wildcard in Match String When enabled checked this can be used in the match string to represent a don t care character i e the character represented by can be anything When dis
244. epresentation is available only in Setup Mode and only at the Programmer access level When I O Debug is selected the I PAK HE I O Debug diagnostic tool is displayed as shown Figure 6 8 FIGURE 6 8 I O Debug Diagnostic Display in MyHawkEye_1600T gt j lt _ Connect m Physical 1 0 xj 1 4 8 j e e e ej e e e Virtual 1 0 1 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 e e e e e e e ej e e ej e e e e ej e e e e e e e el e e e e e e e 33 36 40 44 48 52 56 B 54 A Programmer can access an I O Diagnostic tool to set and view the state of physical and virtual I O Once the I O Diagnostic tool is displayed the Programmer must connect to a HawkEye 1600T Smart Camera by selecting it from the drop down list and clicking on the Connect button The top portion of the window displays the physical I O the bottom portion displays the virtual I O Inputs are indicated as yellow buttons Where 6 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Setup Mode Menus applicable you can click the I O LED and change the state of the given I O point e Open Event Selector The Event Selector allows you to change how a touchscreen button press is received By default pressing the touchscreen is equivalent to a left mouse click By pressing the Event Selector the next touchscreen press will be read as a right mouse click The Event Selector will show the status of the touchscreen selection based on the
245. er Automatic Identification TABLE 4 3 Barcode Error Messages continued General Error Code QRCODE_IP_LINE_INTERSECT_ERROR 128405 QRCODE_IP_CORNER_ERROR 128406 QRCODE_DEC_UNKNOWN_ERROR 128420 QRCODE_RS_LEVEL_INVALID 128421 QRCODE_FORMAT_INFO_FAILED 128422 QRCODE_VERSION_INFO_ FAILED 128423 QRCODE_ROWS_COLS_INVALID 128424 QRCODE_DATA_CODEWORD_ INVALID 128425 QRCODE_TOTAL_CODEWORD_INVALID 128426 QRCODE_MODE_INDICATOR_INVALID 128427 QRCODE_MODE_UNIMPLEMENT 128428 QRCODE_RS_DECODE_ FAILED 128429 QRCODE_BCH15 5 UNDECODABLE 128430 QRCODE_MODEL_INVALID 128431 Data Matrix Tool This tool reads a Data Matrix symbol and converts the data to a string that can be compared to a known string or exported The input to Data Matrix Tool consists of a Data Matrix description and search criteria The output of Data Matrix Tool will be the decoded string and status indicating a match with the known string Other Steps Used None Theory of Operation The Data Matrix Tool locates and decodes Data Matrix codes It will search the specified ROI for a Data Matrix and attempt to decode it During the training process a representative Data Matrix is placed in the ROI After you click Train the system looks for any type of Data Matrix in the ROI 4 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool Based on the first one it finds it will set the Data Matrix Tool parameters to
246. er Dialog Box Lot ChangeOver Tool Path VisionSystem Inspection Snapshot OC Font Tool GhMA0222 Edit Code VisionSystem Inspection1 Snapshot1 0OCYFont Tool BMAD282 Edit Code IV Show Full Path Status With Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot enabled The list of tools on the Lot ChangeOver dialog box only shows tools with unique codes When the Job is scanned looking for OCV Tools to display I PAK HE also checks to see if a tool with the same code is 6 72 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings already displayed If a tool with the same code is found the new tool is not added to the list Clicking Change all Tool s Code initiates a scan of the Job to find all tools with the associated code using the old code When a tool is found it is updated to have the new code The Change This Tool s Code buttons are not displayed You must change all tools that share the same code e Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Enables and disables the automatic ignore feature of Lot ChangeOver FIGURE 6 50 Lot ChangeOver Dialog Box Lot ChangeOver Tool Path VisionSystem Inspection Snapshotl OCVFont Tool GMA0222 Edit Code MV Show Full Path Status O When you click Change All Tool s Code or Change This Tool s Code I PAK HE checks to make sure that the number of symbols you input is equal to the number of symbols currently in
247. er Manual A 1 Appendix Installation amp Software advise against using it in a production environment When a DHCP server renews the lease on the IP address assigned to one of the HawkEyes the connection to the I PAK HE interface can be lost If the connection is ever lost to a HawkEye 1600T I PAK HE will post an error message and shut down RS 232 Port 1 which is used for user input of Match String Characters and output end of batch Runtime Statistics CD R W recommended Screen Resolution Refresh You should set the Refresh Frequency setting Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display etc to a value that maximizes system performance To accomplish this increase the value of Refresh Frequency and use the Test button to make sure that the display is OK Continue this process until the optimal Refresh Rate is determined Tested PCs The following PCs have been completely tested with I PAK HE Version 3 7 4 IPC 847B Rack 1 66 GHz Intel Dual core T5500 2GB e IPC 627 Box 2 GHz Pentium M 1GB IPC 677 Panel 2 GHz Pentium M 1GB Note Neither the Box PC 840 nor the Rack PC 840 V2 are supported by Visionscape V3 7 4 or I PAK HE V3 7 4 Il PAK HE Components e Visionscape V3 7 4 On the software installation CD J PAK HE On the software installation CD e Optional installs for the Visionscape VSKIT and Adobe Reader 8 12 e One to four HawkEye 1600T Smart Camera one inspection and one
248. er Steps Used 4 18 Theory of Operation 4 18 Description 4 20 Settings 4 23 Training 4 32 Results 4 34 Print Verification Types 4 35 AIM 4 35 ISO 4 37 IAQG 4 38 DPM 4 39 I O Summary 4 40 DMR Verification 4 42 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Vii Contents DMR Step Output Datums 4 42 DMR Step Output Datums 4 42 VerifyDetails 4 43 OCRTrainableFont Tool 4 49 Theory of Operation 4 50 OCR Font Training 4 56 Numeric View 4 67 Character Related Features 4 68 Show Character Array amp Show StdDev Array 4 69 Show Histogram amp Show Font Histogram 4 69 Delete Training amp Remove from Font 4 71 Training Tips 4 71 Tips for Marking OCR Fonts 4 72 Results 4 72 CHAPTER 5 OCV Reference 5 1 Overview 5 1 OCV Inspection 5 1 Additional Filters 5 3 Brief Descriptions 5 3 Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts 5 5 Custom Settings 5 6 Main Custom Properties Dialog Box 5 7 Buttons 5 7 Font Manager Dialog Box 5 9 Buttons 5 9 Training Fonts 5 10 Training the OCVFont Tool 5 12 Remove Symbol Dialog 5 15 Automatic Font Selection amp Scaling Dialog 5 15 Buttons 5 16 Automatic Font Selection The AutoFont Button 5 16 Choosing a Symbol 5 17 Positioning the OCVFont Shape 5 17 Performing the Automatic Font Selection amp Scaling 5 18 Font Scaling The Scale Button 5 19 Choosing a Symbol 5 20 Positioning the OCVFont Shape 5 20 Performing the Font Scaling 5 20 viii Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Conte
249. er Supervisor clicks on Finish to complete the training process The Programmer Supervisor is notified when AutoStep training is complete AutoStep Off The Programmer Supervisor can select manually the tools to be trained This method of training may also be called random access training With AutoStep off all tools can be displayed graphically in the image window You can click on a tool to select it The Programmer Supervisor can also use the Next and Previous buttons to select a tool Once selected the tool can be trained by clicking Train By default upon entering train mode AutoStep is on To exit AutoStep click Exit AutoStep Mode This puts you in manual train mode When in manual train mode you can click Next which allows you to skip to the next tool The Programmer Supervisor can click Exit Training to Main Setup to exit this menu at any time Train and Tryout Mode With AutoStep off or once all vision tools in a Product have been trained successfully Train and Tryout Mode allows you to tryout the Job This mode allows you to monitor the execution of each step in the Product This allows for debugging and proving the integrity of an inspection before running in production mode O With AutoStep off Train and Tryout Mode is active and additional buttons are displayed to the right of the toolbar Below the toolbar is an area for image display Scroll bars are provided to allow you to access all areas of the image Vision
250. er you exit Run Mode fill in the Image File Name information bottom Oo o half Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 33 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 21 Retrieve and Save Image As Dialog Box isionDevice MyHawkEye_1600T Retrieve and Saye Image As m Part Image Storage Specify this nspection information before Part Image Storage Mode Store No Images you enter Run Mode Part Image Queue Size fo r Image File Name Images saved to C Vscape Pak_HE Failedl mages m Inspection 1 Base File Path Name Base File Number o Specify this information after you exit Run Mode i Update Inspection Stepfs Upload Images from Part i with Curent Settings i Queue Now Part Image Storage Mode Allows you to select which inspection images are to be stored Store All Images Saves all images in the inspection 6 34 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Statistics amp Data Store No Images Default Saves no images in the inspection Store Failed Images Saves all images in the inspection whenever a part fails Store Passed Images Saves all images in the inspection whenever a part passes When an inspection runs and meets the image storage criteria the Inspection step saves all camera images for that part to memory on the Smart Camera they can be saved to disk at a later time Part Image Queue Size
251. erence Training The AutoFind pin s get trained automatically when the OCV Tool is trained When all characters have been located inthe FOV during OCV Tool training the AutoFind Pin1 Index and AutoFind Pin2 Index properties of the OCV Tool select which characters to use as the find pins These characters are trained as templates for the pins The AutoFindSearchArea box sets up the search regions of the find pins This box can be moved and sized anywhere in the image independently of the OCV Tool box The size of the individual pin search areas is determined by comparing the OCV Tool box to the AutoFindSearchArea box The position of the individual search areas is determined by the position of the AutoFindSearchArea box FIGURE 5 26 AutoFind Properties Page Tool Settings OCVRuntimeT ool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity _4 g Li BI P g Default Datum Order v AutoFind Inputs Es Registration Method OnePt Locator EB Template Method D V Symbols As Templates e Registration Method Selects between a 1 Pin Find and a 2 Pin Find Default 1 Pin OC VFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool 2 Pin OCVFontless Tool When set to 1 Pin the locator will not handle any rotation of the characters being inspected Switching between the registration methods requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up e Template Method Sets the method for training th
252. ermine who in your company will be the I PAK Administrator Remember the I PAK Administrator creates user accounts but does not have any programming rights the I PAK Administrator is neither an I PAK HE Operator Supervisor nor Programmer Determine who will be a Programmer Microscan recommends this be a factory trained I PAK HE user The Programmer will set up the vision Jobs and adjust settings Determine who will be your Supervisors those who can retrain the vision tools to perhaps train a new lot code and those who can perform a Product ChangeOver to start inspection on another product type Another decision in your Supervisor Configuration is what access they have to the I PAK HE System and whether or not they have the ability to retrain key tools such asa Font Tool The Programmer can set up the Supervisors Access rights by selecting Access Level gt Configure Supervisor Access The I PAK Administrator assigns the right to retrain when they create a user account For more information see Configure Supervisor Access on page 6 5 Note Create an SOP that defines your users and their access rights Turn on Part 11 in I PAK HE see Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 on page 3 3 By default to provide a generic solution for all our customers Part 11 is not enabled This setting turns on Part 11 and the Audit Trail Note Create an SOP to never turn this option off Enable any other Advanced Settings gt System Setting
253. ersion 3 7 2 Setup Change Lot tau oa RAY Operator Any time there is a login violation an entry is made to a secuity log and the Audit Trail files ha A oc L e Yen N When you create a new user Supervisor or Programmer you must specify whether or not that user is authorized to do retraining By default this setting is disabled no signature authority Existing users will be set to NOT have this Signature Authority feature and therefore will NOT be able to approve training Any existing users in your user group must get a new user name and enable this Signature Authority feature to approve training The Signature Authority function has been expanded so that when person 1 trains the OCV tools or match strings for the Barcode or Data Matrix tools I PAK HE checks to make sure that user has signature authority in addition to continuing to check for a valid user name password and security level Customer Responsibilities Microscan has made every attempt to provide an off the shelf software solution for your vision needs Working with I PAK HE you need to provide Standard Operating Procedures SOPs at your company to further safeguard your data and comply to 21 CFR Part 11 Microscan has the following suggestions and recommendations Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 5 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 Starting Il PAK HE Using Part 11 amp Adding Il PAK HE Users 1 Det
254. est for character breaks 5 61 tryout debug delay 5 61 tutorial 2 3 use autofind 5 58 OCV Fonts create modify 5 5 OCVResultsDm 6 79 6 80 OCVResultsDm Upload 6 79 OCVRuntimeTool 5 4 5 45 apply automatic min contrast 5 48 sharpness 5 48 autofind pin index 5 48 autofind pin 2 index 5 48 enable mask output 5 50 font editor button 6 24 Index 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual graphics level 5 50 individual symbol search x 5 49 individual symbol search y 5 49 mask number of dilations 5 50 runtime id checking 5 50 test for character breaks 5 49 training 5 79 tutorial 2 20 use autofind 5 47 OCVSymbolStep appearance flaw break test 5 71 auto threshold adjustment 5 73 enabled 5 73 bright defect range 5 74 character expansions 5 74 edge energy threshold 5 74 filter bright defects 5 74 final residue limit 5 70 max blob size 5 71 method 5 70 initial residue limit 5 69 legibility 5 69 manual threshold 5 74 maximum flaw size 5 71 min appear flaw break size 5 72 minimum allowed contrast 5 73 sharpness 5 72 num of on pixels in template 5 68 output mask type 5 75 polarity 5 69 residue limit units 5 69 threshold enabled 5 74 OnScreen Keyboard 3 7 6 27 Open calibration 6 6 event selector 6 9 softkeyboard 1 6 6 9 softkeyboard automatically 6 94 Operator unique default password 6 11 Optical Character recognition 4 49 verification ocv 5 1 Index Options 6 22 button train and tryout 6 21 Output
255. etrain the Tooll and displays only the Disapprove button This forces you to retrain the tool and allows the string to be entered again FIGURE 5 70 Mismatch Action Retrain the Tool Message Retrain the Tool If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Retry by Input I PAK HE displays the message Retry Input and displays only the Input Match String button This forces you to try to input the string again FIGURE 5 71 Mismatch Action Retry Input Message Retry Input If there are no mismatches I PAK HE sets the inspection string to the learned string and displays a message Successful Input FIGURE 5 72 Successful Match String Input Transmit Final Inspection String If the Transmit Final Inspection String functionality is enabled the inspection string is sent to the external device First the header line is sent to the device to indicate which tool is sending the string Then the line Final Inspection String is sent followed by the actual inspection string If the tool is an OC VRuntimeTool the runtime OC VFont is trained based on the inspection string When a string is successfully input the layout is automatically approved and the training sequence ends 5 88 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual External Input of Match String External Input of Match String Protocol The I PAK HE OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool use a standard communications protocol in communicat
256. eturn to Run Mode but still in an Off Line state as inspections are NOT restarted because the data was invalid You may return to Setup Mode to retrain or try to send another good Ethernet ChangeLayout data to I PAK HE The RS 232 response back is immediate FAIL RS 232 ChangeLayout Success Response When the Lot ChangeOver is successful the RS 232 message OK is sent out and a message box is displayed For example on good RS 232 ChangeLayout data I PAK HE will display the ChangeLayout dialog box for 5 seconds I PAK HE will make the mouse into an hourglass wait then control goes back to I PAK HE The RS 232 response back is immediate OK FIGURE 5 78 ChangeLayout RS 232 Success Run Mode Change Layout 0740_01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OC Font Tool MARO1 740_01 Inspection Snapshotl OCVFont Tool MAROT Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver Ezan 5 96 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command FIGURE 5 79 ChangeLayout RS 232 Successful Details Change Layout 0740_01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OC Font Tool MARO1 0740_01 Inspection Snapshotl OCvFont Tool MAROI Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver ChangeLayout Debug Whether good or erroneous data is sent to I PAK HE these debug windows help users by providing an RS 232 debugging tool that allows Programmers to verify that str
257. ew Image to clear the image graphics The custom editor is updated to indicate all of the included characters as shown in Figure 4 18 4 62 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 4 18 Custom Editor Updated Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool xj Font EE E lul En Font Name Sample_Font r Characters Not trained Created 6 13 2007 A j B c J NEIE fela KIEM certo NIGFRIRIS TMM EME r Text or Character to Include o L 21s 14 Je e Ils lle a EEE a J J e To JL e Ji Js n Li JLi Jik im row meze n o le a l s ILIA HHHH DILL JL DIL i Number of Trained Characters AAAA A 1 5 10 Included Not In Font c oO DE Sg F 7o lt 3 Included 67890 5 samples included 17 Click Learn to train the font using the included characters You may stop training if desired You may train at any time as you include characters 18 When training is complete click Save Font or Revert as shown in Figure 4 19 The time required for training increases as more samples are added The default timeout is 1 minute select shorter or longer training periods from the Timeout drop down list Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 63 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 4 19 Click Save Font Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool ENI gt j Font E Eer E E lu BB ke Font Name Samp
258. f pixels away from the edge in the direction toward the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels Individual Symbol Search X Determines the width of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol width to get the search width Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels 5 60 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool e Individual Symbol Search Y Determines the height of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol height to get the search height Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels e Test For Character Breaks Enables and disables the checks for character break appearance flaws Default Disabled e Enable Tryout Debug Info Enables and disables the display of debug information during tryout When enabled inspection data is displayed on the Output line for each OCV Symbol that is part of the OC VFontless Tool Default Disabled Tryout Debug Delay Sets a delay that is used during the display of debug information This delay is the minimum amount of time that the information is displayed QI Default 1500 ms e Selected Symbol Group Selects which symbol group has its symbol properties displayed on the properties page Changing this value updates the property page to display the correct symbol group properties Symbol groups are defined based on the number of On pixels
259. f the code 5 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts TABLE 5 1 Usage Hints Use This Tool When You Want To OCVFont Tool Inspect for code quality and correctness Ensure that code quality is always measured against the Font Library created by the Programmer OCVFontless Inspect for code quality only OCVRuntime Inspect for code quality and correctness Inspect on line printing e AutoFind An AutoFind can optionally be used by any of the OCV Tools This step determines the location of the layout at runtime An AutoFind can be set up to use 1 Pin no rotation or 2 Pins rotation The Pins can be set up by selecting which layout positions to use Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts O1 Note Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool on page 2 20 takes you through the process of setting up an inspection using the OC VRuntimeTool and creating a new font When I PAK HE is first loaded there are no fonts on the system Fonts have to be created in order to perform font based OCV inspection Fonts are stored in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder OC VFont files have the extension ocv p hn s oc gt e e Note The location of the stored fonts is not modifiable so that all Visionscape applications can locate the fonts in a single folder You can use the LayoutStep of the font based OCV too
260. f varying quality The samples should be representative of the character print mark quality expected during production runs of the printed characters e Train frequently A font may be trained at any time Ifthe value of the RMS error increases significantly after a new training cycle consider deleting recently added samples e Changes should be made to the trained font whenever the Smart Camera position is moved If the change in camera position or lens focus is minor it may be necessary to add no more than a few characters samples e Note that certain characters are more prone to be confused for other characters Examples include B 8 G 6 and numeral 0 letter O During testing confirm that these characters are distinguished from one another accurately e Ifthe camera lens is inaccessible for defocusing use software methods to simulate variations in character quality e Note that each OCRTF step can use multiple trained fonts Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 71 c oO DD Sg F 20 lt 3 Chapter Automatic Identification If training takes longer than a minute try dividing a font into two or more smaller fonts Click Select Font to display the Font Manager dialog box then click Duplicate to create a copy of the font Remove characters from the font copy to reduce the size of the character set A font with characters A Z can be split into fonts with A M and N Z Make sure all required f
261. file for you Transmit Statistics This is a Supervisor level function 6 36 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Statistics amp Data Transmit Statistics sends the following statistics to another device through a user specified RS 232 or Ethernet TCP IP port e Product Name e Current date and time e Inspected string When the Match String for the Barcode Tool or Data Matrix Tool is used or when the FontTool text or OCVRunTool text is uploaded e Last Runtime Statistics Transmit Statistics sends this data in the following formats e RS 232 Protocol amp Syntax The RS 232 protocol and syntax for a transmission of statistics is as follows RS 232 Protocol The RS 232 default baud rate is 9600 No Parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit Any of these can be changed using the System Setting dialog box Communications tab RS 232 Syntax for a Single Camera Job Product product_name lt lf gt lt cr gt Date Time mm dd yyyy hh mm ss lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters lt lf gt lt cr gt I lt lf gt lt cr gt P lt Lf gt lt cr gt R lt lf gt lt cr gt lt eot gt lt Lf lt cr gt O Note EOT is the end of text character chr 4 or Ctrl D in HyperTerminal LF is the LineFeed character chr 10 CR is the Carriage Return character chr 13 A dialog box is displayed to the Supervisor indicating statistics have been sent Lo e 9 c 2
262. for the files It will post an error if there is not enough room to write the file When you click 21 CFR Part11 gt End of Batch Reports you will see a dialog box that contains the latest Inspection Results and its support files as shown in Figure 3 4 By default you are presented with its View option This shows you the information from the Statistics File the Configuration File and the decrypted Audit Trail You can choose to select all or some of these files for the other options 3 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions FIGURE 3 4 Viewing End of Batch Reports Current Product Test Statistics M Microscan Visionscape I PAK HE V3 7 2 RunTime Statistics File for Product Test1 Current Date Time 11 19 2008 09 27 41 Contig File IV Data File for Product Test Visionscape PAK HE V3 7 2 Page 1 oO Microscan Visionscape I PAK HE 3 7 2 Current Date Time 11 19 2008 09 27 39 Name of PAK HE System default Data File for Product Test gt Vision Device Scotts1600T1 lt gt gt Scotts1600T1 Settings lt lt Digitizer Selected CAM 1 0 3200 Digitizer Mode Single Board Normal e r amen bleh eee Mae De he meen Audit Trail M Updated Audit Trail Scheme PAK V3 7 0 li 11 18 2008 13 56 42 Visionscape l PAK HE V3 7 2 Start of Il PAK HE Audit Trail _ q al oc L e Yen N 11 19 2008 09 24 30 LoginName NONE
263. ft key when the mouse is positioned over the symbol area as shown in Figure 5 32 FIGURE 5 32 Step Tip Example 3 3874903 Inspection information includes The Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the trained binary template The X and Y position upper left corner of the symbol relative to the OCVFont Tool shape The X and Y allowed movement of the symbol The Legibility Percentage and the Legibility Tolerance 5 44 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVRuntimeTool The Sharpness Contrast and number of Breaks found along with the associated tolerances e The Initial and Final Residue percentages along with the associated tolerances e The Largest Final Residue Blob Percentage and its associated tolerance Note A 1 for any value above except the X and Y allowed movement indicates the test is disabled e The bitmap representation of the binary runtime symbol area When the OCVFont Tool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key and moving the mouse inside the OCVFont Tool ROI but not over the symbol area as shown below FIGURE 5 33 Step Tip Example 4 QI CEE A901 e i oc gt e e OCVRuntimeTool An OCVRuntimeTool uses an OCVFont called the Master Font to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OCVFont are in which locations in the R
264. g Then call Microscan s customer service with the information displayed on the screen The Customer Service representative will be able to look up a one time use password for you to enter If you are in Run Mode when you forget your password and contact Microscan you can exit Run Mode into Setup Mode by using the password provided by Microscan Customer Service Then immediately go into the Change Password menu to reset your password If you are in Setup Mode when you forget your password you must go into the Change Password menu after receiving the one time password from Microscan s Customer Service to reset it If you fail to reset your password and you go back to Run Mode you will either have to remember your original password or call Microscan Customer Service again for a new one time password Forgotten Passwords 21 CFR Part 11 Should you forget your 21 CFR Part 11 password you ll need to contact your I PAK Administrator to suspend your existing user name and create a new user name and password For more information about 21 CFR Part 11 and passwords see Reset a User s Password on page 3 17 7 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual End Batch End Batch When running with the End Batch option On I PAK HE prompts you for a response to save the End Batch results e No I PAK HE just returns to Setup Mode and awaits further action from you p lt 5 ha am i 9
265. g speed by up to 20 from Normal Turbo Increase the locating speed by up to 20 from Overdrive e Search Direction Specifies the search method used within the ROI Changing this parameter requires Tool Time Out ms to be modified to ensure the best performance Horizontal Search for Data Matrix using horizontal probes The time allowed by Tool Time Out ms will be used by horizontal searches Vertical Search for Data Matrix using vertical probes The time allowed by Tool Time Out ms will be used by vertical searches c oO DD Sg a lt 3 Horizontal then Vertical Each search direction will be used up to half of the time allowed by Tool Time Out ms Vertical then Horizontal Each search direction will be used up to half of the time allowed by Tool Time Out ms Criss Cross Default This setting should work best for most cases This mode uses diagonal probes to optimize the search e Warp Method Specifies the Data Matrix warping method Fast Default Increase the reading speed Uses approximation to reduce the computation time This may produce a higher error bit rate than Slow Slow Enable when receiving a high error bit rate Threshold Method For dot peen marks or inkjet printer marks the spacing between cells may not be accurate Local or Adaptive cannot Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 27 Chapter Au
266. ge onto a flat surface This reduces the distortion caused by the cylindrical surface O The geometry of the cylinder is specified using the e Radius of the cylinder e Distance the cylinder is from the camera N 3 a lt D e Vertical axis of the cylinder o Q Q H E A e Point within the ROI where the image is correct not distorted Cylinder Unwrap ROI The Cylinder Unwrap ROI is a rotatable rectangle Typically the rectangle is rotated to match the angle of the cylinder axis Using the Cylinder Unwrap Warp Typically other tools and steps are placed in its output image where the image pixels have been unwrapped into a rectangle This is useful for studying features or text on a cylinder that will be distorted closer to the edges of the cylinder Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 7 Appendix Inspection Snapshot Edge Tool RobustLine Fit Edge Tool RobustLine Fit BisectLines Meas CustomVision Tool ImageView Step Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques The ROI that defines the pixels to warp can be adjusted by moving sizing and rotating the search area shape associated with a CylinderUnwrap Warp Figure D 4 and Figure D 5 show an input image and the corresponding output image for a Cylinder Unwrap Warp The cylinder axis input is set to the output of a BisectLines Meas step which is the line which bisects the left and right edges of the cylinder F
267. get Contrast page 4 13 Tool Time Out ms page 4 6 Train String Only page 4 5 Verification Status Lower Threshold page 4 12 4 Verification Status Upper Threshold page 4 12 Vert Probe Spacing page 4 7 z Wide Bar Width page 4 7 2 2 ES Settings ss 53 c e Train String Only After configuring the Barcode tool and setting its lt ke Match String Enabled to enabled when you select the Train button in Train and Tryout only the match string field will be updated None of the other barcode parameters will be modified e Match String Enable When enabled the match string will be compared against the decoded string of a barcode during a run to determine if the step is run successfully The result datum will be true if a barcode is successfully decoded and the decoded string matches the match string value when this box is checked During training the decoded string from the training barcode will be placed in the Match String Value box only when this property is enabled e Match String The entered string will be compared against each decoded string during each run when Enable Match String is enabled This property will be filled in after a successful train only when Enable Match String is enabled while training Default Empty Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 5 Chapter Automatic Identification Tool Time Out ms The maximum time to search fora barcode When a barcode is not found and decoded by this time th
268. h of the devices we connect to our switch 5 Click OK then click OK again Your PC is now using the Static IP address of 192 168 254 2 Setting the Smart Cameras to Use Static IP Addresses By default Smart Cameras are configured to use DHCP Since we will not be connected to a DHCP server in this configuration we need to disable DHCP on the Smart Camera and assign the static IP address that we wish to use 1 Connect the serial cable that is included with your Smart Camera to your PC s COM Port and to the Smart Camera s Serial Port B 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Connecting Smart Cameras to a PCusing Static IP Addresses amp 2 From Windows start HyperTerminal Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt HyperTerminal 3 You ll be asked to assign a name to your connection Enter the following FIGURE B 4 Connection Description Dialog Box Connection Description UJ New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection Name HawkEyeConnectior Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC lecon o 4 Click OK When the Connect To dialog box is displayed select the PC Serial Port you wish to use for this example we will use COM1 switch to COM2 if COM1 is not available and then click OK Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual B 5 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC FIGURE B 5 Connect To Dialog Box 5 Connect To D
269. han any previous score values that score value is stored as the BestScore along with the name of the font that the template originated from and the scaling factors used to derive the scaled template When the Train Debug Delay property on the Custom Properties Main dialog box is set to a non zero value the scaled templates and match scores are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen After all OC VFonts have been tested the OC VFont that is associated with the BestScore is considered to be the font that will work best with the current image data When an OCVFont has been automatically selected a message box appears 5 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts to display the name of the best matching OCVFont and whether or not it requires scaling to match the current image as shown in Figure 5 16 FIGURE 5 16 Name of Best Matching OC VF ont Automatic Font Selection The best font is NewFont which requires scaling Scale and select font now HESI The dialog box also asks if the chosen font should be automatically selected into the current font based OCV Tool e No Results in no scaling being done to the best matching OC VFont e Yes Results in the OCVFont being scaled and the resulting scaled font will become the selected font of the OCV Tool FIGURE 5 17 Scaled_6_10_NewFont Embedded in OCVFont Tool OCVFont Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator
270. hangeOver Activities 6 71 xii Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Contents Results Reporting 6 74 Training 6 84 OCV Training 6 86 System Settings General Tab 6 90 Job Settings 6 91 End Batch 6 91 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration 6 91 Menu Settings 6 94 Il PAK HE Windows Settings 6 94 Config File Format 6 95 Il PAK HE System Name 6 95 Edit Tool Set 6 95 Tool Settings 6 96 Windows Explorer 6 97 Close Advanced 6 98 Run Mode 6 98 Troubleshooting 6 98 Memory Limitations on the HawkEye 1600T 6 98 Shutting Down I PAK HE 6 98 CHAPTER 7 Run Mode Reference 7 1 Overview 7 1 Run Mode Window 7 2 Run Mode Buttons amp Border 7 2 Camera Results 7 6 Runtime Change Lot 7 9 Password 21 CFR Part 11 Access 7 9 Password Standard Access 7 9 Change Lot Dialog Box 7 9 Overruns 7 12 Exiting Run Mode amp Entering Setup Mode 7 13 Default Passwords 7 13 Forgotten Passwords 7 14 Forgotten Passwords 21 CFR Part 11 7 14 End Batch 7 15 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual xiii Contents APPENDIX A Installation amp Software A 1 Minimum PC Requirements A 1 Tested PCs A 2 Il PAK HE Components A 2 Installing the Software A 3 Installing the Visionscape Software A 3 Installing the Visionscape I PAK HE Software A 4 Software Upgrades 21 CFR Part 11 Usage A 5 Uninstalling Il PAK HE Software A 5 Starting the Il PAK HE Program A 5 UPS amp UPS Software A 6 Configuring the UPS Software A 7 CD RW Support A 15 Win
271. hapter Statistics Config File Audit Trail 21 CFR Part 11 PDFs live is in a subfolder where I PAK HE is installed and in their own PDF folder Typically this is a path like C Vscape I Pak_HE Jobs PDFs Each PDF uses a file name that contains the date time stamp of when you created these PDF reports and the type of report it is For example the Statistics PDF might be called something like C Vscape I Pak_HE Jobs PDFs IpakStats 11 19 2008 10 02_50 pdf You should be able to use this timestamp to your advantage and verify that the timestamp of the file name is close to the timestamp contained in the file itself For example in Figure 3 5 you can see that the Statistics Current Date Time is 11 19 2008 10 02 50 So the PDFs were created three seconds after this file was created FIGURE 3 5 Creating PDFs for End of Batch Reports Vv Microscan Visionscape I PAK HE 3 7 2 Runtime Statistics File for Product Test01 urent Date Time 11 19 2008 10 02 50 Data File for Product Test01 Visionscape I PAK HE 3 7 2 Page 1 Microscan Visionscape I PAK HE 3 7 2 Current Date Time 11 19 2008 10 02 46 Name of Il PAK HE System default Data File for Product Test01 gt Vision Device Scotts1600T1 lt isionscape I PAK_HE 3 7 2 xj e Creating PDFs J C Wscape l Pak_HE jobs PDFs IpakStat 11 19 2008 10 02 53 pdf C Wscape I Pak_HE jobs PDFs IpakDatum 11 19 2008 10 02 53 pdf Vv Ur C Wscap
272. he I PAK Administrator can review the login violations via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your employees is constantly logging in incorrectly or you suspect a security breach oO ha q A oc L e Yen N FIGURE 3 14 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Display Login Violations 9 11 2002 10 15 AM UserName l Pak dmin Attempted login using password 999999 9 11 2002 11 24 AM UserName programmer Attempted login using password PROGRMMER 10 30 2002 10 41 4M UserName PakAdmin Attempted login using password 999999 11 05 2002 09 29 11 4M UserName Attempted login using password 11 06 2002 02 30 27 PM UserName program Attempted login using password progam 11 06 2002 02 48 31 PM UserName program Attempted login using password progam 11 06 2002 03 26 26 PM UserName program Attempted login using password proram 11 07 2002 01 51 34 PM UserName catcatcat Attempted login using password hathathat 11 07 2002 01 55 16 PM UserName program Attempted login using password catcatcat 11 07 2002 01 56 58 PM UserName PakAdmin Attempted login using password hathathat 11 07 2002 01 57 34 PM UserName PakAdmin Attempted login using password hathathat 11 08 2002 09 49 32 4M UserName program Attempted login using password 098765 11 08 2002 09 50 00 AM UserName program Attempted login using password 784325 11 11 2002 03 36 09 PM UserName progam Attempted login using password program 11 13 2002 08 53 27UserName p
273. he inspection When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default symbol size Range 0 to symbol size The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that will make the symbol fail the inspection This property is good for catching smudges that are poor aesthetically but would pass after all inspection operations are performed on it A property value of 100 or symbol size means initial residue is ignored Final Residue Method Selects between three algorithms for final residue analysis Total Residue Area This is the default This choice counts all On pixels in the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Limit pixel or percent as the tolerance Max Residue Blob Only counts the pixels in the largest blob of the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Max Blob Size as the tolerance Both Performs both methods 5 30 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual FontSymbol Final Residue Limit Sets the amount of objectionable residue that is to be deemed passable when Final Residue Method is set to Total Residue Area or Both Final residue calculation is done after the image processing on the residue image that is associated with Maximum Flaw Size An assignment of 0 residue pixel count 0 means that no residue is passable An assignment of 100 residue pixel count symbol size means that objectionable residue as large as the a
274. he layout is shown along with the ROI boxes as shown in Figure 5 35 5 50 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 5 35 Graphics Level Example When set to Show Details residue graphics are displayed green pixels are those that were not there at train time but are in the image at runtime fills while yellow pixels are those that were there at train time but are not there at runtime voids The LayoutStep for the OCVRuntimeTool selects a Master OCVFont and set up the learn layout process FIGURE 5 36 LayoutStep Properties Page Tool Settings OC RuntimeT ool AutoFind OnePt Locator Layoutsti g Bl Fal Default Dehan Order X LayoutStep Inputs Cc ha oc gt e e Ef Selected Font NewFont EZ Allowed Overlap During Read 5 g Min Read Match 65 000 Te Automatic Threshold Adjustment wi e Selected Font Allows selection of an OCVFont to use for training and inspections This property is a drop down list containing the names of all OCVFonts that are in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 51 Chapter OCV Reference Allowed Overlap During Read Used during the learn layout process The value of this property specifies the amount of symbol candidate ROI overlap that is allowed When symbol candidates overlap more than the allowed value tests are performed to determine the bes
275. he level can be raised to 36 to produce the optimum run performance Default 18 Range 5 to 100 Minimum Quiet Zone If for any reason the quiet zone is less in the image due to camera set up restrictions the Minimum Quiet Zone parameter can be lowered in order for the algorithm to accept shorter space as quiet zone On the other hand if the barcode is big in the FOV such that some space between two adjacent bars exceeds the value specified in the Minimum Quiet Zone then there is a possibility that this space will be detected as possible quiet zone To avoid this situation the Minimum Quiet Zone can be increased Default 12 pixels Range 5 to 100 pixels Barcode Confidence Threshold For barcodes that do notuse checksum such as Code 39 I 2 of 5 Codabar and BC412 the threshold value can help reduce potential misdecode When the value is raised a certain number of decodes must agree before the decode is declared successful On the other hand if the value is set too high then a normally decodable but imperfect barcode may not be decoded Default 0 Range 0 to 100 any possible decode is accepted Finetune Method The only method is Decode Near Center the Smart Camera tries to read the symbol that is closest to the center of the FOV 4 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Barcode Reading e Output UPC as EAN When enabled a UPC barcode string will be formatted as an EAN barcode UPC and EAN are o
276. he new productis read in This is because the new product may not have the same Input Output channel selections 6 70 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings System Settings Training and Results Tab FIGURE 6 48 System Setting Dialog Box Training amp Results Tab m Product ChangeOver Activities rr Training IV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver IV AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training F Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot JV Reset Statistics after re training I Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller V Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout Archive Path rr Tl Bo directly between RunMode and Training J Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout Results Reporting hj OCY Training F Enable 85 232 Runtime Resul Fm Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools Save Runtime Results to a File Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools MV Enable OCV Failure Tracking F Extemal input of Match String IV Report RS 232 ERROR when Inspection Result is er ipty External Communications Timeout j Second V Enable Failed Image Queue Match String Mismatch Action Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Number of Images in Queue Ti al ie ier Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum 2 C4 C8 The Training and Results Tab window contains the following sections Tl Keyboard Input of Match String mit Final Insp
277. he third line of data will not be present When there is more than one inspection the T P and R lines indicate the inspection number such as I1 P1 R1 e Clear Statistics When I PAK HE receives this command the Inspect Pass and Fail counts are set to zero e Go To Setup Mode When I PAK HE receives this command the system returns to Setup Mode without requiring a password If I PAK HE is already in Setup Mode no action is taken e Go To Run Mode When I PAK HE receives this command the system enters Run Mode If I PAK HE is already in Run Mode no action is taken e Change Product This is the only remote command that requires a parameter see Protocol on page 6 65 When I PAK HE receives this command the system attempts to load the indicated product If the product cannot be found or has other problems loading I PAK HE returns a FAIL to the Output Channel selected If I PAK HE is in Run Mode inspections stop The new product is loaded into I PAK HE and downloaded to the Smart Camera Then inspections begin If I PAK HE is in Setup Mode the new product is loaded into I PAK HE I PAK HE sends an OK message when the command is successfully received and processed I PAK HE sends a FAIL message when the command is not successfully received or processed Note When using the CHANGEPRODUCT command the OK response is sent out before t
278. he upper threshold at which the printed code is considered good When the final 4 30 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool verification grade is greater than or equal to the value of this property the code will be considered to be of good quality This value should always be greater than or equal to the Verification Status Lower Threshold If it is equal to the Verification Status Lower Threshold the resulting status will be good 3 or poor 1 with no fair 2 status defined Valid Values 4 to 1 e Verification Status Lower Threshold Allows you to set the lower threshold at which the printed code is considered fair When the final verification grade is greater than or equal to the value of this property the code will be considered to be of fair quality This value should always be less than or equal to the Verification Status Upper Threshold If it is equal to the Verification Status Lower Threshold the resulting status will be good 3 or poor 1 with no fair 2 status defined Valid Values 3 to 1 parameter VerStat LoThresh and parameter Verstat UpThresh When DPM verification is enabled in Print Verification each of the Enabled DPM Verification Parameters will have its own high and low threshold values The behavior will be the same as for Verification Status Upper Threshold and Verification Status Lower Threshold except applied to classification of the single parameter s grade The
279. hen you disable the Two or More Characters Allow Segmented Characters option This setting specifies the minimum size of a character thereby eliminating segments that are too small to be characters by themselves 4 Default 40 Minimum Confidence This option is displayed only when the Check Single Character Character Confidence property is enabled You can T 5 Two or More Characters enter a confidence level that the tool must find for each o character Any character that cannot be matched to at o least this input level will be returned as the unknown E character 3 Default 70 2 Pass On No Data When enabled the status will report passed even if a Single Character character is not recognized When disabled if any Two or More Characters character is reported as unknown the status will be false Polarity Allows selection of the symbol type for which the tool Single Character will search Choices are Dark Characters or Light Two or More Characters Characters with a default of Dark Characters ROI Contains Provides a choice between Single Character and Two Single Character or More Characters When you select the Single Two or More Characters Character option only one character boundary will be found within the search area The boundaries of the character will be defined so that they tightly enclose all blobs found Default The tool searches for multiple characters V
280. hown in Figure 4 25 FIGURE 4 25 Training Statistics for All Characters Character Data Character St Std Dev A00 0 000 0 00 0 00 0 27 0 34 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Samples 0 000 2 00 1 00 11 00 14 00 8 00 1 00 1 00 8 00 Co Oo oa r 0 31 0 29 0 37 0 34 0 64 0 33 0 65 8 000 ooj 0 656 Character Related Features FIGURE 4 26 Character Features Menu Gopy Delete Show Character Array For 0 Show StdDev Array For Show Histogram for 0 Show Font Histogram Delete Training For Remove From Font This menu is displayed when you right click on a character in the Graphical View 4 68 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool Show Character Array amp Show StdDev Array You can display constants for each character by selecting Show Character Array or Show StdDev Array as shown in Figure 4 27 These displays are useful for low level debugging and font testing only These displays may not be helpful for an Operator FIGURE 4 27 Results of Show Character Array amp Show StdDev Array Character Array for 0 x Standard Dey Array for 0 x Character Character onar SH a Char i Bi a i 172 186 i EN a a a 207 M Pa P 165 TN ai i 207 Pree i 189 Pr Py fi Fe 182 N an wan Show Histogram amp Show Font Histogram You can display a histogram for a character see Figure 4 28 or show font hist
281. iFind geometric pattern mark tool if you purchased a HawkEye 1600TIS or 1600TIH For more information about IntelliFind see Chapter 7 of the Visionscape Tools Reference on your CD in PDF format Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 1 1 mo lt f am Q 9 5 Q a2 eg of 2 u or AL gt Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection Functional Specifications I PAK HE resides on the PC in the Windows environment It is designed to create manipulate train and execute vision tools via a user friendly program I PAK HE supports both Setup Mode see Chapter 6 Setup Mode Reference and Run Mode see Chapter 7 Run Mode Reference in a tri level access scheme Note I PAK HE supports Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP SP2 The following is a summary of the I PAK HE functional specifications e Inspection Program Creation Acquiring images for the purpose of testing and setting up your vision inspections Selecting positioning and sizing the regions of interest ROI for each vision tool Training vision tools Entering a match string for a Data Matrix Barcode Tool Font Tool or OCRTrainable Font Tool Specifying a font style for training of the Font Tool Adjusting vision inspection properties Saving and restoring Inspection Program Job definitions These are also referred to as Products e Test Inspection Program in Tryout Mode
282. ial runtime tests Smaller percentages cause more symbols to be flagged as similar while larger percentages cause less symbols to be flagged as similar Examples When two symbols are found to be 75 similar and the value of this property is 85 no special tests are set up for runtime ID checking if two symbols are found to be 90 similar and the value of the property is 85 a special test is set up for runtime ID checking LayoutStep Tab The LayoutStep tab of the OC VFont is used for automatic segmentation of the image when enabled When an OCVFont is selected in the Custom Properties dialog box the LayoutStep tab displays the current settings for that OC VFont s LayoutStep FIGURE 5 22 LayoutStep Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Min Symbol Size lt in pixels gt 1 Automatic Segmentation When enabled the training of the OC VFont causes the image to be segmented using blob analysis A dialog box is 5 24 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFont displayed asking for a unique name to give the FontSymbol before training the FontSymbol for each position found Default Disabled e Min Symbol Size lt in pixels gt Adjusts the minimum size that a blob must be in order to be considered a symbol Default 10 pixels Range 5 to 256 pixels e Num Border Spaces to Add Determines how many pixels to allow between actual character pixels an
283. ialog box Communication tab as shown in Figure 2 31 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 27 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 31 System Settings Dialog Box Communication Tab r Selection Input Channel None r Output Channel None r Configure n5232 Ethernet TCP IP 14 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box Training and Results tab as shown in Figure 2 32 2 28 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 32 System Settings Dialog Box Training and Results Tab Product ChangeO ver Activities IV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver F Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot T7 Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Archive Path S m Training V AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training IV Reset Statistics after re training J Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout T Go directly between RunMode and Training FR Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout Results Reporting Ii Enable R5 232 Runtime Result J Save Runtime Results to a File J Enable OC Failure Tracking I Report 85 232 IV Enable Failed Image Queue ERROR when Inspection Result is empt Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Number of Images in Queue 10 c 8 Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second
284. iated avpsys file from the right hand list Then click on lt Restore to copy those files back to the Current Jobs folder In this case it will copy the files from the CDR to the I Pak_HE Jobs directory Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 15 Chapter Setup Mode Reference There are error messages and prompts to handle overwriting file names etc Archiving OCVFonts I PAK HE allows you to archive OCVFonts After a valid archive path has been entered on the System Settings screen see System Settings Training and Results Tab on page 6 71 the Archive Restore button on the Product ChangeOver dialog box is enabled Clicking this button displays the Job Archive dialog box as shown in Figure 6 13 FIGURE 6 13 Job Archive Dialog Box Fonts Button Job Archive Type Current Fonts Archived Fonts DefaultFont ocv myFont ocy Font1 ocv font2 ocv myFont ocy lt Restore Select All Click Fonts to archive restore font files and images from to the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder To archive Fonts from the Current Fonts folder to the Archived Fonts click on the Font name from the left hand list Then click on Save gt to copy those files onto the archival path To select more than one file at a time hold the Ctrl key while clicking file names To restore Fonts from the Archived Fonts to the Current Fonts folder simply click on the Font name from the right hand list Then click on
285. ice you can reset the Audit Trail This prevents the PC from having a sluggish response as it updates the Audit Trail file data Note Create an SOP to determine when if ever you can reset the Audit Trail Reconciliation of Configuration Files A configuration file is a human readable version of the current product s Job definition and its essential data When you click Statistics and Data gt Save Config File I PAK HE displays the Save Product Data File As dialog box and prompts you for a name for the configuration file The data saved includes Product date time counters Inspected Character String and Fail Counters When Part 11 is enabled the configuration file is read only This is a Supervisor level function Note When there is more than one OCVFont Tool OCVRuntimeTool Barcode Tool or Data Matrix Tool only the last inspected tool s string is saved You can display the file differences between two configuration files When you click 21 CFR Part11 gt Reconcile Configuration Files the Reconcile Configuration Files dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 7 3 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions FIGURE 3 7 Reconcile Configuration Files Reconcile Configuration Files File Click on the two Configuration Files to Compare C VWscape Pak_HE jobs Configuration rchives m Selected Configuration Files sample02 D ata dat sample03 D ata
286. ignore single edges during the Data Matrix locate process This speeds up the locate process in the presence of unrelated lines found in the image near the Data Matrix 4 28 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool Default Off Finetune Reserved Reserved for future use Allow Steep Angle In some Data Matrix reading applications it is not possible to set up the Smart Camera such that the focal plane is in parallel with the surface of the Data Matrix label When the focal plane and the label surface form a steep angle the Data Matrix in the image will have severe geometrical distortion Use the following steps to read a severely distorted Data Matrix in any orientation 1 Make sure all Data Matrix Tool settings are in their default state 2 Select No Quiet Zone Clutter and Allow Steep Angle for the Finetune method 3 Select Turbo for the Search Speed Now the distorted Data Matrix can be read in Run mode Default Off Allow Severe Damage Enabling this increases the robustness of the software in reading Data Matrices with severe border damage To use it first train successfully on a Data Matrix with less damage Then enable this option in the Finetune Method to read labels with more damage in Run mode c o o0 To 5 c blr E 15 Default Off Ensure Within ROI Enabling this ensures that no Data Matrix is located unless it is fully inside the ROI
287. ilable Data Valid is set On for 10 ms then Off for 10 ms You are to sample the inspection results while data valid is On Default 10 Range 1 500 I O Tab I PAK HE can accept input signals in order to trigger inspections I PAK HE can report the results of each inspection by setting output points On or Off There are a total of 8 I O points on I PAK HE 6 58 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 43 Product Settings Dialog Box I O Tab 8 Point IO Board m Fixed I0 Points PED ioo cme lg 2 pow jine TT TT Tj a OR hne TT T 4 Oa jine TT TT gt j r General Purpose I0 Points 1 fou z Datavaidinspectiont z 2 ou inspection 1 Passa xi 3 fou 0vernCanea1 CC fou gt a e I O Device Type Allows you to configure the General Purpose IO Points and define these points as Inputs or Outputs O In Input Out Output Figure 6 43 shows the factory defaults for this kind of I O device e Configure I O Allows you to define a value for each physical I O contact in your I PAK HE Refer to Table 6 1 for single camera default I O oO c ha al am Fixed IO Points are accessed via the Power amp Primary I O connector on the back of the Smart Camera The General Purpose IO Points are accessed via the Serial amp Secondary I O connector on the back of the Smart Camera For more information see the HawkEye 1
288. ils E Manufacturer None E Model Configure Select A The UPS service is currently stopped About 4 Click Select The Select Manufacturer dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure A 3 FIGURE A 3 Select Manufacturer Model amp COM Port Select manufacturer On port American Power Conversion p COM1 r CET eee eee Amerizan Power orversion Genetic Back UPS Pio Basic Port on Communications Accessory Basic signaling to ary APC UPS Matriv LIPS PowerStack Smart signaling Svnarl UFS Spmmetra Power Array to ary APC UPS A 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual UPS amp UPS Software 5 Inthe Select manufacturer drop down menu select American Power Conversion gt 6 Inthe Select model list highlight to select Smart UPS 7 Inthe On port drop down menu select the COM Port you have chosen to connect the UPS system to your PC 8 Click Finish to store the selected values The following dialog box is displayed o Sog 2 g zE le an FIGURE A 4 Power Options Properties UPS Tab with Configure Enabled Power Schemes Advanced Hibernate UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply r Status Details E Manufacturer American Power Conversion ie Model Smart UPS Configure i To commit the new settings choose OK or Apply About 9 Click Configure The following dialog box is
289. ime Font Tool Entering a keyboard match string entry for a Data Matrix or barcode match Default Off As you train the tools in a Job you are prompted to enter your I PAK HE Part 11 user name and password for training any FontTool or Runtime Font Tool and for the Data Matrix and Barcode Tools when in match mode Note The System Setting for Enable User Name Access must be enabled Training a Font Tool or Runtime Font Tool When training any font based Font Tool as you click Train you are prompted for your user name and password When you have the system setting for the Font Tool s Keyboard Input of Match String enabled you are prompted for your user name and password before entering the Font Tool s match string Training a Data Matrix or Barcode Tool in Match Mode When training a Data Matrix Tool or Barcode Tool in AutoStep Mode with Match String Enable of the tool selected I PAK HE automatically prompts you for your user name and password before entering the Data Matrix or Barcode Tool s match string I PAK HE also prompts you for your user name and password when you click Train with a Data Matrix or Barcode Tool selected with Match String Enable selected I PAK HE will not prompt you for the login when just retraining a read mode Data Matrix or Barcode Tool 6 92 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings In Part 11 mode if Enable User Logins for Training Approvals is
290. in counter toolbar is another toolbar representing Interval Counters These provide an inspection based set of interval counters for Total Inspected Passed and Failed There is also a Reset button on each Inspection window At the start of Run Mode these interval counters are set to zero Per inspection result the interval counters are updated When Reset is clicked the interval counters are reset to zero The maximum value for any counter that can be displayed and retained in the registry is e Inspected 10 characters up to 2 147 483 648 e Pass 10 characters up to 2 147 483 648 e Fail 10 characters up to 2 147 483 648 Note On the way out of Run Mode counters are written to the PC registry to preserve their values Therefore it is imperative that customers use a UPS with an I PAK HE system to avoid losing the counters if a power interruption should occur while I PAK HE is in Run Mode Interval counters are not saved with the Job or to the registry 7 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual aN Run Mode Window Runtime Change Lot Change Lot functionality allows a Programmer or Supervisor to quickly change the Data Matrix Tool match string the Barcode Tool match string the OCRTrainableFont Tool match string and the OCVFont Tool layout string without retraining the tools in the Job When you click Change Lot a prompt for a password is displayed If a valid password is entered the Change Lot
291. in the Available Fonts list is then copied and the copy is given the provided name Rename When clicked this button prompts you for a name for the new font You must enter a unique name for the new font The font that is selected in the Available Fonts list is then renamed with the provided name e Delete When clicked this button deletes the font that is selected in the Available Fonts lists from the fonts folder e Cancel When clicked this button returns you to the Main Custom Properties dialog box with no change to the selected font Training Fonts FIGURE 5 6 OC VF ont Tool Properties Dialog Box Properties OC Font Tool Font Selected Font DefaultFont Training Debug Delay jo ms ar ade Symbols Trained in This Font es Train Select Font Symbol s Remove AutoFont and Symbolls Scaling Revert Save Font IV Always Ask To Save Font IV Use Selected Font on Exit DefaultFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Apply Automatic Min Contrast V Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pet When a new font is added and selected for training using the Font Manager dialog box it needs to be trained before it can be used by a font based OCV tool First the OCVFont shape needs to be positioned over the symbols to be trained 5 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual
292. ing for Camera 2 s Font Tool 2 Lot Code b oc gt e e When bad data is received I PAK HE alerts the external RS 232 device with the following FAIL lt EOT gt If bad data is received inspections may not restart Look at the I PAK HE User Interface to see if intervention clicking on the Cancel button is required Then Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 91 Chapter OCV Reference you can either re send correct information or go to Setup Mode to retrain manually Once data has started to be received I PAK HE exits Run Mode changes the string then returns to Run Mode I O 16 Run Setup is asserted once I PAK HE is ready to receive triggers Any errors that occur are displayed in message boxes within I PAK HE Il PAK HE User Interface In order to use the RS 232 Input of Layout String you must set the Input Channel and Output Channel to RS 232 in the System Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 5 73 FIGURE 5 73 System Settings RS 232 Selection Input Channel RS 232 Output Channel RS 232 Configure R5232 Ethernet TCP IP Clicking RS 232 brings up the Configure Communications dialog box for RS 232 as shown in Figure 5 74 5 92 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command FIGURE 5 74 System Settings RS 232 R5232 Settings Comm Port 1 Comm Port 2 r Baud Rat
293. ing s are sent using correct formatting I PAK HE tries to specify the exact syntax error if any of the input I PAK HE displays and highlights errors on the I PAK HE screen for a longer period of time so that you know that a ChangeLayout error has occurred This causes user intervention to acknowledge the bad data When I PAK HE displays the Change Lot screen users can clearly see the newly entered strings to further provide debug assistance QI i oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 97 Chapter OCV Reference RS 232 ChangeLayout Error Messages In the event of data errors the error messages shown in Table 5 3 are displayed TABLE 5 3 RS 232 ChangeLayout Error Messages Error Message Change Layout Error Missing the Tool Name or the Layout Meaning The input string did not contain either the name of the OCVFont Tool or the new layout string Change Layout Error The Tool name is not in the Job Check you input syntax Input Symbol Name not found in OCVFont An OCVFont Tool with the given name could not be found in the Job The new layout string contains a Symbol Name that cannot be found in the selected OCVFont Missing 1st colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format Missing 2nd colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format Number of ch
294. ing with an external device Header Line Protocol The header line of data has the following form VisionDevice Insp Snapshot FontTool lt cr gt lt lf gt e VisionDevice The is replaced by the actual device number such as 1 inside the I PAK HE system This is the symbolic name of the VisionDevice Insp The is replaced by the actual Inspection number from the Job such as 1 This is the symbolic name of the Inspection Snapshot The is replaced by the actual snapshot number from the Job such as 1 This is the symbolic name of the snapshot e FontTool The is replaced by the actual FontTool number from the Job such as 1 This is the symbolic name of the FontTool QI Note When OCVRuntimeTool is used FontTool is replaced with OCVRunTool Input Line Protocol The prompt for input line has the following form Input Line N lt cr gt lt lf gt where e p i tez oc gt e e Nis the line number for the string to be received Input amp Output Inspection String Protocol The input and output inspection string has the following form 1 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt lt sp gt 0 lt sp gt 2 lt cr gt lt Lf gt Transmit Final Layout String Protocol The Transmit Final Layout String first sends the line Final Inspection String lt cr gt lt If gt Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 89 Chapter OCV Reference The
295. ion By default the factor is set to up to 23 This means that the Data Matrix in Run Mode can rotate from the orientation specified by the Matrix Orientation parameter e g 0 90 etc by up to 23 clockwise or counterclockwise The range can be reduced to ingease the reading speed when appropriate To read a Data Matrix with significant amount of border damage train the tool on a good label Set Matrix Size Variation and Angle Variation to 0 and Matrix Orientation to 0 This will allow the tool to read a badly damaged Data Matrix label as long as its orientation is approximately 0 Default 23 Range 0 to 180 Width to Height Ratio Matrix width to Data Matrix height ratio scaled by 10 For a width height ratio of 1 5 enter 15 in this box This value will be entered after a successful train This is useful when a tool reads a Data 4 26 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool Matrix whose size varies more than 10 but the Width to Height Ratio does not change In this case set this parameter to match the Data Matrix and set the Height and Width properties to 0 When the Data Matrix changes in size and shape set this property and Height and Width to 0 after the train Default 10 1 1 ratio e Search Speed Specifies the method to locate the Data Matrix Normal Default Changing this may improve the speed at the cost of robustness Overdrive Increase the locatin
296. ion that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 1 When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 1 meaning use the first symbol Range to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols AutoFind Pin 2 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 2 when the AutoFind is set up as a 2PinFind When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 999 meaning use the last symbol Range to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols Min Symbol Size in pixels Adjusts the minimum size that a blob must be in order to be considered a symbol Default 20 pixels Range 5 to 256 pixels Find Symbols That Touch ROI When enabled symbols are trained for blobs that are not fully within the ROI When disabled blobs that are not fully within the ROI are ignored Default Disabled 5 58 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool e Num of Border Spaces to Add Determines how many pixels to allow between actual character pixels and the edge of the box that defines the OCVSymbolStep Default 1 pixels
297. ions Customize the display af Fies and Folders change file associations an Fonts Add change and manage fonts on your computer Game Contolers Add remove and configure game controller hardware such as jovstict Hinter GMA Driver Control the graphics hardware Feabures of your system Dinternet Options Configure your Internet display and connection settings Sawa Java TM Control Panel Bie 17 a sha m a eead anlhan lan an ala Neen PN een anihan hiii aha aai lt gt Configure administrative settings for your computer My Computer 15 Double click Administrative Tools to display the screen in Figure A 8 FIGURE A 8 Administrative Tools Administrative Tools ia File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sak bd gt e pO search Folders Er Address lat Administrative Tools x E Name a Type Date Modified File and Folder Tasks 83 component Services Shortcut 22 03 2005 10 42 wp Rename this ile computer Management Shortcut 24 03 2005 15 50 B Move this fie E Data Sources ODBC Shortcut 22 03 2005 10 44 5 desktop ini Notepad Document 22 03 2005 10 44 Copy this fie i Event viewer Shortcut 09 11 2007 11 47 E mail this fie AP J Browser Contrd Security v1 1 Shortcut 14 11 2007 08 48 W Delete this file B Local Security Policy Shortcut 05 11 2007 16 20 APeMicrosoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration Shortcut 23 03 2005 15 59 Bn Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards Shortcut 23 03 2005 15 59
298. is is to activate runtime ID checking of special characters like O 0 B 8 D etc ID checking requires that these symbol boxes be the same size Oo Cc ha oc gt e e Individual character training requires that the OCVFont box be placed close around a single character in the image leaving a 1 2 pixel border as shown in Figure 5 18 This box should not include any portion of the adjacent characters The minimum recommended character width is 20 pixels When Train Font is clicked the Symbol Name dialog box is displayed asking for a unique name for the symbol as shown in Figure 5 19 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 21 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 19 Symbol Name Dialog Box Symbol Name Enter a Unique Name For This Symbol d y Clicking Cancel or Skip aborts the training of this FontSymbol When a unique name is entered and OK is clicked a FontSymbol is created and templates created from the ROI area of the image and default parameters are stored in that FontSymbol The OC VFont shape must be placed around the next character to train it This process continues until all characters in the image have been trained as FontSymbols and added to the OC VFont as shown in Figure 5 20 Only one example of a given character needs to be trained FIGURE 5 20 OCV Font Example 2 000456699 IS8BBDDGQS The Automatic Segmentation feature can be enabled from the Cust
299. is step fails and the program execution continues After training if a barcode takes x milliseconds to decode then the time out value should be set to more than x milliseconds when Search Direction is Horizontal or Vertical only The Tool Time Out ms value should be at least twice x when Horizontal then Vertical or Vertical then Horizontal parameter is used When x milliseconds is used as the Tool Time Out ms value when Horizontal then Vertical or Vertical then Horizontal parameter is used each search pass will time out in half of the x milliseconds Default 600 milliseconds 0 milliseconds no time out Enabled Codes Only enabled codes will be located within the ROI BC412 Codabar Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 Composite I 2o0f5 PDF Pharma Code Postnet QR Code RSS 14 RSS Expanded RSS Limited RSS Stacked UPC EAN 4 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Barcode Reading UPC E UPC Supplemental e Minimum Code Height Default 4 Range 4 to 1024 pixels e Maximum Code Height Default 1024 pixels Range 4 to 1024 pixels e Minimum Code Length The minimum length of the barcode to be decoded Default 20 pixels e Maximum Code Length The maximum length of the barcode to be decoded Default 1024 pixels 4 e Minimum No of Bars Default 2 Range 2 to 256 bars e Maximum No of Bars Default 25
300. isionscape J Pak HE User Manual 4 55 Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 4 7 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized continued Property Description Selected Font s Single Character Two or More Characters This is a list box containing the names of all fonts that have been stored on the system Whenever a new font is created and trained its name will appear as an option in this list You can select from this list one or more fonts that are to be used when reading characters from an image Set Unknown Characters To Single Character Two or More Characters This is a character that will be returned from the font reading process when no match can be made within the selected font Default Threshold Single Character Two or More Characters Threshold Bias Single Character Two or More Characters This value is the threshold above which a pixel s value must be for it to be considered a light pixel If the Adaptive Thresholding property is enabled this value is ignored but the calculated threshold will be displayed Default 25 This value will be added to the Threshold value before a comparison is made to determine whither a pixel is light or dark Default 0 OCR Font Training 1 In FrontRunner click Editor 2 Select the OCRTrainableFont tool 3 When an OCRTrainableFont Tool is present in a Job select Font Editor see Figure 4 10 I PA
301. istics and Data and Advanced Settings you will see the main toolbar as a guide to remind you which submenu you are currently in The active submenu is grayed out inactive submenus are not grayed out Setup Mode Menus This section describes the following menus e File Menu starting on page 6 3 e Access Level Menu starting on page 6 4 21 CFR Part 11 Menu starting on page 6 6 e Calibration Menu starting on page 6 6 e Image Menu starting on page 6 7 e Help Menu starting on page 6 8 File Menu FIGURE 6 2 File Menu File Exit To exit I PAK HE you must be at the Programmer s access level If you are not you will be prompted to enter the Programmer s password O Lo e 9 c o 25 52 Or 7p Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 3 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Access Level Menu FIGURE 6 3 Access Level Menu Calibration Menu Image v Programmer lt _ Highest Access Level Supervisor Operator Lowest Access Level Change Password Change Change Lot Password Configure Supervisor Access If you are at a lower access level and are trying to go up to a higher access level you will be prompted for a password If you are trying to go to a lower access level you will be allowed to go to that lower access level without entering a password Programmer Displays the prompt for the Programmer s pa
302. l 0 5 Bz Allowed Thinning of Symbol 0 E Individual Symbol Search x 3 D g Individual Symbol Search Y 3 2 Tg Test For Character Breaks rr T Runtime ID Checking wi O Te Enable Mask Output El e g Mask Number of Dilations 0 EB Graphics Level Show ROI Only e Use AutoFind Enables and disables the locator Switching between enabled and disabled requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up Default Enabled Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 47 Chapter OCV Reference AutoFind Pin 1 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 1 When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 1 use the first symbol Range to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols AutoFind Pin 2 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 2 when the AutoFind is set up as a 2PinFind When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 999 use the last symbol Range to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols Apply A
303. l input of match string 5 89 header line 5 89 input and output inspection string 5 89 input line 5 89 inspection string 5 82 keyboard input 5 82 transmit final layout string 5 89 Q Quit Product Creation 6 47 R Random Access Training 6 19 Reconcile Button 3 13 Reconciliation of Configuration Files 3 12 Recreate Step Datums D 3 D 6 D 9 RectWarp 4 19 Reflectance differences in 4 36 Registration method 5 36 Remote commands 6 68 details 6 68 syntax 6 68 Remove from font 4 71 symbols button 5 8 Rename Button 5 10 Re Parse Package Script D 2 D 6 D 9 Report rs 232 error when inspection result is empty 6 80 Reports 21 cfr part 11 end of batch 3 7 Requirements minimum pe 1 2 Re sampling and font scaling 5 19 Reset a user s password button 3 17 audit trail 3 12 button 7 8 interval counters 7 5 statistics after re training 6 84 on product changeover 6 50 6 71 Residue Limit Units 5 29 5 69 set to percentage 5 30 5 31 set to pixels 5 30 5 31 Restore a user 3 20 account button 3 16 Restoring Products 6 14 Results reporting 6 74 Index 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual storing inspection 1 7 to upload 4 11 Retrieve Statistics 6 68 RETRIEVESTATS 6 68 Retry by input 5 84 5 88 6 89 by learning 5 84 5 88 6 89 Revert 4 63 4 64 5 8 ROI contains property 4 55 RS 232 6 28 6 29 6 30 button 5 92 6 64 6 65 commands 6 68 results button 6 74 Run mode 2 2 7 1 button 2 2 6 98 C 5 exiting 7 13
304. l lowest grade among the graded parameters for this type of verification Verification Status As defined by Verification Status Upper and Lower Threshold Grades 4 0 A F are divided into three ranges Good Grades above or equal to the Upper Threshold Fair Grades below the Upper Threshold but greater than or equal to the Lower Threshold Poor Grades below the Lower Threshold are considered Poor Note For DPM verification Verification Status is the lowest status found in each of the enabled parameters and each enabled parameter has its own set of threshold values c B To 5 c blr F 15 AIM starting on page 4 35 ISO starting on page 4 37 IAQG starting on page 4 38 DPM starting on page 4 39 When you select AIM in addition to decoding the Data Matrix the tool also computes the Data Matrix print quality according to the AIM specification The Data Matrix Tool computes Axial Nonuniformity Contrast Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 35 Chapter Automatic Identification Print Growth Each parameter can be graded as follows A corresponding to a numeric value of 4 B corresponding to a numeric value of 3 C corresponding to a numeric value of 2 D corresponding to a numeric value of 1 F corresponding to a numeric value of 0 The overall print quality grade is the lowest of the four grades Axial Nonuniformity
305. l to select a font for training and inspection from a list of available fonts on the system Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 5 Chapter OCV Reference Custom Settings FIGURE 5 2 Custom Settings Dialog Box accessed via Font Editor Button Access Level Date Time Programmer 11 18 2008 02 51 PM 2L Tool 5 Zoomin Try Tool Font Exit Training Settings Options Acquire Live Zoom Out Try All Editor f to Main Setup The Custom Settings dialog box for the font based OCV tool creates and modifies fonts on the system With a font based OCV tool selected as the current tool from the Train and Tryout screen of I PAK HE clicking on the Font Editor toolbar button brings up the Custom Properties dialog box Note The Font Editor toolbar button does not appear in AutoStep mode because the AutoStep mode is only aware of tools and shapes within the current Setup Manager configuration Font Editing relies on the ability to insert remove OCVFont steps for training and manipulation Because these OC VFont steps are inserted removed dynamically the AutoStep mode does not know about them and does not allow the shapes to appear in the buffer Without the shapes the training of these OC VFonts is not possible 5 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts Main Custom Properties Dialog Box FIGURE 5 3 Main Custom Properties Dialog Box Propertie
306. lash 64MB RAM Name MyHawkEye_ 1600T Static IP 161 216 421 124 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP 1 MAC Address 00 60 33 e1 00 0a 1 Modify User Parameters 2 Reset User Account 3 Exit to Application Sot T Default network name MyHawkEye 1600T 9 You will be taken through the five parameters that can be modified For each one the name of the parameter will be displayed on the left and its current value will be displayed on the right a To change the value type a new value and press Enter b Otherwise simply press Enter and the next parameter will be displayed The user parameters are Default Network Name This is the name assigned to your Smart Camera We will not be changing this value so simply press Enter Static IP This is the IP address that your Smart Camera will use when DHCP is turned off Type 192 168 254 4 and then press Enter B 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Connecting Smart Cameras to a PCusing Static IP Addresses amp Subnet Mask This is the Subnet Mask that will be used with the Static IP address when DHCP is turned off We will leave this at its default value so simply press Enter Gateway This is the a gateway address not typically used Press Enter Use DHCP When set to 1 the default it tells the Smart Camera to dynamically get its IP address from a DHCP server the Static IP value will be ignored
307. law Size If there is little information in a symbol i e a 1 as compared to an L the percentage variation allowed should be reduced An assignment of 0 residue pixel count 0 means that no residue is passable An assignment of 5 70 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool 100 residue pixel count symbol size means that objectionable residue as large as the area of the prototype itself is passable When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Default 15 0 meaning 15 variation is acceptable Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pixel count in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default 15 of the symbol size Range 0 to symbol size The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection Note Determining the proper value for Final Residue Limit is a subjective decision the higher the quality of the character symbol desired the lower the Final Residue Limit should be QI e Final Residue Max Blob Size Used when Final Residue Method is set to Max Residue Blob or Both A blob analysis is performed on the residue image and the largest blob is found If this blob has an area that is greater than the value of this property the symbol will fail the inspe
308. le_Font r Characters Not trained Created 6 13 2007 TAIL ILC IONE J F J e III secs co Niele eR IZ r Text or Character to Include o 2l 4 5 6 7 Is s 1234567830 Eele A ee ow ee n o l LAL ebe rann FIRE M EE E ET MR Zl Lean sep Timeout 1 minute E Number of Trained Characters cy cles 36 RMS 0 004243774 A A A B A a 0 1 5 10 Included Not In Font Included 1234567890 Save Font or Revert Clicking Save Font saves the new training The train date and time are displayed beneath the font name as shown in Figure 4 20 FIGURE 4 20 Font Name amp Train Date and Time Font Name Sample_Font Trained on 2 12 2003 11 48 57 PM Clicking Revert abandons the training If the font had been trained previously it will revert to its previous trained state After training characters are highlighted using red yellow and green to indicate the number of trained samples for each character 4 64 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 4 21 After Training x Font et au Er MNIE Ol Font Name Sample_Font Characters Trained on 6 14 2007 6 47 33 AM IIA HILT NII ITV IMI r Text or Character to Include PIM T5jIT I5l3 RN ERA MZ TIRA MINKIN _ 2 AISI lalln la i MIDI M EI EI Ei Di EL E EI ER ME bean sto Timeout 7 minute Number of Trained Characte
309. lect Destination screen we suggest you accept the default location Visionscape I PAK HE and click Next A 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Software Upgrades 21 CFR Part 11 Usage Start Copying Files screen click Next The InstallShield Wizard Complete screen click Finish gt 3 Close the web browser The I PAK HE software is installed and ready for you to use Software Upgrades 21 CFR Part 11 Usage The Part 11 user names their encrypted passwords and the original time datestamp when a user was created or last changed his or her password are stored in a data file called ipak usr o Sg LG zE le an When you upgrade the I PAK HE software you must manually move the ipak usr data file to the current version of I PAK HE These paths can be determined quickly by looking at the Compatibility section of the I PAK HE ReadMe file or product information Uninstalling Il PAK HE Software 1 Open the Control Panel and run Add Remove Programs 2 Select I PAK HE and click Add Remove to remove the component 3 Finally restart the PC Starting the Il PAK HE Program When you successfully install the Visionscape and I PAK HE software the installer automatically puts an Visionscape I PAK HE shortcut into your Start gt Visionscape gt Visionscape I PAK_HE sequence so that I PAK HE automatically begins as soon as you have logged on Note If you exit I PAK HE you can re start b
310. lick OK This transaction is recorded to the Audit Trail file What is the date format used inside the Part 11 files The date format used inside Part 11 files is mm dd yyyy hh mm ss 24 hour format with leading zeros added for months dates less than 10 All this writing to disk what if I PAK HE runs out of hard drive space I PAK HE always checks the available disk space before writing the following to disk The Job The Audit Trail file The Statistics files The Configuration files Images 3 22 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual cuaptena Automatic Identification This chapter discusses the following tools for automatic identification e Barcode Reading on page 4 1 e Data Matrix Tool on page 4 18 e OCRTrainableFont Tool on page 4 49 c o G DD Sg c tar 2 lt 3 Barcode Reading The Barcode Tool reads a barcode and converts the data to a string that can be compared to a known string or exported The input to the tool consists of an ROI which types of barcodes to decode and the search method The output of the tool will be the decoded string and a status indicating a match with the known string Other Steps Used None Theory of Operation The Barcode Tool locates and decodes barcodes It searches the specified ROI for a barcode and attempts to decode it The Barcode Tool can be trained to set the match string for all types of barcodes The remaining parame
311. ll determine the changes in width and height that are needed to perform the font scaling The character should appear in the current image and be crisply formed and printed i e no smudges or blurring Positioning the OCVFont Shape The OCVFont shape of the currently selected font sets up the font scaling process This shape needs to be positioned and sized around a character in the current image that matches the character selected in the symbol list It is important that the shape be positioned and sized very tightly over the selected character do not leave any border This ensures that the system will correctly calculate the changes in width and height Note You may find it easier ifthe trained symbol shapes are not displayed Click Done and uncheck Show Trained Symbol Shapes see Figure 5 9 Tabs for Each Added Symbol on page 5 12 Performing the Font Scaling Once a character has been selected and the OC VFont shape has been correctly sized and positioned around that character the system is ready to perform the font scaling Click Scale to start the process The system compares the trained width of the selected FontSymbol with the width of the OCV Font box and calculates the required change in width to scale the FontSymbol in X Then the system compares the trained height of the selected FontSymbol with the height of the OC VFont box and calculates the required change in height to scale the FontSymbol in Y Then a new OCV
312. ls J External Input of Match String External Communications Timeout sn Seconds Match String Mismatch Action I Keyboard Input of Match String J Transmit Final Inspection Sting 6 46 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 32 Create a Product System Settings General Job Settings Menu Settings Streamline Menus Pema reeceeet Eanes Realtime zi Show All Menu Options Advanced Users V Enable Change Lot In Run Mode Fm Automatic Open Softkeyboard End Batch Enable End Batch Functionality Il PAK HE Windows Setting IV Enable Desktop Turn off Always on Top 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration Fm Enable l Pak_HE to be Minimized Fm Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 FT Enable Configuration File Audit Tra r Config File Format Enabl US Letter Format P Set Passwords to Expire C amp 4 Format to Operator Mode I PAK HE System Name e Minutes e Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minute System Name default O At this point e Clicking Quit Product Creation aborts the product creation during Product Settings and System Settings e Clicking OK takes you to the Step Program Creation dialog boxes Figure 6 33 through Figure 6 36 Step Program Dialog Boxes These dialog boxes are a visual representation of the tools to be programmed and used in the product definition A new product definition displays Camera Inspection and Acquire
313. ls found and the values of the search extra properties The AutoFind is trained automatically whenever the OCVFontless Tool is trained When the AutoFind Search Area Box is moved and or sized it is automatically retrained without requiring retraining of the OCVFontless Tool QI Inspection When AutoFind is enabled the pins are located and the OC VFontless Tool box is re positioned based on the pin locations Each symbol found during training is expected to be at the same location within the OC VFontless Tool box at runtime For each symbol position there are several ways that an inspection can fail e p i oc gt e e e The symbol cannot be located e The symbol can fail because the sharpness value is out of tolerance e The symbol can fail because the contrast value is out of tolerance e The symbol can fail because a break larger than the user specified size appears in the character e The symbol can fail the initial residue check The symbol can fail the final residue check either or both methods This residue analysis allows for detection of the following Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 55 Chapter OCV Reference Symbol has become thicker or thinner Symbol has holes or missing features Symbol holes are filled in Symbol contains additional or stray markings 5 56 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 5 41 OCVF
314. lts Reporting IF Enable F Save Runtime Results to a File IF Enable OC Failure Tracking IM Report RS 292 ERROR when Inspection Resu IV Enable Failed Image Queue 232 Runtime Result F Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Number of Images in Queue 10 E Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second l C Maximum C 2 4 8 M Training IV AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training IV Reset Statistics after re training J Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout F Go directly between RunMode and Training F Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout n oO es a2 OF cl or a S r OC Training Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools IF Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools F Extermal Input of Match String External Communications Timeout fe Second Match String Mismatch Actior Tl Keyboard Input of Match String F Transmit Final Inspection String 14 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box General tab as shown in Figure 2 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 12 System Settings Dialog Box General Tab Job Settings Menu Settings C Streamline Menus Hunima Inspection Eren Realtime zi Show All Menu Options Advanced Users v Enable Change Lot In Run Mode _End Batch I Automatic Open Softkeyboard IF Enable End Bat
315. mation End of Batch Product Data On Screen reviewing of Product Data Transmitting of Product Data via RS 232 or TCP IP to another device Ability to save the Product definition and Runtime Statistics to a file Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 1 5 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection e Customizing of System Settings Ability to set camera triggering method etc Ability to define automated functions after Product ChangeOver e Support of 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance Login User Name Access with Password Expiration Feature Configuration File Audit Trail Login option available when retraining a Data Matrix or Barcode Tool in Match Mode and Training a Font Tool or Runtime Font Tool Touch Input Software You can open the Touch Input software using the following button The button is only available in dialog boxes where you can enter data Additionally in Setup Mode you can open the Touch Input using Help gt Open Softkeyboard Configurations with PCs Recommended Configurations with PCs The following PCs have been completely tested with I PAK HE Version 3 7 4 e IPC 847B Rack 1 66 GHz Intel Dual core T5500 2GB IPC 627 Box 2 GHz Pentium M 1GB IPC 677 Panel 2 GHz Pentium M 1GB Note Neither the Box PC 840 nor the Rack PC 840 V2 are supported by Visionscape V3 7 4 or I PAK HE V3 7 4 1 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual an Supporte
316. mbol Range to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols e Max Contrast Difference Sets the maximum percentage difference between the calculated contrast values for symbols being inspected by the tool When set to 100 any contrast difference is acceptable If no contrast calculations are performed for the inspected symbols the calculated percent difference is 0 Otherwise the smallest contrast from the inspected symbols is divided by the largest contrast from the inspected symbols This value is then subtracted from 1 to get the percentage difference If the calculated the difference is larger than the value of Max Contrast Difference the inspection fails QI Default 100 Range 0 to 100 p t tez oc gt e e e Allowed Thickening of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to grow along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction away from the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels e Allowed Thinning of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to shrink along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction toward the center of the symbol
317. ment property AutoThreshold tab The AutoThreshold tab of the OC VFont Tool belongs to the LayoutStep and is used only at runtime The only property used is Threshold Adjustment which serves as a global adjustment for all FontSymbols being inspected FontSymbols may still make individual adjustments to the thresholds using their own Auto Threshold Adjustment properties The ComputePolarity step of the OC VFont Tool belongs to the LayoutStep It is not used by an OCVFont Tool Step Tip After the OCVFont Tool has been trained positioning the mouse over the ROI displays a Step Tip This Step Tip provides information and graphical feedback for individual symbols when the mouse is over a symbol area Train information includes the Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the binary template and a bitmap representation of the binary template as shown in Figure 5 30 FIGURE 5 30 Step Tip Example 1 QI e i oc gt e e When the mouse is not positioned over a particular symbol area the Step Tip displays the currently trained Layout Characters or just the name of the OCVFont Tool when it is not trained as shown in Figure 5 31 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 43 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 31 Step Tip Example 2 a eS AAT 387A901 When the OCVFont Tool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shi
318. mera Type to match the Smart Camera currently connected to Camera 1 on the I PAK HE change Trigger Acquire Method to Continuous as shown in Figure 2 28 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 25 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials FIGURE 2 28 Product Settings Dialog Box Cameras Tab MyHawkEye_ 1600T amera ype HE1600TS 648x494 Trigger Acquire Method Continuous Trigger 1 0 none v Trigger Polarity High to Low Lighting On Strobe Power Strobe Exposure Time micro secs j 6000 Camera Button Text M uHavkEye_15 T 11 Click Next This displays the Product Settings dialog box Data Valid tab as shown in Figure 2 29 FIGURE 2 29 Product Settings Dialog Box Data Valid Tab MyHawkEye_1600T Data Valid Duration ms p j 0 12 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the Product Setting dialog box I O tab as shown in Figure 2 30 2 26 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 30 Product Settings I O Tab 8 Point IO Board N Fixed I0 Points 1 in Tigger Camee SSC 2 oH ia TT Z sO 2 U e 5 jm LL lt x a Q O a if gt M General Purpose ID Points 2 fou Jinspecton Passed i 3 fou z JOvenmCamerat CC J lu i 13 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings d
319. n Click Approve to complete the process see Figure 5 11 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 13 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 11 OC VFont Tool Training Completed duct MICROSCAN fg Prot Pesan i PS20807 20 AM Change Product Train and Tryout Statistics and Data Advanced Settings i Next Tool A 3 P Zoom ln Try Tool Font Exit Training AutoStep Previous Next Camera Settings Options Acquire Live Zoom Out Ty All Editor to Main Setup Inspection1 Snapshot OCVFont Tool Wat Step EXPIRATION DATE 5 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts Remove Symbol Dialog FIGURE 5 12 Remove Symbol Dialog Box Remove Symbol X C TIZ Im gt o 0 Remove Symbol Done The Remove Symbol dialog box deletes symbols from the Custom Properties selected font By selecting a symbol name from the list and clicking Remove Symbol you are able to remove the selected symbol from the font Click Done to return to the Custom Properties Main dialog box QI Automatic Font Selection amp Scaling Dialog FIGURE 5 13 Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Dialog Box Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Available Fonts symbols DefaultFont e ha oc gt e e _ CC O 7 gt J 00 1 Save AutoFont Scale Scaled Font Help gt gt Done Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 15 Ch
320. n occur 5 104 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCV Tips OCV Tips The OCV tools found in I PAK HE have many settings and adjustments to allow for maximum flexibility However most applications require attention to only a few of these settings and adjustments OCVFont e ID Test Determination Pct Lowering the default value of 85 to 80 or 75 causes more characters to be flagged as similar Layout Step e Automatic Segmentation By default this property is off which allows the font library creation box to be sized manually around each character as it is entered into the library I PAK HE is designed such that you perform this individual training of characters to activate runtime ID checking of special characters like O 0 B 8 D etc ID checking requires that these symbol boxes be the same size QI Note Whenever possible use the same size box to train all font library characters You can enable the automatic segmentation property and I PAK HE automatically locates and places a box around all characters in the FOV DefaultSymbol Final Residue Limit Increasing the default value of 15 to a higher number allows characters to vary more and still be accepted Increasing this value has a gradual effect p i tez oc gt e e e Max Flaw Size Increasing the default value of 1 pixel to a higher value allows characters to vary more and still be acce
321. n send the inspection string above e lt sp gt is a space character which is the separator between symbol names e lt er gt isa decimal 13 e lt If gt is a decimal 10 Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command An extended feature of the OC VFont Tool is the ability to enter a new data string Layout String during Run Mode This allows an automated Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command from an external RS 232 device or an external Ethernet device After training all the symbols in the OC VFont and training an OC VFont Tool you can send a new string to inspect during Run Mode Setup Notes amp Precautions e You must stop triggering before sending a new inspect string e You must stop triggering and not restart it before Runmode IO is active e A maximum of one 1 input string is allowed in a single transmission The new string must have the same number of characters as the original layout string and the character positions must be the same The characters must all be the same width The character that the AutoFind uses cannot be substituted This means that there must be at least one character in the string that never changes RS 232 Input of Layout String RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Usage The RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT syntax requires user selectable tool names as input rather than symbol tool names When there are multiple OC VFont Tools Barcode Tools Data Matrix Tools or OCRTrainable Font Tools in the product definition and o
322. n fails the Train button becomes red and the ROI displays a dashed line e Assisted Training If the normal training method fails to work enable Assisted Learn on the properties page Adjust the position of the corners of the Data Matrix Tool shape over the Data Matrix to be trained No of Matrix Rows No of Matrix Columns and Matrix Polarity must be set correctly before clicking Train as shown in Figure 4 7 The remainder of the properties should be set to default values c o G6 F 70 15 FIGURE 4 7 Assisted Training Data Matrix Tool Train ROI Assisted Learn ROI Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 33 Chapter Results Automatic Identification No Training The Data Matrix tool can operate without training which will allow a much wider range of Data Matrix codes to be successfully located and decoded Error Code Reported errors encountered when locating decoding calibrating or verifying see Table 4 5 Data Matrix Error Messages on page 4 40 The least significant digits of reported Error Messages may be interpreted with the information in the table Status The Data Matrix Tool status is true when a Data Matrix is found and decoded and the decoded string matches the Match String when Match String Enable is enabled Text The decoded string found in the Data Matrix Center Point X Y location of the center of the Data Matrix Angle The rotation
323. ndRotated is used in the same way that the Template Find step is used You will be provided with two ROIs The first ROI represents the template you wish to train on e The second ROI represents the search area the area within which you will search for the template You must train this step before you can use it Insert a Custom Vision tool into your Job and then select the Find Rotated script You should see two ROIs in your image that look something like the ones in Figure D 10 and Figure D 11 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool FIGURE D 10 Two ROIs Template ROI i 2A0693 T AND 9811 AA CHO3980 KOREA O Unfortunately the ROIs are not labeled so it is confusing to understand which of the ROIs is used for the Template and which is used for the search area We have labeled the ROIs in Figure D 10 If we wanted to train the tool to find the KOREA text in our sample image we would position the ROIs like the ones in Figure D 11 2 2 FS Fc OR hat a Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 15 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques FIGURE D 11 Positioning ROIs to Find KOREA Custem tsion Tool 231 002700 L2A0693 NND 9811 AA CHOS9R0 Press the Train button to train the template Description The FindRotated script will search for the trained template by searching over a specified range
324. ne or more of the tools is not inserted directly into the Snapshot step the RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT 5 90 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command Syntax described above may be ambiguous In order to ensure that PAK HE uses the correct tool for the setting the Layout String or Match String the tools must be given unique names when the product definition is being created and or edited RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax For each FontTool in the Inspection Job the RS 232 CHANGELAY OUT command can be used to input the Learn Layout string as shown in Table 5 2 By default the colon is the string delimiter The CHANGELAYOUT command can also be used to change the match string of a Barcode Tool Data Matrix Tool or OCRTrainable Font Tool TABLE 5 2 RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool1 2003 02 Comment Input String for Camera 1 s Font Tool 1 Date CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool2 251250430999 CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool1 2003 02 Input String for Camera 1 s Font Tool 2 Lot Code Input String for Camera 2 s Font Tool 1 Date QI CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool2 251250430999 For each good data string received I PAK HE acknowledges the input with the following OK lt EOT gt Input Str
325. nfigure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Add a New User r Define New User UserName n effrey Password C Operator C Supervisor Security Access Level Programmer Vv User Has Signature T raining Authority can approve training Reason for Change New Hire 3 11 2003 OK Cancel e Restore A User Account The I PAK Administrator can restore a suspended user s account via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your former employees returns to the company FIGURE 3 12 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Restore a User Account Restore a User Account Enter the existing user name then assign a new password and access rights UserName E adUser New poeeme Password Operator Security Access Level Supervisor Programmer al User Bas sianaturezirammg Authonty Gan approve tanita Reason for Change User Came Back to Dept OK Cancel 3 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions e Reset a Users Password The I PAK Administrator can reset a users s password via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your employees forgets his or her password FIGURE 3 13 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Reset a User s Password Reset a User s Password UserName Jeffrey New Password pemes Re Type Password Pek TT Reason for Change User Forgot his password after vacatior OK Cancel e Display Login Violations T
326. nfigure the Input and Output Channel and contains the following buttons e R S 232 on page 6 64 e Ethernet TCP IP on page 6 66 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 63 Chapter Setup Mode Reference RS 232 After you click on this button the Configure Communication dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 45 You can use the defaults or customize your Communications ports FIGURE 6 45 Configure Communication Dialog Box RS 232 Settings Configure Communication J x m R5232 Settings Comm Port 1 Comm Port 2 Baud Rate 9600 bd Parity None 7 Comm Port 2 not available Data Bits ja gt j Stop Bits hoo gt j Timeout Seconds j s Field Delimiter Char Protocol PAK Selectable Main Porting Display Changeover Strings Main Comm Port 1 2 Cancel I PAK HE supports two RS 232 ports They must be configured as COM1 and COM2 If a COM Port is already used by another program it is displayed inside the frame of the port COM Port x used by another program or not available and the Input fields are hidden see Figure 6 46 on page 6 66 If a COM Port is not available Hardware it is displayed inside the frame of the port COM Port x used by another program or not available and the Input fields are hidden see Figure 6 46 on page 6 66 This dialog box is driven by the type of Protocol bei
327. ng an error message is displayed as shown in Figure 5 66 and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain FIGURE 5 66 Match String Error Message Wrong Number of Symbols External Input of Match String x Incorrect Number of Input Symbol Names Once all lines of input are received successfully I PAK HE checks for mismatches in the string which were noted earlier In the event of a mismatch I PAK HE displays the message Mismatch Strings Are Different and performs the selected Mismatch Action FIGURE 5 67 Mismatch Error Message Mismatch Strings Are Different If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Use Input String the I PAK HE displays the message Using Input String and uses the input string as the inspection string QI FIGURE 5 68 Mismatch Action Using Input String Message Using Input String If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Use Learned String the I PAK HE displays the message Using Learned String and ignores the input string The string found during training is then set as the inspection string e ha oc gt e e FIGURE 5 69 Mismatch Action Using Learned String Message Using Learned String Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 87 Chapter OCV Reference If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Retry by Learning the I PAK HE displays the message R
328. ng used 6 64 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings e Protocol Defines which RS 232 protocol scheme is used I PAK HE Enclosure Standard This is the default it means that RS 232 COM Port is used for all RS 232 Communications When this protocol is used you cannot use the other ports or change their settings I PAK HE Selectable Main Port I PAK HE expects the RS 232 communications to be made through the COM Port indicated by the Main COM Port item on the RS 232 Configuration screen e RS 232 Settings You can define the RS 232 Settings as follows Baud Rate Default of 9600 Range is 110 to 115200 Parity Default of None Range includes None Even Odd Data Bits Default of 8 Range includes 4 5 6 7 8 Stop Bits Default of 1 Range includes 1 1 5 2 Timeout Seconds Default of 15 seconds Range is to 99 Field Delimiter Char Default of Range of and Main Comm Port This setting selects between the two available COM Ports in I PAK HE This setting can only be selected when the Protocol is set to I PAK HE Selectable Main Port Default Comm Port 1 Range 1 to 2 O Lo e 9 c o 25 52 Or de Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 65 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 46 Configure Communication Dialog Box RS 232 Settings Configure Communication xj RS232 Settings Comm Port
329. nt on page 5 21 Training the OCVFont Tool First to train the OC VFont Tool the Custom Properties dialog box must be closed If changes have not been saved you are asked whether the changes should be saved e Click Yes to save changes e Click No to lose any changes that were made To train the OC VFont Tool the tool shape must be placed around the characters that are going to be inspected 5 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Custom Properties Create Modify OCV Fonts FIGURE 5 10 Tool Shape Placed Around Characters Date Time C t Product A Level M I CROSCA Ta wa Perae 11 19 2008 07 26 AM xA Next Tool c z Zoomin Try Tool Font Exit Training n Previous Newt Camera Settings SPH Aequre Live Boon Dut Tyan All Editor to Main Setup Inspection Snapshot m OCVFont Tool Wel Step EXPIRATION DATE r ocvri Tod 4 O1 Click Tool Settings to display the OCVFont Tool s properties page Clicking on the LayoutStep tab in the properties page will display all properties for the LayoutStep The correct font needs to be selected from the Selected Font datum s list of available fonts e i oc gt e e Clicking Train causes the tool to find all characters within the ROI that are trained as symbols in the selected font The tool sets up its inspection Layout and is then ready to ru
330. ntless Tool Wait Step Camera 1 Click OK e Ifyou are finished adding tools to the product click OK A screen similar to the one in Figure 6 36 is displayed If you want to add more tools right click on Acquire or the last tool you entered to re display the Insert A Step dialog box Continue adding tools as needed When you are finished adding tools to the product click OK FIGURE 6 36 Create a Product Save Product Save Product Product Directory Available Products Product Description sample Job Created Friday June 27 2008 12 33 58 PM O r Product File Name j o e BES c o 25 52 Or d9 Cancel The Programmer can add additional Inspections by right clicking on the Device step Save Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 49 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Right clicking on the Acquire step results in the Insert A Step dialog box being displayed This dialog box displays the names of steps that can be inserted into an Acquire step Once a Device Inspection or Snapshot block has been inserted it can be changed by right clicking on it Left clicking on a primary tool deletes all secondary tools Right clicking on a tool button such as the Barcode Tool shown in Figure 6 34 displays the Insert A Step dialog box with all possible vision tools The Programmer selects a tool and clicks on Insert Before Insert After or Insert Into Clicking OK causes an Insert In
331. nts OCVFont 5 21 Creating FontSymbols 5 21 OCVFont Tab 5 23 LayoutStep Tab 5 24 AutoThreshold Tab 5 25 ComputePolarity Tab 5 26 DefaultSymb Tab 5 27 FontSymbol 5 27 AutoFind 5 35 Training 5 36 OCVFont Tool 5 37 Training 5 37 Inspection 5 37 Step Tip 5 43 OCVRuntimeTool 5 45 Training 5 46 Inspection 5 46 Step Tips 5 52 OCVFontless Tool 5 55 Training 5 55 Inspection 5 55 Step Tips 5 65 OCVSymbolStep 5 67 Substitute Ignore 5 75 Character Substitution 5 77 Ignoring a Character 5 78 Finishing Up 5 78 Keyboard Input of Match String 5 78 Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String 5 78 OCVFont Tool amp OCVRuntimeTool Training 5 79 Keyboard Input Protocol 5 82 Inspection String Protocol 5 82 External Input of Match String 5 82 Enabling External Input of Match String 5 82 External Input of Match String Checkbox 5 83 Match String Mismatch Action 5 84 Transmit Final Layout String 5 84 OCVFont Tool amp OCVRuntimeTool Training 5 84 Transmit Final Inspection String 5 88 External Input of Match String Protocol 5 89 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual ix Contents Header Line Protocol 5 89 Input Line Protocol 5 89 Input amp Output Inspection String Protocol 5 89 Transmit Final Layout String Protocol 5 89 Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command 5 90 Setup Notes amp Precautions 5 90 RS 232 Input of Layout String 5 90 RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Usage 5 90 RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax 5 91 Il PAK HE User Interface 5 92 RS 232 ChangeLa
332. o Move and Size Tools continued Key s Resulting Action Shift Up Arrow Increases the height of the shape by one pixel Shift Down Arrow Decreases the height of the shape by one pixel Shift Right Arrow Increases the width of the shape by one pixel Shift Left Arrow Decreases the width of the shape by one pixel Control Up Arrow Moves shape up by one tenth of a pixel Control Down Arrow Moves shape down by one tenth of a pixel Control Right Arrow Moves shape to the right by one tenth of a pixel Control Left Arrow Moves shape to the left by one tenth of a pixel Control F Flips shape by 180 if shape is rotatable Control L Rotates shape one tenth of a degree to the left counter clockwise if shape is rotatable Control R Rotates shape one tenth of a degree to the right clockwise if shape is rotatable Control 0 Rotates shape to exactly 0 A Visionscape I PAK HE Product In the Visionscape I PAK HE user interface a combination of tools and steps written to accomplish a particular inspection on a give product is referred to as a Product or Job These product definitions are stored on the PC s hard drive in a subdirectory where you installed I PAK HE software called Jobs For example if you install the I PAK HE software in C Vscape then when you first run I PAK HE it automatically creates th
333. o report contrast in calibrated units and entered before calibration is attempted Cell Unit Report The Units that will be used for the reporting of cell size and symbol height and width These are Pixels or Mils Mils may be used if the value of the Calibration Cell Unit is available following a successful calibration Calibration Cell Unit This value is returned from a Data Matrix tool calibration that is the multiplier 100 to convert pixels to mils Aperture Sets the synthetic aperture size in mils Default 0 for AUTO Range 4 to 20 Target Contrast The contrast value of the calibration standard used with the Data Matrix tool to generate the calibration parameters Normal Training Place the ROI around the Data Matrix to be trained and click Train Ifa Data Matrix is successfully found and decoded the trainable set up parameters Match String Height Width No of Matrix Rows No of Matrix Columns Image Style Matrix Polarity ECC Level Cell Size Minimum Edge Strength Width to Height Ratio and Threshold Method will be taken from that Data Matrix as shown in Figure 4 6 The remainder of the parameters will be set to their defaults to ensure robust reading 4 32 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool FIGURE 4 6 Normal Training Data Matrix Tool When the tool is trained successfully the Train button will turn green and the ROI displays a solid line When the trai
334. of angles specified by the Maximum Search Angle and Minimum Search Angle datums It accomplishes this by warping the image contents inside of its ROI It will start by warping the image contents by the angle specified by the Minimum Search Angle datum and then it will run correlation on the result All qualifying match locations are recorded and then the angle is incremented by an amount equal to the value specified in the Angle Step Size datum and the image is warped and searched again It will continue in this fashion until it reaches the angle value specified in the Maximum Search Angle datum and then it will stop Then the script will scan through all of the qualifying template locations and choose the best one D 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool Settings FIGURE D 12 FindRotated Script CustomVision Tool Inputs 4 InputBuffer Snapshot1 SnapOutputBuffer EB Avail Package Scripts FindRotated Re Parse Package Script 2esiek to executer Ei Recreate Step Datums lt click to execute g Minimum Search Angle 15 000 g Maximum Search ngle 15 000 EZ Angle Step Size 5 000 E4 Accept Threshold 0 700 e Minimum Search Angle The minimum warp angle that the step should start searching at e Maximum Search Angle The maximum warp angle that the tep should search at g e Angle Step Size This is the amount in degrees that the angle should be incremented b
335. of the Data Matrix in degrees Number Found The number of Data Matrices found decoded or not Read Status Status indicates true when a Data Matrix is found and decoded regardless of whether the decoded string matches the match string value SymResults Contains detailed Data Matrix results Error Bits The number of invalid bits in the Data Matrix Decoded Image If Print Verification is set to anything other than None the following outputs will be produced regardless of the type of verification being performed Symbol Height The height of the Data Matrix in pixels if Cell Unit Report is set to Pixels If Cell Unit Report is set to Mils Calibrated is set On and Calibration Cell Unit is set to the results of a Data Matrix tool calibration Symbol Height will be reported in mils 100 Symbol Width The width of the Data Matrix in pixels if Cell Unit Report is set to Pixels If Cell Unit Report is set to Mils Calibrated is set On and 4 34 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Print Verification Types The section discusses the following Print Verification types AIM Data Matrix Tool Calibration Cell Unit is set to the results of a Data Matrix tool calibration Symbol Width will be reported in mils 100 Verification Details Provides a summary of verification results that is specific to the type of verification selected in Print Verification Verification Overall Grade Selects the overal
336. of the Snapshot step to Bit 0 a Blob Step to Bit 1 a Flaw Tool to Bit 2 and an OC VFontless Tool to Bit 3 If all of these Steps should pass the FailCode script will produce an output value of 0 If any of these Steps should fail the corresponding Bit in the output integer value will be set to a 1 So for example if the Blob tool and the OCVFontless tool should fail this would mean that bits 1 and 3 would be set to 1 producing an output value of 10 Any Bits that are left Unassigned are ignored and will not effect the output value Settings e BitO Bit31 Each of these input datums can be connected to any Status Datum in the Job If the Status is False then the corresponding bit of the output word is set to 1 Results e Output Value This integer value holds the failure code The bits of this word correspond to the 32 input datum values g Custom Vision Tool The CustomVision Tool consists of an input image required optional input datums optional output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the CustomVision Tool CustomVision Tools can perform vision operations because they require a buffer to be input to the Perl Package Script 7 Qn FS W J Ec S O o ha a The Custom Vision Tool supports the following scripts e none
337. ogram information see Figure 4 29 c B To 5 S lt 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 69 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 4 28 Results of Show Histogram for a Character Font Char m 0 002 0 003 0 005 0 006 0 008 0 009 0 011 0 012 0 014 0 015 Bin Samples Total 5 Message FIGURE 4 29 Results of Show Font Histogram EA Font Char lo z 0 400 H N 5 pans 1 2 3 4 5 6 Samples MaxDist Message EE DEE ee 4 70 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool Delete Training amp Remove from Font The Delete Training feature removes all trained samples for a character from the font This feature is useful if a particular character should be retrained by itself You will be prompted regarding deleting all samples for a character Remove from Font deletes all training for a character and removes it completely from the font You will be prompted regarding excluding the character from the font Training Tips The camera field of view FOV should be configured so that the characters read by the OCRTrainableFont tool have a character width of 25 pixels or larger e Given an initial set of sample parts divided the samples into two subsets Use one subset for training and the other subset for reading tests e For OCRTrainableFont the image background should be relatively free of noise e Be certain to train using samples o
338. ol 5 47 data valid 6 58 input mask 5 62 input string 5 84 5 87 6 89 learned string 5 84 5 87 6 89 onscreen keypad instead of pc keyboard 3 7 6 94 selected font on exit 5 8 wildcard in match string 6 26 UseCalibration D 10 User defined templates 5 36 interface 1 7 login 3 4 name default 21 cfr part 11 3 4 6 91 passwords 3 4 Vv Validation xvii Values Written to PC Registry 7 8 Verification aim print 4 35 dpm print 4 39 iaqg print 4 38 iso print 4 37 status lower threshold 4 15 4 31 upper threshold 4 15 4 31 Vertical 4 7 4 27 then horizontal 4 7 4 27 Viewing camera results 7 7 w Waiting for Input Match String Line N 5 85 Width 4 27 to height ratio 4 27 Wildcard Match Character 6 26 Index 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index Windows Explorer 6 97 Wizard Training Method 6 18 Z Zoom buttons displaying in run mode 7 6 hiding in run mode 7 6 in button train and tryout 6 23 out button train and tryout 6 23 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 19
339. om Properties dialog box The Automatic Segmentation setting can be found on the Layout Step property tab for the selected font Automatic segmentation training requires that the OCVFont shape be placed around all the characters in the image that are going to be added as FontSymbols in the OC VFont Then when Train Font is clicked a green box appears in the image over one of the characters A dialog box is displayed asking for a unique name for this symbol e Clicking Cancel aborts the training of this FontSymbol and ends the automatic segmentation training e Clicking Skip aborts the training of this FontSymbol and moves on to the next character in the image 5 22 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFont Only one example of a character needs to be trained When a unique name is entered and OK is clicked a FontSymbol is created and templates created from the ROI area of the image and default parameters are stored in that FontSymbol The green box changes to a red box and a new green box appears over the next character in the image This process continues until all characters in the image have been trained as FontSymbols and added to the OCVFont or the process is canceled OCVFont Tab When an OCVFont is selected in the Custom Properties dialog box the OCVFont tab displays the current settings for that OC VFont FIGURE 5 21 OC VFont Properties Page OC Font LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity Def
340. on page D 6 e Cylinder_UnWarp on page D 7 e Dynamic Binarize on page D 10 e FailCode on page D 14 e FindRotated on page D 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 5 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques none The none script is the default Perl Package Script used by a Custom Vision Tool when inserted into a Job This script has no functionality FIGURE D 3 The none Script Custom Step Avail Package Scripts hone Re Parse Package Script Recreate Step Datums e Avail Package Scripts This property allows selection of a Perl Package Script for the step to use You can select none Cylinder UnWarp on page D 7 Dynamic _Binarize on page D 10 FailCode on page D 14 FindRotated on page D 14 e Re Parse Package Script When clicked this button causes the package script to be parsed Whenever any changes to the script files are made this button needs to be clicked to make these changes take effect Note I PAK HE supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I PAK HE software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK HE e Recreate Step Datums When clicked this button causes the input and output datum lists in the step to be re created You only need to click this button when a datum is added removed or changed in the script
341. on value as a number from 0 00 to 1 00 to go along with the existing UnusedErrorCorrectionGrade IntDm OvalityGrade with values of 4 through 0 A B C D F for IAQG Verification DoubleDm Ovality value as a number from 0 0 to 100 0 for IAQG Verification StringDm ECCLevelResult as the decoded value translated to a string because the value returned by the decoder is more specific than the parameter value provided to the decoder as instructions e g AUTO could be used as setting while the decoded result might be ECC 200 StringDm VerificationType to report the selected verification type as a string instead of a number that required a translation 4 42 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool VerifyDetails VerifyDetails is a variant array of all verification results necessary to generate verification result reports for any DMR verification type The contents of this array and the enumerated position of values in the array are provided in Table 4 6 TABLE 4 6 Contents of VerifyDetails Text Symbolic Name Symbolic Current ISO Offset Offset italics Name Type AIM IAQG ISO Am DPM output 0 eVerType Verificatio VerType Datum Str x x x x x nType ing 1 1 eVeriStat Verificatio VeriStat Datum Int X X x x x n Status al 4 2 eOverallG Verificatio OverallGr Datum Int x x x x x rade n Overall ade A Grade m 3 eSymHei Symbol SymHeig Datum
342. only affects data sent out RS 232 and not what you see on the I PAK HE display Enable Failed Image Queue When you check Enable Failed Image Queue the Failed Image Queue button on the Camera View becomes active All images from inspections that fail that can be saved are saved to the Failed Image Queue The Failed Image Queue is lossy For more information see Show Hide Failed Image Queue on page 7 3 To save every failed image lossless see Save Images on page 6 33 Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Enables and disables default the saving of the failure queue images when you return to Setup Mode You can view a queue of the last 1 to 20 failures per Smart Camera When the user settable maximum number of images is reached a new failed image overwrites the image in the first image frame Only images that are successfully uploaded to the I PAK HE interface from the Smart Camera are entered into the queue Not all images get uploaded to the I PAK HE interface to avoid compromising inspection throughput For that reason when failures occur in rapid succession the failed images may not be entered into the queue 6 80 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings Number of Images In Queue Specifies the number of failed images to save in the Failed Image Queue Default 10 failed images Range to 20 failed images Using the Failed Image Queue at Runtime Failed Image Queue Button
343. ontless Tool Properties Page 9oe999ee99999e 000009000 000 0 99000606204 OLVFontless Tool AutoFind TwoPt Locator AutoThreshold ComputePolarity gjo LJ BI Fal Default Datum Order OCVFontless Tool Inputs T Use AutoFind g AutoFind Pin 1 Index g AutoFind Pin 2 Index g Min Symbol Size in pixels T Find Symbols That Touch ROI g Num of Border Spaces to Add E Symbol Sorting Sensitivity i Single OCY Symbol Step Te Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Te Apply Automatic Min Contrast ay Max Contrast Difference ay Allowed Thickening of Symbol g Allowed Thinning of Symbol Bay Individual Symbol Search X Hz Individual Symbol Search Y T Leaibility Only Te Test For Character Breaks T Enable Tryout Debug Info fay Tryout Debug Delay g Selected Symbol Group Group Properties Appear Here Apply Symbol Group Settings T Use Input Mask T Enable Mask Output fy Mask Number of Dilations E Graphics Level 3 1 999 20 B 1 Normal r rn T 100 0 0 5 3 3 ry e EI ra 2 H 2 C 1500 gt 1 e r Show ROI Only E Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 57 Chapter OCV Reference Use AutoFind Enables and disables the locator Switching between enabled and disabled requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up Default Enabled AutoFind Pin 1 Index Allows selection of the symbol posit
344. onts are selected in the OCRTrainableFont Tool Until Save Font is clicked font changes may be abandoned Close the OCRTF Training dialog box and click No when prompted to save changes Tips for Marking OCR Fonts Use either the numeral 0 or the letter O but not both If a human operator has trouble distinguishing characters quickly the vision system will also have difficulty Unlike machine readable codes such as Data Matrix OCR does not have built in error correction Misreads are possible For example 813 may be reported as B13 If possible include a checksum character in the printed text Results Status Set to true after a successful execution of the step Number of Characters Found Total number of character objects found whether or not they were successfully decoded Output String The set of characters found within the ROI placed in order from the top left most character and scanning to the right then down Characters that are found but not decoded will be represented by the character defined by Set Unknown Characters To Minimum Character Confidence The lowest match level of the characters successfully decoded Mean Character Confidence The mean match level of the characters successfully decoded This excludes the confidence level of any characters that were excluded by the Minimum Confidence parameter Maximum Character Confidence The highest match level of the characters succe
345. or more Fonts and reporting results including the string read and confidence levels for each character read e Training The tool allows the creation of new fonts andallows training and incremental training of existing fonts Theory of Operation When an OCRTrainableFont Tool is inserted into a Visionscape Job the settings that control the behavior of the Segment Agent and the FeatExtract Agent as well as the font parameter settings are available on the tool s property page From FrontRunner when an OCRTrainableFont Tool is present in a Job a custom interface can edit fonts for more information see OCR Font Training on page 4 56 The Show Custom Properties button brings up a user interface that can create a new font or incrementally train an existing font The settings on the property page can modify the way in which the OCRTrainableFont Tool functions If ROI Contains is set to Two or More Characters see the properties shown in Figure 4 8 If ROI Contains is set to Single Character see the properties shown in Figure 4 9 4 50 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 4 8 OCRTrainableFont Tool Properties Page Tool Settings amp zal Default Datum Order v OCRTrainableFont Tool Inputs 4F InputBuffer Te Match String Enable g Match String EB RO Contains EB Polarity TE Adaptive Thresholding g Threshold E Threshold Bias H
346. ors that occur are reported over RS 232 via a FAIL message to the host device These errors are also displayed in message boxes within I PAK HE For example when erroneous data bad data symbol not in layout too many symbols etc is received over RS 232 from a customer s host machine the ChangeLayout dialog box stays on up on the PAK HE Run Mode screen everything else from Run Mode is Disabled except for the ChangeLayout dialog box It shows you the recently input data tool name and new layout string 5 94 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command FIGURE 5 76 ChangeLayout RS 232 Error Status Run Mode Change Layout 0740_01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OC Font Tool WXZ 0740_01 Inspection Snapshot1 OCVFont Tool WZ Show Full Path J an Cancel FIGURE 5 77 ChangeLayout RS 232 Error Details QI Change Layout 0740_01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCVFont Tool WXZ 0740_01 Inspection1 Snapshotl OCYFont Tool WZ e hn oc gt e e Show Full Path oo n Cancel You MUST take action by clicking the Cancel button before I PAK HE will resume In this bad data sent state I PAK HE is declared off line the error message is displayed along with the exact data input and the tools Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 95 Chapter OCV Reference Note The Cancel button makes you r
347. ou go to Run Mode e Show Hide Failed Image Queue The Failed Image Queue is lossy meaning I PAK HE saves as many failed images as it can It is possible that some failed images will not be saved to the Failed Image Queue To save failed images with a lossless connection see Save Images on page 6 33 Click this button Figure 7 3 to display the Failed Image Queue Note The button becomes active after the first failed image Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 3 Chapter r Run Mode Reference FIGURE 7 3 Show Hide Failed Image Queue E n dla ei sample data matrix d Change Lot You can display up to 20 failed images default is 10 per Smart Camera Set the number of images in the queue using Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results gt Number of Images in Queue for more information about Number of Images in Queue see System Settings Training and Results Tab on page 6 71 Use the left and right arrow buttons Figure 7 4 to cycle through the failed images FIGURE 7 4 Failed Image Queue Previous amp Next Image Date Time 13 30 59 9 Jul 7 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Run Mode Window Ni Notice the counters and arrow buttons in the two images below 5358 Pass L ES 10 10 Date Time 12 20 48 7 Aug _ Indicates the Newest and Last Failed Image is Displayed ha
348. ough a software system is capable of loading a Job that was created for any Visionscape Device in this version of I PAK HE the software system simulates a HawkEye 1600T only Therefore creating a Job for a Software System is the same as creating a Job for a HawkEye 1600T A user should be able to create a Job on a notebook PC using a software system for instance and then transfer that Job to a PC connected to a HawkEye and load and run that Job with little to no modifications There are a few points that you should understand however when creating Jobs on a software system e The Camera Definitions for the HawkEye 1600TS standard res and the HawkEye 1600TH Hi res will be the only camera definitions listed Choose the appropriate camdef that matches the hardware you will be using By default the Acquire Tool is programmed to Load Images from File as there is no digitizer available on a Software System Image List is empty originally and must be populated also When loaded on a physical device you must change the Acquire mode to Acquire from Camera to enable acquisition from the device s CCD sensor e Your Job will be created to use physical IO so you will not be able to test the IO when running on the software system as it does not support physical IO If you wish to test IO you must change your IO assignments to use Virtual IO but if you do remember to change them back to physical when moving your Job to the actual device
349. ow similar they are When FontSymbols are found to be very similar tests for determining the presence of the correct symbol are set up and stored with the FontSymbols These tests are only performed at runtime when Runtime ID Checking is enabled Note Microscan highly recommends that you do not use Automatic Segmentation that is leave its setting in its default position of Off and carefully use symbol boxes of equal size for all special characters like O 0 B 8 D and so on Default Enabled Enable Mask Output Enables and disables the creation and output of a mask at runtime This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Enabling this property increases inspection time Default Disabled Mask Number of Dilations Sets the number of expansions that are performed on the output mask This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Default 1 Graphics Level Sets up different levels of debug graphics at runtime The default Show ROI Only will only show the ROI boxes associated with the OCVRuntimeTool and the characters being inspected green for passed red for failed When set to Show None no graphics are shown at runtime When set to Show Basic Graphics a number indicating the symbol s position in t
350. ox you ll notice the Archive Restore button Click this button to display the Job Archive dialog box as shown in Figure 6 12 6 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Change Product FIGURE 6 12 Job Archive Dialog Box Archive Example Job Archive Type Current Jobs Archived Jobs castingdmdoal tif castingdmobliquering tif castingwithdm tif chip01 tif lt Restore clipgood tif clipgood2 tif clipgood3 tif clipgood4 tif clipgood5 tif clinaood6 tif Select All In this Job Archive dialog box the left hand display shows the Jobs from the current I Pak_HE Jobs folder while the right hand display shows the Jobs from the archival path In this example we used a CDR for the archival path You must ready the CD media before you can begin using it O Note You ll always need to archive and restore both the avp and avpsys files for a product to run in I PAK HE To archive a Job from the Current Jobs folder to the Archived Jobs click on the Job name and its associated avpsys file from the left hand list Then click Save gt to copy those files onto the archival path In this case it copies the files from the I Pak_HE Jobs directory to the CDR To select more than one file at a time hold the Ctrl key while clicking file names Zo rom c 20 25 52 Or d9 To restore a Job from the Archived Jobs to the Current Jobs folder simply click on the Job name and its assoc
351. p file I DAK HE uses an avp file and an avpsys file as well to store many other details about its Job If the Programmer tries to use a FrontRunner Job in I PAK 6 50 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings HE it posts an error message saying that it cannot find the associated avpsys file e The tool limit for insertion in the flowchart view of product creation is six primary tools and six secondary tools in each parent tool If the Programmer needs more than these six tools he or she can click Advanced Settings and then click Edit Tool Set From here add more tools as needed Note You can print the Product Creation Flow Chart When you insert a tool in I PAK HE I PAK HE automatically inserts a tool specified Fail Counter into the Job At Runtime this Fail Counter tracks and records when that tool fails Note When you delete a tool in I PAK HE you need to delete its associated Fail Counter since this is not done for you e IL PAK HE allows you to insert a Custom Step or CustomVision Tool anywhere in a Product Definition The Custom Step consists of optional input datums optional output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the Custom Step Custom Steps cannot perform vision operations because they do not allow for a buffer to b
352. p or Wizard Training Method The AutoStep or Wizard method of training walks the Supervisor or Programmer through each step of the training sequence Note The I PAK HE interface uses the term AutoStep rather than Wizard By default AutoStep training is invoked automatically when you first enter this window but can be changed via a system setting For more information see AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout on page 6 84 Image The image will display the last runtime or acquired image associated with that snapshot with the tool graphics superimposed The Programmer Supervisor is required to train each tool and then click Next to proceed to the next tool Job View The data on the left hand side of the display is your Job As you successfully train each tool in your Job a green check mark appears next to each tool name With AutoStep off you can click directly on a tool in this view for retraining or click on its shape in the image window Note Some steps like the Inspection step update its status after all of the tools in that Inspection have completed This means that the Inspection step could diplay ared X until the last tool has been trained and then would change to a green check mark 6 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Completing AutoStep Mode When all tools have been trained the Next button on the toolbar changes to a Finish button Then the Programm
353. pectively for all the tools in the Job available for Lot ChangeOver It will display five strings at a time Use the Next and Previous buttons to display all the tools in the Job FIGURE 6 10 Lot ChangeOver Edit Code Lot ChangeOver Tool Path 504160072 Inspection Snapshot My OCVFont Tool 1 SEP2008 Edit Code Change This Tool s Code Change all Tool s Code 5 QA1800T2 Inspection1 Snapshot1 My OCVFont Tool 2 6MA0282 Edit Code Change This Tool s Code Change all Tools Code Cancel Note OCVFont Tool is the default name assigned to an OCVFont Tool To avoid confusion on the preceding screen you can change this name by going to Advanced gt Edit Tool Set and typing another name in the Job tree 6 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Change Product FIGURE 6 11 Lot ChangeOver Complete Lot ChangeOver Tool Path SQA1600T 2 Inspection1 Snapshot1 My OC Font Tool 1 SEP2SEP Edit Code QA41600T2 Inspection Snapshotl My OCVFont Tool2 GMAN282 Edit Code Ct JV Show Full Path Previou Nex Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver If you want to change a Code simply click Edit Code for the specific tool s This allows you to edit the contents of the match or layout string This also enables the Change this Tool s Code and the Change all Tool s Code buttons When you want to just change one match or layout string at a time edit th
354. pports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I PAK HE software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK HE Il PAK HE Custom Step amp CustomVision Tool I PAK HE software allows a Custom Step or CustomVision Tool to be inserted anywhere in a Product Definition The CustomVision Tool has a built in Input Datum for accessing a buffer Input Buffer on which to perform a vision operation The Custom Step does not support an Input Buffer and can only be used for non vision operations 7 Q FS W J Ec S O o hat a Properties Pages Each Perl Package Script has a unique Properties Page You can change the values of the input datums required by the script Every script results in a minimum set of common properties These properties are the only properties of the none script Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 1 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques Custom Step The Custom Step consists of optional input datums optional output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the Custom Step Custom Steps cannot perform vision operations because they do not allow for a buffer to be input to the Perl Package Script The Custom Step supports the following scripts e
355. pted Increasing this value has a rapid effect This number should not be set greater than 2 OCVRuntimeTool The OCVRuntimeTool is the vision step that actually performs the inspection of a code Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 105 Chapter OCV Reference e Individual Symbol Search X Increasing these values allows individual characters to move more in relation to one another e Individual Symbol Search Y Increasing these values allows individual characters to move more in relation to one another Layout Step e Allowed Overlap During Read Increasing this value from the default value of 5 allows characters to be identified during the train step when their character boxes overlap e Min Read Match Decreasing the 65 default value allows characters to be identified at train time when they vary significantly from what was trained into the font library Converting Jobs with Embedded OCVFonts FIGURE 5 85 Converting Jobs with Embedded OC VFonts Change Product Current Product Test2 Available Products Product Description OldFonttoolJob A Job Created Mittwoch 22 August 2007 08 20 38 mySample Change Lot Cancel Jobs created with Version 2 3 or earlier that contain font based OCV tools are updated to use the new OCVFont method when those Jobs are read into I PAK HE When the old Job is read in any OCVFonts found in an existing 5 106 Visionscape I Pak HE User Man
356. r you can review this list of already created Supervisor as long as long as you are a Supervisor or Programmer An Operator cannot access this menu item You are restricted in viewing the list of other users that are at or below your security level Go e Display Operators This command enables the I PAK Administrator to see all the user accounts that have a security access of Operator As a user you can review this list of already created Operators as long as you are an Operator e Change Your Password You can change your own password by clicking this button You will be asked to enter your password twice to verify that the password is correct An I PAK Administrator can also use this menu to change his or her I PAK Administrator password Yen _ q A oc L O a N e Suspend An Existing User The I PAK Administrator can suspend an existing user s account via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your employees leaves the company FIGURE 3 10 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Suspend an Existing User Suspend an Existing User UserName Badu ser Are You Sure geseosesen C No amp Yes Reason for Change jU ser left department OK Cancel Add a New User The I PAK Administrator can create new accounts This might be useful when a new employee joins your company Visionscape J Pak HE User Manual 3 15 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 FIGURE 3 11 Co
357. r Interface In order to use Ethernet Input of Layout String you must set the Input Channel and Output Channel to Ethernet in the System Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 5 80 FIGURE 5 80 System Settings Ethernet Selection Input Channel Ethernet Output Channel Configure RES Ethernet TCP IP By default while in Run Mode I PAK HE listens for input through Ethernet Once data has started to be received I PAK HE exits Run Mode changes the string then returns to Run Mode The Run Mode output is asserted if enabled once I PAK HE is ready to receive triggers Ethernet ChangeLayout Error Debug Any errors that occur are reported over Ethernet via a FAIL message to the host device These errors are also displayed in message boxes within I PAK HE For example when erroneous data bad data symbol not in layout too many symbols etc is received over Ethernet from a user s host machine the ChangeLayout dialog box stays up on the I PAK HE Run Mode screen everything else from Run Mode is Disabled except for the ChangeLayout dialog box It shows you the recently input data tool name and new layout string 5 100 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command FIGURE 5 81 ChangeLayout Error Status Run Mode Change Layout 0740_01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCV Font Tool WXYZWXYZ 0740_01 Inspection Snapshot1 OCVFont Tool WHY
358. r implied including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and Technical support questions may be directed to helpdesk microscan com Register your product with Microscan www microscan com register fitness for a particular purpose Microscan Systems Inc does not warrant that the functions contained in the product will meet any requirements or needs purchaser may have or that the product will operate error free or in an uninterrupted fashion or that any defects or errors in the product will be corrected or that the product is compatible with any particular machinery Limitation of Liability In no event shall Microscan Systems Inc be liable to you or any third party for any special incidental or consequential damages including without limitation indirect special punitive or exemplary damages for loss of business loss of profits business interruption or loss of business information whether in contract tort or otherwise even if Microscan Systems Inc has been advised of the possibility of such damages Microscan Systems Inc s aggregate liability with respect to its obligations under this warranty or otherwise with respect to the product and documentation or otherwise shall not exceed the amount paid by you for the product and documentation Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion may
359. r she is not a Programmer not a Supervisor and not an Operator I PAK Administrator User Name PakAdmin I PAK Administrator Password 999999 The I PAK Administrator password is stored in the PC s registry settings and is changeable through the I PAK HE interface Note The I PAK Administrator should be careful not to forget his or her password as it is very difficult to recover the I PAK Administrator password You will need to contact Microscan to recover a forgotten I PAK Administrator password The I PAK Administrator should create a user account with the Programmer security level right away so that the Vision System Settings can be adjusted when necessary When an I PAK Administrator creates a user account a listing of user names encrypted user passwords and access levelswill be created When entering Setup Mode from Run Mode you will have to enter a user name and user password via the I PAK HE keyboard or a Login dialog box Based on the user name and password entered the appropriate access level will be granted during Setup Mode At all times the current access level is clearly displayed Figure 3 3 An active user reverts back to Operator mode after the user defined no activity limit is reached 3 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Customer Responsibilities FIGURE 3 3 Access Level in Setup Mode amp Run Mode Setup x wd MICROSCAN 2er Produet oO Visionscape I PAK HE Run V
360. rall grade for each of the 10 scans This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Final Grade Final composite grade derived from the 10 Scan Grades This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Final Grade Score Final score derived from the 10 Scans This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Reported value is 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 15 Chapter Automatic Identification One X Dim The size of the smallest bar in pixels This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Reported value is 10 Ratio 0 The widest bar to 1X dimension This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Ratio 1 The next widest bar to 1X dimension This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Ratio 2 The smallest widest bar to 1X dimension This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Verification Details A summary of the grades and values of all parameters for each of the 10 scans This is only available when Print Verification is set to ANSI Note The reported Modulation Defects and Decodability are 100 Min Reflectance reported value is 10 Sym Results A summary of locator and decoder statistics such as angle roi and symbol type I O Summary Barcode Tool provides a I O summary in the Status Bar located at the bottom of the FrontRunner window Inp
361. rds for each device every time you start up and every time you change products Note The user name and password used to take control of the Smart Camera has nothing to do with the user names and passwords used by I PAK HE itself when using 21 CFR Part 11 do not confuse them Once I PAK HE has discovered and taken control of each of the devices used by the Product the Job is downloaded to each Smart Camera all inspections are started and the I PAK HE interface goes into Run Mode Running I PAK HE for the First Time When you run I PAK HE for the first time you will be prompted to select a Smart Camera as described above Then I PAK HE will create a sample Job Sample avp for you and download it to the Smart Camera This is an example or a sample of a job you might run at your production plant This sample job does not use live images from the camera Instead it displays an image file sample tif from the PC s hard drive Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 1 11 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection FIGURE 1 1 Sample Job at First Time Startup MICROSCAN Lis egal MyHawhLye_ 16001 MyHawk ye _1600T View auto fit EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2008 6MA0282 MyMawkiye 16007 1 14 2009 250 PM Sample avp contains a default vision tool setup that includes an Inspection a Snapshot using Camera in continuous mode a 100 ms Wait Step and a Fontless Tool All tools are untrained meaning that this
362. re 6 41 Figure 6 42 and Figure 6 43 The Product Settings dialog box allows the Programmer to define the Triggering Method Data Valid Camera button identifiers and I O These are Programmer level functions Cameras Tab This tab allows you to specify on a per camera basis the Trigger method Lighting and Exposure Settings and Camera Button Text FIGURE 6 41 Product Settings Dialog Box Cameras Tab MyHawkEye_1600T Camera Type HE1 BOOTS 648x494 Trigger Acquire Method I 70 Triggered Trigger 1 0 Digital l 1 Trigger Polarity High gt Low bd Lighting On Strobe Power Strobe Exposure Time micro secs j 6000 Camera Button Text M yHawkEye_16007T e Camera Type This will be HE1600T Trigger Acquire Method The Programmer can select either of these methods TO Triggered Default Select this option when you want your inspections to run only after an external trigger signal has been received on a pre defined Digital Input point on the IO board Note When I O Triggered is selected the Trigger I O option is displayed with a default of Digital I O1 When I O Triggered is not selected Trigger I O is grayed out disabled 6 56 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings Continuous When you select this option your inspections will run in a continuous loop and will not wait for a trigger signal For debug purposes only and never a Prod
363. rea of the prototype itself is passable When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Default 15 0 meaning a 15 variation is acceptable Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pixel count in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default 15 of the symbol size Range 0 to symbol size QI The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection Note Determining the proper value for Final Residue Limit is a subjective decision the higher the quality of the character symbol desired the lower the Final Residue Limit should be p i oc gt e e e Final Residue Max Blob Size Used when Final Residue Method is set to Max Residue Blob or Both A blob analysis is performed on the residue image and the largest blob is found If this blob has an area that is greater than the value of this property the symbol fails the inspection Default 10 Range to 512 e Maximum Flaw Size Represents the maximum width in pixels that a discrepancy is allowed to be before it is considered objectionable The larger the number assigned the larger a discrepancy is allowed before causing the symbol inspection to fail Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 31
364. rings Are Different QI If all lines of input are received successfully I PAK HE displays a message as shown in Figure 5 58 e i oc gt e e FIGURE 5 58 Successful Match String Input Message Jii iii ER ERA RR RRA Successful Input When a string is successfully input the layout is automatically approved and the training sequence ends Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 81 Chapter OCV Reference Keyboard Input Protocol The I PAK HE OCVFont Tool and OC VRuntimeTool uses a standard protocol in receiving the inspection string from you Inspection String Protocol The input inspection string is of the following form 1 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt lt sp gt 0 lt sp gt 2 The lt sp gt is a space character which is the separator between symbol names External Input of Match String Match String allows an external device computer etc to specify the intended inspection string for an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool External Input of Match String is accomplished by creating a communications handshake between I PAK HE and an external device The necessary information is sent from the external device to I PAK HE The communications can be accomplished through RS 232 or Ethernet Note Enabling Match String mode automatically disables the ignore and substitute character functionality of I PAK HE The OCVFontless Tool does not suppo
365. rn on page 3 19 Components I PAK HE s technical 21 CFR Part 11 compliancy has the following components I PAK HE Jobs are stored on the PC as binary files you cannot edit them except from within I PAK HE These Jobs are the vision applications recipes or step by step instructions that the vision system follows to inspect product Typically you would associate one Job per product being inspected and change or retrain the Date Lot Code or Expiration date while leaving everything else the same Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 1 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 I PAK HE s Audit Trail is a centralized chronological time stamped journal file of all I PAK HE activities from the automatic start up of I PAK HE as part of the PC Start Up items noting the version of I PAK HE software through user login attempts to every button pushed every retraining action every new layout string and Data Matrix match strings every alarm acknowledged and the Statistics entering and exiting Run Mode Inspection The Audit File records who makes a change and the reason for the change It is available for printout using Adobe Acrobat s PDF format another safeguard to prevent unauthorized modification of the Audit Trail from inside I PAK HE as part of the I PAK Administrator s role see The I PAK Administrator on page 3 4 I PAK HE s Configuration Files are an ASCII representation of the data contained on I PAK HE
366. roduct Dialog Box Save Product Product Directory M v_NASHUA dev vs370 prod ipak jobs Available Products Product Description ocvfonttool la Job Created Mittwoch 18 Juli 2007 14 00 23 Product File Name xx Type the Product File Name and click Save I PAK HE saves the current product name and Job to disk By default this button is not selected until you click on it The product description text can be up to 1000 characters This allows each product definition to have a unique description Note If you want to add a new line in the product description field you must press Ctrl Enter to have the new line appear if you press Enter by itself you will immediately save the product Note There is a special I PAK HE feature available for our advanced Programmers when using the Product Name ByPass When doing a Product ChangeOver the product named bypass avp only appears in the list if the current access level is Programmer This allows for customer specific Jobs to be run by Programmers For example the ByPass product could be set up to bypass the I PAK HE vision processing and allow a line to clear old product before beginning the inspection of new product Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 55 O Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or d9 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Product Settings Product Settings displays the Product Settings dialog box as shown in Figu
367. rogram Attempted login using password porgram 11 13 2002 09 00 49UserName operator Attempted login using password operator 11 13 2002 09 06 32UserName JaneDoe Attempted login using password JaneDoe e Display User Changes The I PAK Administrator can review the user change log via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 3 17 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 employees is constantly changing his or her password or you suspect a security breach FIGURE 3 15 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Display User Changes 7 24 2002 02 25 PM Successful Add New User for JoeProg with Security Level of Programmer 9 11 2002 10 15 4M Successful Add New User for programmer with Security Level of Programmer 0 30 2002 10 41 AM Successful Add New User for program with Security Level of Programmer 10 30 2002 11 11 4M Successful Add New User for joejoe with Security Level of Supervisor 10 30 2002 11 16 4M Successful Add New User for nosign with Security Level of Supervisor 10 30 2002 12 42 PM Successful Add New User for 1 with Security Level of Operator 11 04 2002 01 23 35 PM Unsuccessful Add New User for program User Already Exists in DataBase 11 04 2002 01 23 47 PM Unsuccessful Add New User for test Password Already In Use 11 04 2002 01 23 56 PM Unsuccessful Add New User for test Passwords Must be at least 6 Charac 11 04 2002 01 23 59 PM Successful Add New User for test with Security Level of
368. rs A AAM M A 1 5 10 Included Not In Font Included c oO a Es Z5 lt 3 When the mouse pointer rests over a character a tool tip pops up indicating the number of trained samples for the character In Figure 4 21 the tool tip shows that six samples have been trained for the character A 19 Defocus the lens slightly and repeat steps 11 18 A font should be trained using samples that vary in quality When fewer samples than desired are available the set of samples can be re used several times during training To re use the character set after the first round of training defocus the lens slightly to render the characters a bit fuzzy If the lens is not easily accessible use image processing to change the appearance of the characters This method simulates the variability expected in large sample sets of characters Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 65 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 4 22 Defocusing an Image Z y Sharp Focus Original Image 2 3 Defocused Simulate using MeanLP filter Thicker Characters Simulate using GrayMorph Dilate Dark 1 Thinner Characters Simulate using GrayMorph Erode Dark 1 Another alternative to image processing is adjusting the Edge Energy datum for the OCRTF step Changing this parameter is similar to changing focus to produce sharper or softer character edges 4 66 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual
369. rs Using the TEXT02 TIF image a sample OCVFont was trained by manually placing the training box over the characters All parameters were at the default values The characters L 2 A 0 6 9 3 were trained into the OCVFont Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 109 Chapter OCV Reference When the OCVRuntimeTool was trained the Sobel Edge Enhancement search buffer was the same as above example FIGURE 5 90 Contents of Buffer The Sobel Edge Enhancement templates and the resulting Match were FIGURE 5 91 Resulting Match 99 95 98 98 99 99 99 Comparing these templates to the search buffer you can see that the template characters more closely resemble those in the search area as reflected by the Match values By manually positioning the training boxes we were able to ensure that the proper amount of spacing was available for template training Conclusions e Microscan currently recommends that OC VFont training be performed using manual placement of the training box This is because the training box should be the same size over symbols that are similar in order for the Runtime ID Checking algorithms to work optimally The Automatic Segmentation cannot assure that the boxes around similar characters are the same size Using manual placement with the correct 1 2 pixel border will also help prevent the behavior described in this document e The A
370. rs button 3 15 programmers button 3 14 supervisors button 3 15 user changes button 3 17 DistanceFromCamera D 10 Do Acquire 6 22 Download of match string 6 63 of ocvfont tool string 6 63 DPM Print Verification 4 39 Duplicate Button 5 10 Dynamic _Binarize D 10 DynamicMask 5 75 Index DynamMask Tool 5 62 E Edge Energy Threshold 5 26 5 33 5 34 5 64 5 74 Edit code 6 13 7 11 tool set 6 51 Enable change lot in run mode 6 94 7 6 configuration file audit trail 6 91 demonstration mode C 4 desktop 3 20 6 94 end batch functionality 6 91 failed image queue 6 80 disable for demo mode C 2 i pak he to be minimized 2 2 6 94 mask output 5 40 5 50 5 62 match string 4 5 4 19 4 20 ocv failure tracking 6 40 6 79 RS 232 runtime results 6 74 6 76 saving stats and config files from stats menu 6 93 tryout debug info 5 61 user logins for training approvals 6 92 7 9 name access enable part 11 3 3 3 4 6 91 7 13 user logins for training approvals 6 93 Enabled codes 4 2 4 13 End batch 6 91 7 15 of batch reports 3 8 Ensure Within ROI 4 29 ENTERRUNMODE 6 68 ENTERSETUPMODE 6 68 EOT 5 99 6 68 6 76 character defined 6 37 Erosion 5 3 5 34 5 74 Ethernet tcp ip button 6 66 commands 6 68 ETX 6 76 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 7 Index Event Selector open 6 9 Exit autostep mode button 2 32 6 19 6 20 to change lot 7 6 setup mode 7 6 training to main setup button 6 19 6 24 Exiting Run Mode
371. rt Camera to appear in the list To EA He d2 Eo F 58 O Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual B 13 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC B 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual APPENDIX C Demo Mode O Demo Mode allows you to display quickly the capabilities of Visionscape I PAK HE Demo Mode is password protected It allows I PAK HE to run a saved Job using saved images for a pre set amount of time and then switch to the next desired Job and run it Demo Mode runs automatically until you manually enter Setup Mode Note You need a Visionscape dongle to run in Demo Mode with a Software System for more information see Software Systems on page 1 9 ke e o E D m Note You cannot use 21 CFR Part 11 with Demo Mode Copying Job Font amp Image Files Before you can use Demo Mode you need to copy Job Font and image files to other locations 1 Copy the Job avp avpsys files From C Vscape I PAK_ HE Demo To C Vscape I PAK_ HE Jobs 2 After copying these files select all of the AVP and AVPSYS files in this directory Right click on any file and select Properties Turn Off Uncheck the Read Only attribute Click the OK button Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual C 1 Appendix K Demo Mode Copy the font ocv files From C Vscape I PAK_HE Demo To C Vscape Jobs Fonts After copying these files select all
372. rt the Match String feature Enabling External Input of Match String I PAK HE software allows the External Input of Match String feature and related functionality to be enabled By default these features are disabled 5 82 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual External Input of Match String FIGURE 5 59 Enabling External Input Feature Product ChangeO ver Activities MV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver IV Reset Failures on Product ChangeOver Archive Path lv MYV_NASHUA devivs370 prod TT Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot r 7 Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Results Reporting Enabled RS 232 Runtime Results M Save Runtime Results to a File Enable OCY Failure Tracking lt I Report RS 232 ERROR when Inspection Result is empty lt I Enable Failed Image Queue Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup 9 a Number of Images in Queue Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum C 2 4 n Training lt I AutoS ave Product Definition after Re Training lt Reset Statistics after re training lt I Reset Failures after re training F Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout TT Go directly between RunMode and Training TT Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout DEV Training IT Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools IT Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools External Communica
373. s OC Font Tool Font Selected Font DefaultFont Training Debug Delay jo ms pi Symbols Trained in This Font he Train Symbe Is Select Font Remove AutoFont and Symbol s Scaling Revert Save Font IV Always Ask To Save Font IV Use Selected Font on Exit The right side of the Custom Properties dialog box displays the properties for the selected font When no font is selected no properties are displayed The left side of the Custom Properties dialog box displays the name of the selected font and the names of the symbols currently trained in that font Setting the Training Debug Delay to a non zero value causes the system to display detailed information during the training and scaling of symbols Buttons DefaultFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Apply Automatic Min Contrast IV Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pct QI i oc gt e e e Select Font Displays the Font Manager dialog box see Font Manager Dialog Box on page 5 9 and allows for a font to be selected for training or modification e Train Font Initiates the training of anOCVFont see Training Fonts on page 5 10 This is a change from previous I PAK HE versions where you were required to train the OC VFont using the Train button in I PAK HE Visionscape I Pak H
374. s gt Camera x Button Text By default the first camera button reads the name of the Smart Camera You might want to specify the text for the Smart Camera to best describe the view that is being displayed 7 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Ni Run Mode Window by that Smart Camera For example Date Lot Code be more meaningful in your application Camera views cannot be moved or resized You can enable or disable the camera views in any combination The Operator cannot relocate camera views This is an Operator level function Showing all views or no views will not impact the inspection process ha am e oc e Failure Report Displays a separate Failure Report for each Smart Camera that is selected currently in the Run Mode window Make sure Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Show All Menu Options Advanced Users is selected Hotkey ALT F FIGURE 7 2 Display Failure Report ase lees Sample ocyfonttools Failure Report tau cg RAZ Operator The Failure Report information box lists Inspection Failures and their occurrences Failures are generated by Inspection and are displayed by Inspection The tool s symbolic names are displayed under Failure Type and the failure counts are displayed under Frequency To close the Failure Report s click Failure Report again The FailureReport form will be cleared each time y
375. s gt General gt 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration menu items that you require These are dependent on your regulations For example if you require that passwords expire set the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Set Passwords To Expire option as well as specifying the duration of the password For more information about the menu items see 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration on page 6 91 Note Create an SOP that defines your password expiration duration 3 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions 5 Now bring in your I PAK Administrator to begin assigning login names passwords access and retraining rights Always remember to define a Programmer and at least one Supervisor Your day to day users should be Operators and Supervisors When an I PAK Administrator creates a user account a listing of user names encrypted user passwords and access levels will be created When entering Setup Mode from Run Mode you will have to enter a user name and user password via the I PAK HE keyboard or a Login dialog box Based on the user name and password entered the appropriate access level will be granted during Setup Mode GO Note A 21 CFR Part 11 System Setting Use OnScreen Keypad instead of PC Keyboard enables an OnScreen Keyboard for entering login and training approval user names and passwords rather than the I PAK HE keyboard For more information see page 6 94 At
376. s gt Training and Results gt External Communications Timeout e hn oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 85 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 5 62 External Communications Error Message Timeout External Input of Match String Eg xX Timeout No Match String If a timeout error occurs I PAK HE displays an error message and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain the layout FIGURE 5 63 Training Menu With Only Disapprove Button Current Tool OCVRuntimeTool Font Selected NewFont When a response is received I PAK HE displays the input string FIGURE 5 64 Display of Input String Input Sting ABCDEFG The string is then examined to determine which symbol names are in it If any of the input symbol names are not found in the OC VFont I PAK HE displays an error message as shown in Figure 5 65 and forces you to retrain by displaying only the Disapprove button FIGURE 5 65 Input of Match String Error Message Symbol Not in Font External Input of Match String x Input Symbol Name Badsymbolname Not Found In OCV Font 5 86 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual External Input of Match String e Ifall symbols are in the OCVFont the input string is compared to the string of characters found during training Any differences in the symbol names are noted If the number of symbols is not the same in each stri
377. s are not available for display O Upon returning to Setup Mode all Inspection steps are stopped I O I PAK HE makes no special provisions for setting up Data Valid or Inspection Passed for Inspection steps that do not contain snapshots If these I O points are required set them up manually using the Job Editor in Train and Tryout mode Lo rom c 20 25 52 Or d9 Continue Product Creation by Training the Tools After naming the Product the Programmer will be transferred automatically to the automated training for these vision tools Wizard Training as shown in Figure 6 39 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 53 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 39 Create a Product Wizard Training Visionscape I PAK HE Nok Ods OCVForkless Tool Is Nok Trained The wizard method of training walks the Programmer through each step of the training sequence Wizard training is invoked automatically when the Programmer first enters this window You can disable it via a system setting For more information see the AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout setting on page 6 84 For full training and tryout details see AutoStep or Wizard Training Method on page 6 18 Save Product This is a Programmer level function Save Product displays the Save Product dialog box as shown in Figure 6 40 6 54 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 40 Save P
378. s code 6 13 6 73 7 11 lot 6 6 6 11 product 6 10 this tool s code 6 13 6 73 7 11 your password 3 15 connect 6 8 create a product 6 43 pdfs 3 9 delete 5 10 demo mode C 3 C 5 disapprove 5 80 5 81 5 86 5 87 5 88 display audit trail 3 18 login violation log 3 7 login violations 3 17 operators 3 15 programmers 3 14 supervisors 3 15 user changes 3 17 duplicate 5 10 ethernet tcp ip 6 66 exit autostep mode 2 32 6 19 6 20 to change lot 7 6 to setup mode 7 6 failed image queue 6 80 6 81 7 3 failure report 7 3 font editor 2 32 5 6 6 24 folder 6 24 fonts 6 16 include 4 60 input match string 5 84 5 85 5 88 key 7 13 load a different product 1 10 new 5 9 next camera 6 20 tool 6 96 numeric view 4 67 ocv result tracking 6 79 tracking 6 40 previous tool 6 96 reconcile 3 13 remove symbols 5 8 rename 5 10 reset 7 8 a user s password 3 17 restore a user account 3 16 revert 5 8 rs 232 5 92 6 64 6 65 results 6 74 run mode 2 2 6 98 C 5 save config files 6 93 font 5 8 results 6 76 6 77 scaled font 5 16 5 20 stats 6 93 scale 5 19 5 20 select 5 9 a different device 1 10 font 2 34 5 7 5 8 show custom properties 4 50 statistics amp data 6 32 substitute 2 39 5 75 5 77 5 78 suspend an existing user 3 15 tool settings 6 53 C 3 train 6 20 and tryout 6 17 font 5 7 5 11 5 21 5 22 try all 6 22 stop 6 22 zoom 7 6 ByPass 6 55 Cc Calibrate 6 7 Calibrated Results display 6 7 Calibration c
379. s either added removed or changed in the script If the script is changed but no input or output datums are changed then this button does not need to be clicked Clicking this button also causes all input datums to be set to their default values and lose their connections to other step results or parameters Datums created by the package script are added to the user interface Input datums are shown as a box with a drop down list button The input datums Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 9 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques can be linked to other similar type datums in the Job Clicking the drop down list button causes the Job Tree to be displayed allowing you to select the datum to link to the input datum Resource datums are shown as user editable boxes that can be set to a value directly Output datums are not shown in the user interface for this step but can be seen in the Job Tree that comes up when linking an input datum e Cylinder Radius The radius of the cylinder e DistanceFromCamera The distance from the camera to the cylinder e UseCalibration If the inputs CylinderRadius DistanceFromCamera are specified in calibrated world coordinates for example millimeters then the UseCalibration checkbox should not be checked If the inputs are specified in pixel coordinates then UseCalibration should be checked Training None Results e Status Set to true after a successful execution
380. s in the current product Job definition in a tree like structure as shown in Figure 6 65 You can print the Tree View of your Job and you can save the Tree View data of the Job to a file Note Edit is intended to give the advanced Programmer a chance to tune an inspection When inserting steps here you should understand that not all parameters will be automatically set up for you as they are when you create a Job via the Create Product option O Lo e 9 c o 250 52 Or de Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 95 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 65 Edit Tool Set Menu File Job Hawk BE HawkEyeE 10028 E lnspection1 E ez Snapshot1 of Acquire AIG OCVFont Tool ev AutoFind lg OnePt Locator RA MarkArea FontTooll Fail Counter AutoFind1 Fail Counter E ac OC Font Tool ev AutoFind gm OnePt Locator SA MarkArea FontTool2 Fail Counter AutoFind Fail Counter Illl BarCode Tool BCATooll Fail Counter Wait Step Tool Settings This is a Programmer level function Tool Settings displays the Tool Settings menu as shown in Figure 6 66 The Tool Settings dialog box contains training and inspection parameters relative to the selected tool and allows the Programmer to edit the individual tool settings The Programmer can select Next Tool and Previous Tool to go through all the tools in the product Note It
381. s tobe connected Started Manual Local System By Themes Provides user experience theme man Started Automatic Local System By Uninterruptible Pow Manages an uninterruptible power su Manual Local System lv d I lt gt Extended J Standard 17 Double click Task Scheduler to display the Task Scheduler Properties page as shown in Figure A 10 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual A 13 Appendix Installation amp Software FIGURE A 10 Task Scheduler Properties Page Task Scheduler Properties Local Computer General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name Schedule Display name Task Scheduler Description Enables a user to configure and schedule 7 automated tasks on this computer If this service is G Path to executable CAWINNT System32 cvchost exe k netswos Startup type Automatic M Service status Stopped Start Stop Pause Ress You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here 18 In the Startup type pull down menu specify Automatic Click Apply and then click OK After Apply has finished the Start button will become active and you can start the service by clicking Start 19 Close the Power Option Properties dialog box A 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual CD RW Support CD RW Support I PAK HE supports a CD RW for the archival and restoration of its product definition files gt To add a CD
382. sample inspection will fail every cycle I PAK HE s first time startup will run this Sample job in continuous mode no triggers needed on a sample image so you can see the counters increment Then you can go to Setup Mode and either train the Fontless tool on the sample image or create your own production job Note After you exit Run Mode after this first time startup I PAK HE will not allow you to go back into Run Mode until all tools are trained You should understand that I PAK HE will never allow you to go back into Run Mode if there are untrained tools in your job 1 12 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual I PAK HE Shutdown Procedure Il PAK HE Shutdown Procedure To properly shut down I PAK HE exit Run Mode by entering the Programmer password Then close I PAK HE by selecting File gt Exit Next via the PC s Start button shutdown the PC When the PC has completed shutting down turn off the UPS if present e O D Q m i LLI I lt 9 O 2 2 gt Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Inspection 1 14 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual N CHAPTER2 Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials gt a oO ae OF cl or aL S This chapter guides you through two tutorials e Abasic Visionscape I PAK HE tutorial See Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool on page 2 3 e A more adv
383. set up to pulse a virtual I O point That virtual I O point could be used by the vision inspections as a trigger signal Product Creation The Product creation flow chart allows you to insert an Inspection step that does not contain a snapshot step 1 When you right click SWSYS1 the Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot menu item is displayed as shown in Figure 6 37 FIGURE 6 37 Selecting Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot Acquire 1 Caml Add Inspection 1 Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot Delete Inspection 1 Delete Inspection 1 Wo Snapshot 2 Click Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot Your Product looks like the Product in Figure 6 38 6 52 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 38 Inspection Without Snapshot Inspection 1 Acquire 1 Caml MyHawkEye_1600T Inspection 1 No Snapshot All other aspects of Product creation remain the same Inserting steps into the inspection is accomplished by right clicking on the associated button Train and Tryout Inspections containing no snapshots are selectable from the item list of the Train and Tryout dialog box You can select these steps and use the Tool Settings button to modify the settings for these Inspection steps and any child steps Run Mode Upon entering Run Mode all inspections steps are started Reports are available only for those Inspection steps that contain snapshots Results for inspections that do not contain snapshot
384. sides of the barcode Perform the training by clicking Train When a barcode is successfully found and decoded and Match String Enable is enabled the match string will be set from that barcode Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 13 Chapter Results Automatic Identification Status The Barcode Tool status is true when a barcode is found and decoded and the decoded string matches the Match String when Match String Enable is enabled Symbol Height The Symbol Height is reported if Print Verification is set to ANSI and is reported in Pixels if Cell Unit Report is set to Pixels If Cell Unit Report is set to Mils Calibrated is set On and Calibration Cell Unit is set to the results of a Data Matrix tool calibration Symbol Height will be reported in mils 100 Symbol Width The Symbol Width is reported if Print Verification is set to ANSI and is reported in Pixels if Cell Unit Report is set to Pixels If Cell Unit Report is set to Mils Calibrated is set On and Calibration Cell Unit is set to the results of a Data Matrix tool calibration Symbol Width will be reported in mils 100 Text String from the decoded barcode Error Bits Number of code words in error that are not erasure code words used in error correction algorithm Erasure Bits Number of code words in error that are erasure code words used in error correction algorithm Code Type Indicates the type of barcode that is decoded This is
385. splay Results window To use these features verify that any inspection results you might need are selected on the Inspection Step s property page in the Select Results to Upload field and enable an RS 232 port on the System Settings gt Communication dialog box e Enable RS 232 Runtime Results By default this selection is disabled until you enable an RS 232 port Once a port is established you can select this option Exit the Advanced SubMenu and go to the Statistics and Data SubMenu You will notice an additional button available on the Statistics and Data SubMenu called RS 232 Results as shown in Figure 6 51 FIGURE 6 51 Updated Statistics SubMenu for RS 232 Results Save Save 3 Preview 1 N Save Transmit RS 232 Preview DEV Close ae Coria Images Statistics Piel Statistics Tracking Statistics Click RS 232 Results and go into the dialog box see Figure 6 52 6 74 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Advanced Settings FIGURE 6 52 Tool Results to Output Select the Specific Inspection Results to Output over R Tool Results to Output Inspection Snapshot1 FontT ool1 T ext Inspection Snapshot1 Assign5 Out Inspection Snapshot Assign4 Out Inspection Snapshot1 FontT ool2 T ext Inspection Snapshot1 Assign Out Inspection Snapshotl Assign6 0ut Inspectionl Snapshot1 BCRT coll Text Select all OK Cancel The Cancel button allows you to discard any modification that was done Onl
386. ssfully decoded 4 72 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool e OCRTF Character Results Contains a vector of the character confidence values for the successfully decoded characters only The results are in the order of the characters in the output string skipping unknown characters c Ke a F tar 2 5 lt 3 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 73 Chapter Automatic Identification 4 74 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual CHAPTER 5 OCV Reference This chapter provides Optical Character Verification tool details Overview Visionscape I PAK HE has three options for Optical Character Verification OCV each of which has an appropriate use QI e OCVFont Tool on page 5 37 e OCVRuntimeTool on page 5 45 e OCVFontless Tool on page 5 55 This chapter outlines each of these tools along with their supporting steps e p i tez oc gt e e OCV Inspection The OCV Tools and their supporting steps inspect codes such as component ID and Date Lot The print may be either pre print or On line Individual printed features are referred to as symbols The OCV inspection methods inspect the quality of the individual printed symbols Quality checks include e Contrast Contrast refers to the difference between symbol and background A contrast value is calculated for the symbol and compared to a user selectable
387. ssword Successful entry enables Programmer and Supervisor Level Capabilities The default password for Programmer access level is 0101 This data is saved in the PC s registry Supervisor Displays the prompt for the Supervisor s password Successful entry enables Supervisor Level Capabilities The default password for Supervisor access level is 1010 This data is saved in the PC s registry Operator Immediately places I PAK HE into Operator level Change Password Displays a dialog box for a new password for the currently enabled access level Note Passwords must use numeric symbols Change Change Lot Password Allows the Programmer to change the Change Lot password default is 1101 to something else This is active only if the access level is Programmer For Supervisor access Changing Lot at Run Time is activated 6 4 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Setup Mode Menus e 21 CFR Part 11 Administrator For complete information see Chapter 3 21 CFR Part 11 e Configure Supervisor Access This command is available to Programmers to configure the tasks a Supervisor can perform When you do not have Programmer level access this menu item is disabled When a Programmer selects this item the Configure Supervisor Access dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 4 FIGURE 6 4 Configure Supervisor Access Supervisor Access Leyel Setup Select the Advanced Super
388. stCircle Fit RobustLine Fit Sequence Step Sobel Filter Template Find ThreePt Locator Tolerance Meas Trajectory Step TwoPt Locator VarAssign Step Vector Tool VYectorGroup Tool Wait Step With Step Step 19 Step 18 Cancel 18 Click to select OCVRuntimeTool and click OK 19 Right click on Acquire 1 Click to select Wait Step and click OK This displays the Product Creation Acquire Tools Detail dialog box as shown in Figure 2 36 FIGURE 2 36 Product Creation Acquire 1 Tools Detail Acquire 1 Tools Detail Acquire 1 OCVRuntimeT ool Wait Step Camera 1 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 31 N HE Tutorials a rb Q iy S 9 gt Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials 20 Now you have all the steps required for this tutorial Click OK twice Type a name for the Job and click Save 21 The Setup Mode Train and Tryout wizard window is displayed If the AutoStep Mode button is ON click Exit AutoStep Mode see Figure 2 37 FIGURE 2 37 Turning AutoStep Mode OFF isionscape I PAK HE 3 7 2 Setup Mode Image Help C t Product A Level Date Ti MICROSCA Tap roduc ccess Level at 7 Tin Programmer 11 18 2008 02 48 PM Change Product Train and Tryout Statistics and Data Advanced Settings AutoStep Mode ON Nspection wf Snapshot1 gt OC RuntimeTool Wait Step EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2008 6MA0282 Font Training
389. step is the Snapshot click Tool Settings and then click the Acquire tab The Tool Settings dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure C 1 which shows how one of the demo Jobs has been configured FIGURE C 1 Load Images From File Tool Settings Blob Tool Blob1 Fail Counter Blob Tool Blob2 F4 fi J Bl Fal Default Datum Order Acquire Inputs H Picture Mode Load Images from File ES File List c demo_img blister_1 tif c demo_img blister_2 tif c demo_img blister_3 tif ke e o m Enabling Demo Mode To access Demo Mode exit Run Mode using the password 78743366 After this password is entered you enter Setup Mode with the Programmer access level To enable Demo Mode 1 From Setup Mode click Advanced Settings You will see the Demo Mode button displayed on the left 2 Click Demo Mode The Demo Mode Products dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure C 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual C 3 Appendix ke Demo Mode FIGURE C 2 Demo Mode Products Dialog Box Enable Demonstration Mode E Demonstration Time for Each Product 30 30000 0 seconds Available Products Selected Products bar_code bar_code_and_ink_jet blister_inspectior date_lot_code 3 Click to enable Enable Demonstration Mode 4 To the right of Demonstration Time for Each Product specify the amount of time you want each product to run in Demo Mode
390. symbols being inspected by the tool When set to 100 any contrast difference is acceptable If no contrast calculations are performed for the inspected symbols the calculated percent difference is 0 Otherwise the smallest contrast from the inspected symbols is divided by the largest contrast from the inspected symbols This value is then subtracted from 1 to get the percentage difference If the calculated difference is larger than the value of Max Contrast Difference the inspection fails QI Default 100 Range 0 to 100 e Individual Symbol Search X Determines the width of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol width to get the search width e p i oc gt e e Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels e Individual Symbol Search Y Determines the height of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol height to get the search height Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels e Test For Character Breaks Enables and disables the checks for character break appearance flaws Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 49 Chapter OCV Reference Default Disabled Runtime ID Checking Enables and disables the tests that determine if the correct symbol is present at runtime During training of an OC VFont the FontSymbols that are added are checked against each other to determine h
391. t X xX 20x Clear 1 Zone 20 eDotSize Dot Size DotSizeG Datum Int xX Grade Grade rade A 21 eDotSize Dot Size 1 DotSize1 Datum Do xX 1 uble 1 22 eDotSize Dot Size 2 DotSize2 Datum Do xX 2 uble 1 23 eDotCent Dot DotCentG Datum int xX Grade Center rade au Grade 24 eDotCent Dot DotCent1 Datum Do xX 1 Center 1 uble 1 25 eDotCent Dot DotCent2 Datum Do xX 2 Center 2 uble 1 26 eDistAngl Distortion DistAnglG Datum lnt X X Grade Angle rade A Grade 4 44 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual TABLE 4 6 Contents of VerifyDetails continued Data Matrix Tool Text Symbolic Name Symbolic Current ISO Offset Offset italics Name Type AIM IAQG ISO aim DPM output 27 eDistAngl Distortion DistAngl Datum Int X X Angle A 28 eCelllFillX Cell Fill X Cel lFillX Datum lnt x 1 29 eCel llFillY Cell Fill Y Cel lFillY Datum Int x al 30 eCellSize Cell Size CellSizeG Datum lnt xX Grade Grade rade A 31 eCentOff Center CentOffG Datum Int xX Grade Offset rade A Grade 32 eCentOff Center CentOff Datum Do xX Offset uble 1 33 eSizeOff Size SizeOffGr Datum nt xX Grade Offset ade 1 Grade 34 eSizeOff Size SizeOff Datum Do x Offset uble 1 35 eCellMod Cell CellModG Datum Int x Grade Modulatio rade 1 n Grade 36 eCellMod Cell CellModO Datum lnt x On Modulatio n 1 n On 37 eCellMod Cell CellModO Datum lnt X Off Modulatio ff 1 n Off 38
392. t candidate at the overlap position The other candidate will not become part of the layout This overlap measurement is in pixels Default 5 pixels Range 0 to 15 pixels Min Read Match Is a correlation percentage used as a minimum requirement for a symbol to be considered a candidate during the learn layout process Default 65 Range 0 to 100 Automatic Threshold Adjustment Enables and disables the automatic threshold adjustment feature When enabled the best match location during the learn layout process calculates an adjustment to the threshold used to create binary images at runtime This calculated value is set in the Threshold Adjustment property AutoThreshold tab The AutoThreshold tab of the OC VRuntimeTool belongs to the LayoutStep and is used only at runtime The only property used is the Threshold Adjustment property which serves as a global adjustment for all FontSymbols being inspected FontSymbols may still make individual adjustments to the thresholds using their own Auto Threshold Adjustment properties The ComputePolarity step of the OCVRuntimeTool belongs to the LayoutStep It is not used by an OCVFont Tool Step Tips After the OCVRuntimeTool has been trained positioning the mouse over the ROI displays a Step Tip This Step Tip provides information and graphical feedback for individual symbols when the mouse is over a symbol area Train information includes the Area of the symbol the number of On
393. t requiring retraining of the OC VFont Tool QI Inspection If AutoFind is enabled the pins are located and the OCVFont Tool box is re positioned based on the pin locations Each symbol found during training is expected to be at the same location within the OC VFont Tool box at runtime For each symbol position there are several ways that an inspection can fail e p i tez oc gt e e e The symbol cannot be located e The symbol can fail because the sharpness value is out of tolerance e The symbol can fail because the contrast value is out of tolerance e The symbol can fail because a break larger than the user specified size appears in the character The symbol failed an ID Test It could not be determined that the correct symbol was present Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 37 Chapter OCV Reference The symbol can fail the initial residue check The symbol can fail the final residue check either or both methods This residue analysis allows for detection of the following Symbol has become thicker or thinner Symbol has holes or missing features Symbol holes are filled in Symbol contains additional or stray markings FIGURE 5 27 OCVFont Tool Properties Page Tool Settings OC Font Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshald Com KID gjo g Fale Default Datum Order OCVFont Tool Inputs Tg Use AutoFind wi g Auto
394. ter all symbols are trained click Save Font to save the OCVFont 14 Close the Custom Properties dialog box Now you are ready to continue with the Setup Mode Train and Tryout wizard window OCVRuntimeTool Training 1 In the left pane select the OCVRuntimeTool Now that the OC VFont has been trained it needs to be selected for use by the OCVRuntimeTool Click Tool Settings Click the Layout Step tab Select the font named NewFont from the Selected Font list and click Close Position the OCVRuntimeTool over the characters to be inspected making the ROI slightly larger than the inspected characters as shown in Figure 2 44 FIGURE 2 44 Positioning the OC VRuntimeTool Zoom In AutoStep Previous Next Next Tool Options Acquire Live Camera Settings Zoom Out Inspection Snapshot1 m OCVRuntimeTool Wait Step EXPIRATI ON DAT Sb Devna fineTos gt t Naan tage zal cae 2 36 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool 4 To start the training process click Train As symbols in the OC VFont are found in the image boxes are placed over those positions When all candidate layout positions are found any conflicts two or more symbols found in the same position are resolved using runtime ID checking information Each position of the final layout is then trained as a symbol in a new font the Runtime font N The Approve Inspect
395. ters can only be trained for Pharmacode and will only affect the reading of Pharmacodes Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 1 Chapter Automatic Identification The Barcode Tool will only decode barcode types that have been enabled in the Enabled Codes selection list The decoded string is available for output as well as a status indicating whether the barcode data exactly matches the trained match string To train the Barcode Tool place the ROI around the barcode to be trained To train on e Any barcode other than Postnet or Pharmacode ensure at least one barcode is enabled in Enabled Codes e A Postnet barcode enable it specifically in Enabled Codes e A Pharmacode barcode enable it specifically in Enabled Codes Also both narrow and wide bars must be present to train successfully For all barcodes be sure to leave a quiet zone area on all sides of the barcode If a barcode is located and decoded when the tool is run the decoded text is displayed at the center of the ROL as shown in Figure 4 1 The status flag of the tool is set to pass if a barcode is found and decoded and when the match string is enabled the decoded string must also match The output status datum ReadStatus is set true if a barcode is found and decoded regardless of the decoded string FIGURE 4 1 Barcode Located amp Decoded AUNQUE A112233445566A The Barcode Tool is inserted in a Job Tree inside of a Snapshot and an Acquire Des
396. that I PAK HE takes in the event that the string input from the external device does not match the string learned when the tool was trained The possible selections and their meaning are e Use Input String I PAK HE uses the input string as the inspection string e Use Learned String I PAK HE ignores the input string and sets the string found during training as the inspection string e Retry by Learning I PAK HE forces you to retrain the tool and allow the string to be entered again e Retry by Input I PAK HE allows the string to be entered again The Match Mode Mismatch Action selected is applied to any OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool in the current Job Transmit Final Layout String By default Transmit Final Inspection String is not checked which means that I PAK HE will not send the inspection string out when training of an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is complete When Transmit Final Inspection String is enabled checked I PAK HE sends the inspection string out to an external device whenever an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is trained successfully Transmit Final Inspection String data is transferred using the communication method selected on the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Communication dialog box The Transmit Final Inspection String feature is only active if the communication method is set to either RS 232 or Ethernet OCVFont Tool amp OCVRuntimeTool Training The I PAK HE OCVFont Tool
397. the camera and can be calibrated individually or as a group The different camera menus under Calibrate list the names of each Snapshot in the corresponding target When you click one of these menus the Calibration Wizard from the Calibration Manager control is displayed and you can calibrate the camera view When the Smart Camera is calibrated its data is saved in the avp file Open Calibration and Save Calibration are a means to extract the calibration data into a file and reload it into a different program For complete information regarding Calibration see Chapter 2 of the Visionscape Tools Reference on your CD in PDF format Image Menu O FIGURE 6 6 Image Menu Image Open Save Open When Open is selected the Open Image dialog box is displayed From here you can open a previously saved I PAK HE image This may be useful for retraining tools or debugging an application with a frozen image Lo e 9 c 20 25 52 Or ee e Save When Save is selected the Save Image dialog box is displayed From here you can save an I PAK HE image to your hard drive This may be useful in storing a golden training image or for debugging purposes Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 7 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Help Menu FIGURE 6 7 Help Menu I O Debug Open Softkeyboard Visionscape I PAK User Manual About Visionscape I PAK e I O Debug This graphical r
398. the inspection being done by that Smart Camera The default text is the name of your Smart Camera The maximum length for the camera button text is 30 characters Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 57 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Data Valid Tab Use Data Valid Duration ms to specify on a per inspection basis the duration of the data valid pulse You can move the slider or highlight the number in the box and type another number Note Data Valid is enabled disabled via the I O Tab see page 6 58 FIGURE 6 42 Product Settings Dialog Box Data Valid Tab MyHawkEye_1600T Data Valid Duration ms p fi 0 When Data Valid is True inspection results can be sampled Data Valid is On for the data valid duration specified and then Off for the data valid duration specified The On duration of Data Valid is added to the execution time The Off time is a background task and does not impact execution time Data Valid Duration ms The Programmer can use Data Valid for each Smart Camera s results Data Valid is On for the data valid duration specified and then Off for the data valid duration specified The On duration of Data Valid is added to the execution time The Off time is a background task and does not impact execution time Note Data Valid is On and Off for the length of time specified For example using the default of 10 ms when the inspection is complete and inspection results are ava
399. the match or layout string to be changed This also enables the Change this Tool s Code and the Change all Tool s Code buttons To change one match or layout string at a time you edit the code and click Change this Tool s Code This changes the match or layout string to the contents specified For OCVFont Tools error checking is performed to verify that the same number of characters are in the new string and to verify that all symbols in the new string are in the OCVFont A status message is displayed after trying to change the lot to indicate status Ifa Job has multiple tools that have identical match or layout strings you are able to change them all at once by editing the code for any one and then clicking Change all Tool s Code I PAK HE goes through the Job and changes the match or layout string to the contents you just specified for all tools that had the same code Note The Font Tool IGNORE character and Matrix Tool IGNORE character are allowed in this dialog box The Change Lot dialog box can supports up to 99 OC VFont Tools Data Matrix Tools and Barcode Tools in any one Job Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 7 11 Chapter Overruns r Run Mode Reference I PAK HE monitors Run Mode for process and trigger overruns If one occurs the I PAK HE Overrun dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 7 13 FIGURE 7 13 I PAK HE Overrun Dialog Box Yisionscape I Pak Overrun
400. thernet Switch also referred to as a Hub Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual B 1 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC FIGURE B 1 Connecting PC amp Smart Cameras to 5 Port Ethernet Switch Typical 5 Port Network Switch Uplink Power Note The Uplink port on the switch is left unconnected in this configuration Typically this is where you would connect to your LAN However since we want these to be private connections we will remain disconnected from the outside world Setting the PC to Use a Static IP Address 1 Go to the Windows Control Panel and open the Network Connections applet 2 Find your Ethernet Adapter in the list right click on it and choose Properties You ll see the dialog box shown in Figure B 2 B 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Connecting Smart Cameras to a PCusing Static IP Addresses amp FIGURE B 2 Local Area Connection Properties Dialog Box 4 Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using BB Broadcom NetXtreme 57xx Gigabit C This connection uses the following items wv Brie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks IV Jil QoS Packet Scheduler lw Internet Protocol TCP IP UJ Install Description To gA He d2 Eo F 58 O Transmission Control Protocol lnternet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication
401. tically calculated for them This Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 59 Chapter OCV Reference automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 50 of the contrast value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled Max Contrast Difference Sets the maximum percentage difference between the calculated contrast values for symbols being inspected by the tool When set to 100 any contrast difference is acceptable If no contrast calculations are performed for the inspected symbols the calculated percent difference is 0 Otherwise the smallest contrast from the inspected symbols is divided by the largest contrast from the inspected symbols This value is then subtracted from 1 to get the percentage difference If the calculated the difference is larger than the value of Max Contrast Difference the inspection fails Default 100 Range 0 to 100 Allowed Thickening of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to grow along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction away from the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels Allowed Thinning of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to shrink along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number o
402. ting a trigger if configured to continue inspection gt We supply one of two Uninterruptable Power Supplies depending on the voltage required at the customer site Depending on availability actual model numbers may change while functionality remains intact e 120 Volt version APC BP420SUS Part Number RVA 93300781 bari E _ e d e 240 Volt Version APC SC420i Part Number RVA 93300811 o c Oo L T Both of these UPS are external They are not inside the I PAK HE enclosure due to their form factor Note After installing the UPS the installer should add the appropriate labels in the appropriate language to the side of the UPS Configuring the UPS Software I PAK HE uses the Windows integrated UPS support Therefore it s necessary to set up some parameters e g the UPS type using the Windows Control Panel 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel to open the Windows Control Panel 2 Double click Power Options 3 Click on the UPS tab The Uninterruptible Power Supply dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure A 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual A 7 Appendix Installation amp Software FIGURE A 2 Power Options Properties UPS Tab Power Schemes Advanced Hibernate UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Status Current power source FE Estimated UBS runtime Estimated UES capacity Battery condition Deta
403. tional Passwords Not Used 3 4 Train button 6 20 train and tryout 6 20 debug delay 5 18 5 21 font button 5 7 5 11 5 21 5 22 Train and Tryout 6 17 acquire 6 23 autostep 6 20 button 6 17 custom settings 6 24 exit training to main setup 6 24 live 6 23 next 6 20 options 6 21 previous 6 20 tool settings 6 21 toolbar 6 19 train 6 20 try all 6 24 try tool train and tryout 6 23 train and tryout 6 20 Trained samples 4 71 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Index 17 Index Training and results tab 6 71 barcode tool 4 13 data matrix tool 4 32 debug delay 5 7 delete 4 71 font 2 32 match string enabled tools 6 25 ocr 4 56 ocvfont tool 5 79 ocvruntimetool 5 79 tips ocrtrainable font tool 4 71 Trajectory Step custom settings 6 24 Transmit final inspection string 5 83 5 84 5 88 6 89 layout string 5 84 statistics TCP IP protocol amp syntax 6 38 Trigger i o 6 57 overrun 7 12 polarity 6 57 Trigger Acquire Method 6 56 Triggered I O or Sensor 6 22 Troubleshooting 5 107 Try all button 6 22 train and tryout 6 24 stop button 6 22 Tryout debug delay 5 61 mode options 6 22 Turbo 4 27 Tutorials ocvfontless tool 2 3 ocvruntime tool 2 20 U Undo Include 4 61 Uninstalling the Driver A 5 Unique Default Password 7 9 Update inspection step s with current settings 6 36 Upload images from part queue now 6 36 UPS A 6 US Letter Format 6 95 Use autofind ocvfont tool 5 38 ocvfontless tool 5 58 ocvruntime to
404. tions Timeout 60 Seconds M External Input of Match String Match String Mismatch Action Use Input Sting E r Transmit Final Inspection String QI Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results dialog box has options External Input of Match String Match String Mismatch Action and Transmit Final Inspection String Since these are System Settings even if you do a change product to another Job that contains an OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool these settings will not change External Input of Match String Checkbox By default External Input of Match String is not checked which means that I PAK HE expects no match string input for the OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool When External Input of Match String is enabled checked I PAK HE expects a match string to be input whenever an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is trained Cc i oc gt e e External Input of Match String data is transferred using the communication method selected on the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Communication dialog box The External Input of Match String feature is only active if the communication method is set to either RS 232 or Ethernet Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 83 Chapter OCV Reference Match String Mismatch Action I PAK HE software allows the Mismatch Action to be selected By default the list box is set to Use Input String This setting defines the action
405. to action Right clicking on a secondary tool button displays the Insert A Step dialog box with all possible vision tools The Programmer selects a tool and clicks Insert Before or Insert After Click OK to cause an Insert After action The Programmer can delete any primary orsecondary tool at any location by left clicking on the tool The Delete Tool SubTool dialog box is displayed This will prompt the Programmer to confirm the action Click OK to delete Click Cancel to abort this action This process continues until the Programmer has completed the selection of tools in this Product build Click OK The Programmer is prompted to name the Product Click OK to save the Product and the Product name associated with this Product During Product creation in the System Settings gt General dialog box if Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver is checked the appropriate dialog box is displayed Special Features of Tools amp Steps in Job Creation I PAK HE uses the Visionscape Toolset as the basis for the I PAK HE Toolset However I PAK HE has its own rules which differ from Visionscape and Job creation and implementation which also differ from FrontRunner Below are some of these I PAK HE unique features and implementation details Note Because of these differences the Programmer should NEVER create a Job using FrontRunner and then try to make I PAK HE use it FrontRunner uses a Job file that consists of only an av
406. tomatic Identification replace Global because each is slower and less stable than Global for most of the applications By default all three selections are enabled Adaptive May produce better decode results when the background of the Data Matrix is uneven due to marking or lighting Global A single threshold value determines whether a cell is dark or light for all cells Local May yield less error used in the error correction algorithm when Data Matrix rows or columns are not equally spaced Finetune Method The methods are Position Enhance Attempts to locate the four corners of the Data Matrix more precisely and to reduce the number of error correction bits used during decoding Default Off Intensity Enhance Overcomes dramatic intensity variation over the Data Matrix border area For example certain poorly marked Data Matrix may have some cells that are almost invisible compared to the rest of the cells e When disabled the system may issue a status code indicating a certain edge cannot be found When enabled the option will help read this type of Data Matrix more consistently Default On No Quiet Zone Clutter default Attempts to locate a Data Matrix even if the background is noisy and cluttered When the Data Matrix is printed on a clean background enabling this property increases the locating process speed Default Off Ignore Single Edges This property causes the decoder to
407. tools are displayed graphically over the image and can be selected by clicking on their graphical representations Lo e 9 c o 250 52 Or de Train and Tryout Toolbar This toolbar enables you to move through the train and tryout process acquire images view live images and tryout the product Refer to Figure 6 15 and the descriptions on page 6 20 through page 6 24 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 19 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 15 Train and Tryout Buttons a on Next Tool a an Zoomin Try Tool Custom Exit Training AutoStep Previous Next amera ERDE Options Acquire Live Zoom Out T y All Eno lS SS Su AutoStep This is a Supervisor level function AutoStep enables the Train and Tryout wizard to guide you tool by tool through the retraining process The default is based on System Setting gt AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout The default is On To exit AutoStep click Exit AutoStep Mode or change the default setting See the AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout setting on page 6 84 Train This is a Supervisor level function Train enables the training of the currently selected tool Once the tool is trained you can go to the Next Tool in the Job definition The Train button is red when the current tool is not trained and turns green once that tool is successfully trained Previous This is a Supervisor level function Previous enables you to ret
408. turns you to the Setup Mode main window N 12 Click Run Mode This returns you to Operator Mode and displays the Run Mode window as shown in Figure 2 48 Your Job will run in the Camera 1 View window in a continuous mode FIGURE 2 48 Run Mode MICROSCAN a oO es a2 OF cl or aL S Scotts1GO0T1 Scotts1G00T1 View 1 1 Irapect 11 Pass 110 Fal o EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2008 6MA0282 sywe Sout T600TT nayan EZAM Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 41 Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials What s Next Congratulations You have successfully created set up and stored an I PAK HE program trained the tools and executed both a tryout and continuous inspection in runtime This tutorial highlights the basic functionality of I PAK HE and provides a foundation for properly operating the product You are ready to go into full operation using I PAK HE 2 42 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual cuapter3 21 CFR Part 11 GO Visionscape I PAK HE is 21 CFR Part 11 technically compliant This chapter describes the following air Dl ia oc TI N e Components on page 3 1 e Access Levels on page 3 2 e Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 on page 3 3 The I PAK Administrator on page 3 4 e Customer Responsibilities on page 3 5 e 21 CFR Part 11 Functions on page 3 7 e Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Conce
409. ual Troubleshooting OCVFontFolder are saved to the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder using the font name found in the Job If a font with that name already exists you are asked whether or not to overwrite the existing font FIGURE 5 86 Overwrite Existing Font Dialog Box Saving Fonts x Overwrite Existing Font OCVFont2 Click Cancel to Skip Saving This Font HO No Cancel e Clicking Cancel causes the font to not be saved e Clicking Yes causes the font being read to overwrite the existing one e Clicking No causes a prompt to appear so that you can enter a unique name for the font being saved FIGURE 5 87 Enter a Unique Name Dialog Box Dialog x Enter a Unique Name For This Font QI e i oc gt e e When the old Job is read in any font based OCV tool found is modified so that the LayoutStep s Select Font property has the correct font chosen This allows old Jobs to be loaded and run without requiring a retrain of the font based OCV tools Troubleshooting Training Font Based Tools Read Match To reproduce the behavior Visionscape V2 5 1 12 was used We believe that this behavior is consistent across all versions of Visionscape Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 107 Chapter OCV Reference The Behavior 1 First train the OC VFont In the example given the TEXT02 TIF was used to train characters Le r22 A
410. uct Testl Visionscape I PAK HE V3 7 2 Page 1 Microscan Visionscape I PAK HE V3 7 2 Current Date Time 11 19 2008 07 52 04 Name of I PAK HE System default Data File for Product Testl Vision Device Scottsl600T1l lt gt gt Scottsl600Tl Settings lt lt Digitizer Selected CAM I O 3200 Digitizer Mode Single Board Normal Preview Statistics This is a Supervisor level function Preview Statistics displays the dialog box shown in Figure 6 23 which displays the current runtime statistics FIGURE 6 23 I PAK HE Dialog Box Preview Statistics i Product Test01 LD Date Time 11 19 2008 10 00 29 Inspection1 Inspected Characters Snapshot1 BarCode Tool Text 011311234567890617010615104123456 Snapshot1 DataMatrix Tool Text 17 010615 10 4123456 01 13112345678906 Il 136 Pi 136 Ri 0 OCV Tracking You must enable System Settings gt Training and Results gt Enable OCV Failure Tracking for the OCV Tracking button to be visible When you click OCV Tracking the OCV Failure Tracking dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 24 It lists all of the OCV tools that are in the current product definition 6 40 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Statistics amp Data FIGURE 6 24 OCV Failure Tracking Dialog Box OCV Failure Tracking Tool OC Symbol Failures Insp1 Snapshot1 FontT coll 5 Resnassnassnassiasasarenasanescnassnasod Save Data to File Done
411. uction mode setting The default is not selected e Trigger I O When the Programmer selects a Trigger Acquire Method of T O Triggered this list will contain all Digital IO points configured currently as inputs as well as virtual IO points Default Digital I O 1 Range Any valid physical input point or virtual I O point Trigger Polarity When the Programmer selects a Trigger Acquire Method of I O Triggered Trigger Polarity is designated Default High to Low e Lighting Controls how the Light Port Connector on the HawkEye 1600T is used Off No power is supplied to the Light Port Connector On Continuous power is supplied meaning a connected light head would be on all the time Strobe Pulse equal to exposure duration Power Strobe Short 24V pulse O e Exposure Time micro secs Use this value to set the amount of time in micro seconds that the Smart Camera s CCD will integrate light Exposure Time can freeze motion when you are not using a strobe if you are using a strobe it can prevent ambient light from affecting your image Note If Lighting is set to Power Strobe c zan emn oc Maximum Exposure Time 1000 micro seconds Minimum Exposure Time Depends on the camera definition file e 9 arent Q e Camera Button Text The Programmer can modify the contents of the Camera Button text to better reflect
412. ult Only the foreground area of the symbol is added to the mask Mask ROI The entire area within the symbol s ROI is added to the mask Apply to All FontSymbols Sets the properties of all symbols in the OCVFont to the values currently shown on the page Apply to Default Symbol Sets the properties of the default symbol of the OCVFont to the values currently shown on the page The factory default settings work well for most applications When adjustments to Pass Fail limits are required modify the following settings first Final Residue Limit QI Maximum Flaw Size Increasing Final Residue to 20 allows more variations to be accepted Changing the Final Residue has a gradual effect on Pass Fail Using a high Final Residue such as 50 on small characters such as canreduce false rejects Increasing the Maximum Flaw Size has a pronounced effect on Pass Fail Increasing Maximum Flaw Size allows more character variations to be acceptable For many applications this value should not be set greater than 2 Q O D hn 2 oc gt oO e Any of the OCV Tools can optionally use an AutoFind This step determines the location of the layout at runtime You can set up an AutoFind to use 1 Pin no rotation or 2 Pins rotation Set up the Pins by selecting which layout positions to use on the OCV Tool properties page Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 35 Chapter OCV Ref
413. ult 0 binary threshold is used if Filter Bright Defects is enabled Range 0 to 100 5 74 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Substitute Ignore e Output Mask Type Used in conjunction with the DynamicMask step This property allows three selections None Adds nothing the mask Mask Template Only the foreground area of the symbol is added to the mask This is the default Mask ROI The entire area within the symbol s ROI is added to the mask The remainder of this chapter discusses the following e Substitute Ignore on page 5 75 e Keyboard Input of Match String on page 5 78 e External Input of Match String on page 5 82 e Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAY OUT Command on page 5 90 e OCV Tips on page 5 105 QI e Troubleshooting on page 5 107 Substitute Ignore When training either an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool the Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters dialog box Figure 5 50 is displayed at the end of the learn layout The string of layout characters is displayed at the top This dialog box allows characters to be substituted into the layout or ignored entirely from the layout Click Disapprove to return to the Setup Mode Train dialog box and retrain the current tool Click Approve to accept the Inspect Chars and return to the Setup Mode Train screen to train any remaining tools Click Substitute to initiate the Substitute Ignore window and modify the
414. um the symbol fails Increasing final residue accepts symbols of lower quality Final Residue Largest Blob After performing a set of morphological operations on the residue image the largest blob is found in the residue image If the area of this blob is greater than the user selectable maximum the symbol fails Runtime ID Checking For the font based tools OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool When a symbol is trained and added to an OC VFont it is compared to other symbols already in the OC VFont 5 2 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCV Inspection Note OC VFont boxes must be the same size in order to utilize Runtime ID tests If the two symbols being compared are found to be similar tests are set up that verify that the correct symbol is present at runtime If it cannot be determined that the correct symbol is present at runtime the symbol fails the inspection Additional Filters e Character Expansions are useful when dealing with print from a dot matrix printer or any print that is broken up in segments The broken print is filtered so that it becomes solid by expanding the segments until they come together Dilations expand each segment Then erosions decrease the size of the character in every direction except the direction in which the segments have connected Dilations and erosions work together to make the segments solid without making the character fatter e Filter Bright Defects are useful
415. up Using the Network Browser The Network Browser displays all of the Smart Cameras that can be detected on your Ethernet port Now that you have switched your PC and all of your Smart Cameras to a static IP address verify that they can talk to each other by launching this utility 1 Go to Start gt All Programs gt Visionscape gt Tools gt Visionscape Network Browser When the Network Browser window is displayed Figure B 11 you should see your Smart Camera s listed if Visionscape can detect them over your Ethernet connection You can communicate with Smart Cameras listed with black text You cannot communicate with Smart Cameras listed with red text Generally this means that they are configured to use a different network number than that of your PC Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Connecting Smart Cameras to a PCusing Static IP Addresses amp FIGURE B 11 Network Overview Dialog Box 5 Network Overview Standalone Refresh Adapter Broadcom Netxtreme 57x8 Gigabit Controller Packet Sch Change Network Settings UJ q vv k Cam era Netw Model Name IP Address Cycles m HEI600TS MyHawkEye 16007 192 168 254 4 Note The HawkEye 1600T Smart Camera announces its presence on the network by sending out a UDP packet every 5 seconds This is how Visionscape discovers cameras on the network So when you first start the Network Browser it may take up to 5 seconds for your Sma
416. urn to the previous tool in the Job definition With AutoStep Off right click on Previous to move backward to the previous snapshot in your Job Next This is a Supervisor level function Next enables you to go forward to the next tool in the Job definition if the current tool is trained successfully With AutoStep Off right click on Next to move forward to the next snapshot in your Job Next Camera This is a Supervisor level function Next Camera is displayed when AutoStep is off Clicking Next Camera allows you to move ahead to the next Smart Camera s view and to its tools in your Job 6 20 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Train and Tryout Tool Settings This is a Programmer level function Tool Settings displays the Tool Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 6 16 This shows the training and inspection parameters relative to the selected tool FIGURE 6 16 Tool Settings Dialog Box Tool Settings OCVF ont Tool AuteFind OnePt Locator NewFont LayoutS4 gt 7 a g P g Default Datum Order OCVFont Tool Inputs Tg Use AutoFind VY fy AutoFind Pin 1 Index 1 fy AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 fay Max Contrast Difference 100 g Individual Symbol Search X 3 g Individual Symbol Search Y 3 Te Test For Character Breaks 7 T Runtime ID Checking VY B Graphics Level Show ROI Only Options This is a Supervisor level function O Options displays the Tryout Options di
417. ut Go To Aperture page 4 32 Assisted Learn page 4 23 Calibrated page 4 23 Calibration Cell Unit page 4 32 Calibration Contrast Max page 4 31 Calibration Contrast Min page 4 32 Calibration Enable page 4 23 Cell Size page 4 25 Cell Unit Report page 4 32 Contrast Report page 4 31 ECC Level page 4 25 Finetune Method page 4 28 Graphics Level page 4 31 Height pixels page 4 24 Image Style page 4 25 Match String page 4 23 Match String Enable page 4 23 Matrix Angle Variation page 4 26 Matrix Orientation page 4 25 Matrix Polarity page 4 25 Matrix Size Variation page 4 26 Minimum Border Integrity page 4 26 Minimum Edge Strength page 4 26 No of Matrix Columns page 4 25 No of Matrix Rows page 4 24 Print Verification page 4 30 Robust Locate page 4 30 Samples per Matrix Cell page 4 26 Search Direction page 4 27 4 22 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool TABLE 4 4 Links to Property Descriptions continued For Information About Go To Search Speed page 4 27 Target Contrast page 4 32 Threshold Method page 4 27 Tool Time Out ms page 4 24 Train String Only page 4 23 Use Wildcard in Match String page 4 24 Warp Method page 4 27 Width pixels page 4 24 Width to Height Ratio page 4 26 Settings Assisted Learn Provides an additional shape to place over the Data Matrix to show the system the exact location and size of the Data Matrix Check to
418. ut Mask is automatically enabled When enabled the OC VFontless Tool must be trained After it is trained the mask pixels are highlighted in red When disabled this property will allow the OCVFontless Tool to retain the child mask generating step but does not apply the mask at runtime Default Disabled Enable Mask Output Enables and disables the creation and output of a mask at runtime This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Default Disabled Mask Number of Dilations Sets the number of expansions that are performed on the output mask This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Default Disabled Graphics Level Sets up different levels of debug graphics at runtime The default Show ROI Only only shows the ROI boxes associated with the OCVFontless Tool and the characters being inspected green for passed red for failed When set to Show None no graphics are shown at runtime Show Basic Graphics a number indicating the symbol s position in the layout is shown along with the ROI boxes as shown in Figure 5 42 5 62 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 5 42 Graphics Level Example Show Details residue graphics are displayed green pixels are
419. uto Segmentation training of OCVFonts is useful for quick demos or to quickly prove out an inspection scenario While the behavior described may cause confusion at train time when using a frozen image the Runtime inspections remain intact The runtime inspections do not use the Sobel Edge Enhancement templates 5 110 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Troubleshooting The default value for Num of Border Spaces to Add may need to be increased to 2 This would give the Automatic Segmentation characters more border space with which to train the characters While this would probably help with the Read Match increasing the border space may cause some symbol overlap in cases where the symbols are close together Microscan recommends manual training of the OC VFont QI i tez oc gt e e Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 111 Chapter OCV Reference 5 112 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual CHAPTER 6 Setup Mode Reference This chapter presents the Visionscape I PAK HE Setup Mode functionality and describes the following Overview You enter Setup Mode by entering correctly either the Programmer s default password 0101 or the Supervisor s default password 1010 from Run Mode In Setup Mode you create and program Jobs retrain tools and review end of batch results The Setup Mode window is displayed in Figure 6 1 Setup Mode Menus on page 6 3
420. utomatic Min Sharpness Allows the FontSymbols trained and added to the Runtime Font to have a sharpness tolerance automatically calculated for them This automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 65 of the sharpness value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled Apply Automatic Min Contrast Allows the FontSymbols trained and added to the Runtime Font to have a contrast tolerance automatically calculated for them This automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 50 of the contrast value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled Allowed Thickening of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to grow along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of 5 48 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVRuntimeTool pixels away from the edge in the direction away from the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels Allowed Thinning of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to shrink along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction toward the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels e Max Contrast Difference Sets the maximum percentage difference between the calculated contrast values for
421. utput FrameAverage Filter GainOffset Filter ImageView Step IntelliFind Tool IntersectLines Meas LeastS quaresCircle Fit LeastS quaresLine Fit Loop Step MeanLP Filter OCRFixedFont Tool OCRTrainableF ont Tool OC Font Tool OC Fontless Tool OC RuntimeT ool OnePt Locator Projection Tool Pt to Line Distance Rect Warp RobustCircle Fit RobustLine Fit Sequence Step Sobel Filter Template Find ThreePt Locator Tolerance Meas Trajectory Step TwoPt Locator VarAssign Step Vector Tool VYectorGroup Tool Wait Step With Step Step 18 Step 17 Cancel 17 Click to select OOCVFontless Tool and click OK 18 Right click on Acquire 1 Click to select Wait Step and click OK This displays the Product Creation dialog box shown in Figure 2 15 FIGURE 2 15 Product Creation OCVFontless Tool Acquire 1 Tools Detail Acquire 1 Camera 1 OC VFontless Tool Wait Step Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 2 13 Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials Chapter Visionscape I PAK HE Tutorials 19 Click OK This returns you to the dialog box shown in Figure 2 13 Product Creation Acquire 1 on page 2 12 20 Click OK This displays the Save Product dialog box as shown in Figure 2 16 FIGURE 2 16 Save Product Dialog Box Save Product xj Product Directory C scape l Pak_HESjobs Available Products Product Description sample Job Created Friday June 27 2008 12 33 5
422. uts N A Outputs N A Error Messages The least significant digits of reported Error Messages may be interpreted with the information in Table 4 3 4 16 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Barcode Reading TABLE 4 3 Barcode Error Messages General Error Code IP NO EDGE CANDIDATE FOUND 12701 T1 IP_FIRST_EDGE_NOT_FOUND_OR_TOO_SMALL 127004 IP_SECOND_EDGE_NOT_FOUND 127005 IP_THIRD_EDGE_NOT_ FOUND 127011 IP_FOURTH_EDGE_NOT_FOUND 127012 IP_FOUR_CORNERS_NOT_FOUND 127020 IP_SIZE_TEST_ FAILED 127021 IP_ROW_COL_TEST_FAILED 127022 4 IP_INSPECTION_TIMEOUT 127030 IP_BORDER_MATCH_TEST_FAILED 127033 IP_ECC_UNDECODABLE 127048 5 IP_CONTRAST_CALIBRATION_ FAILURE 127050 IP_CELLUNIT_CALIBRATION_FAILURE 127051 E IP_VERIFICATION PROCESS ERROR 127100 5 T IP_VERIFICATION_UNSUPPORTED 127101 lt a IP_VERIFICATION_ TIMEOUT 127102 _ IP_ISOV_ECC200_ REQUIRED 127110 IP_ISOV_APERTURE_TOO_ SMALL 127111 IP_ISOV_APERTURE_TOO_LARGE 127112 IP_ISOV_INSUFFICIENT_SPACE 127113 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_F_1 127114 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_F_2 127115 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_F_3 127116 IP_ISOV_FAIL_RDA_STEP_A E 127117 QRCODE_DESIGN_UNIMPLEMENTED 128400 QRCODE_IP_GENERAL_ERROR 128401 QRCODE_IP_RATIO_ERROR 128402 QRCODE_IP_FINDER_ERROR 128403 QRCODE_IP_LINE_FIT_ERROR 128404 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 4 17 Chapt
423. vement in Y Set the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the Y axis relative to other symbols from its trained position QI Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting Individual Symbol Search Y which limits the search range in Y to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction e Residue Limit Units Inputs the residue limits in either a maximum pixel count value or a percentage value percentage value is based on the number of On pixels in the trained template When the value of this property changes the values of Initial Residue Limit and Final Residue Limit are changed to match the selected units e p i tez oc gt e e Default Percentage e Initial Residue Limit Provides a quick check of the character quality and correctness The initial residue calculation is done before any image processing is done on the residue image When the system looks at the symbol being inspected it determines the residue of the symbol which is a count of those pixels that differ between the trained template and the current image Based on the value of this property the system determines if the Visionscape J Pak HE User Manual 5 69 Chapter OCV Reference residue is within tolerances If it is not within tolerances the symbol fails Otherwise the system continues on with the rest of
424. verlapping standards In the one standard the leading 0 is implied and not output In the other standard all of the characters are displayed Therefore if a user in Europe had an EAN code that would be a valid UPC a user in the United States would default to reporting it as a UPC without the leading 0 However if a user in the United States wanted it reported with the leading zero that user must enable Output UPC as EAN and the leading zero will be sent as part of the decode string e BC412 QR Code Polarity Sets the polarity of a BC412 or QR Code Auto Default Light on Dark Dark on Light e BC412 Start Stop Enable this property to read a SEMI BC412 barcode with a start and stop pattern The default is disabled indicating a non SEMI BC412 barcode without a start and stop pattern e BC412 Check Sum Enable this property to read a SEMI BC412 barcode with a checksum The default is disabled indicating a non SEMI BC412 barcode without a checksum character c oO DD Sg a lt 3 e BC412 Remove Check Sum Display When this property is enabled the checksum character will not be displayed The default is disabled meaning that the checksum character will be displayed e BC412 Decode Left Right When not selected the data will be decoded from right to left This is only useful when Start Stop is not selected Default Selected left to right decoding of data Note
425. visor Activities Font Training Changing Tool Settings Changing Product Settings Changing System Settings Editing Tool Set Job View Launching Windows Explorer Saving Product Definition Calibrating Shutting Down Il PAK E UM O lt Changing Lot at Run Time Cancel The Programmer can define the following activities for a Supervisor Allowing access train mode to tool settings font training and scaling j o rom c 20 25 52 Or 7p Changing Product and System settings Editing the Tool Set Job View Shutting down I PAK HE launching the Windows Explorer calibration and saving Product definitions Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 5 Chapter Setup Mode Reference Changing Lot at Run Time By default this is enabled the Supervisor is allowed to change the lot string using the Change Lot button on the main Run Mode screen When the Supervisor clicks Change Lot he or she is prompted for either the Programmer or Supervisor password When Changing Lot at Run Time is disabled the Supervisor is not allowed to change the lot string using the Change Lot button on the main Run Mode screen When the Supervisor clicks Change Lot he or she is prompted for the Programmer password 21 CFR Part 11 Menu For complete information regarding 21 CFR Part 11 and its menu see Chapter 3 21 CFR Part 11 Calibration Menu Note If you are using
426. when dust or other material settles on the print and appears brighter than the print in the image This filter eliminates the bright specks and allows proper inspection of the print QI Note Typically this test is not used in pharmaceutical applications Brief Descriptions i tez oc gt e e e OCVFont An OCVFont step is a container of one or more FontSymbol steps The OC VFont contains a default FontSymbol that is used only for setting default parameters parameters that any FontSymbol will inherit when inserted into the OCVFont One or more OC VFonts are required for font based OCV OCVFonts are created and modified using the Custom Properties dialog box of the OC VFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool OCVFonts are stored separately from the inspection Job file in the Vscape Jobs Fonts folder e FontSymbol A FontSymbol is a collection of template images settings and tolerances that inspect a character or logo at runtime Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 5 3 Chapter OCV Reference OCVFont Tool An OCVFont Tool uses an OCVFont to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OC VFont are in which locations in the FOV Once the layout is learned the OC VFont Tool expects to find these symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the data from the FontSymbols in the OCVFont to verify the quality of the characters being inspected OCVRuntimeTool
427. x Product Settings Vision Devices Hardware Selection Run l Pak on Up to 4 Smart Cameras by Selecting them from the List Below and then Clicking Here Available Smart Cameras Network El HawkEyeE1000E Ob HawkEyeE 10065 EF HawkEyeE 10028 E HawkEyeE1FF00 MyHawkEye_1600T HI Chis1600TS E HawkEyeE 10003 E HawkEveE 1FFFB Press Ctrl Key to Select Multiple Devices Press Shift Key to Select a Range 8 Select a device Then click the Run I PAK on button Figure 2 6 above the device you selected This displays the Product Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 2 7 9 For Camera 1 change Camera Type to match the Smart Camera currently connected to Camera 1 on the I PAK HE change Trigger Acquire Method to Continuous Figure 2 7 2 8 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 7 Product Settings Dialog Box Cameras Tab MyHawkEye_1600T N Camera Type HE1600TS 648x494 X Trigger cquire Method Continuous Jul a 1 Trigger 1 0 2 22 Trigger Polarity 8 Z 5 Lighting ort On O Strobe S gt Power Strobe Exposure Time micro secs j 6000 Camera Button Text M yHawkEye_1600T 10 Click Next This displays the Product Settings dialog box Data Valid tab as shown in Figure 2 8 FIGURE 2 8 Product Settings Dialog Box Data Valid Tab MyHawkEye_1600T Data Valid Duration ms
428. xel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This property is only used when Auto Thresholding Enabled is enabled Default 10 Range 0 to 255 e Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto is enabled Default 0 Range 64 to 64 e Threshold Displays the dynamically calculated threshold when auto is enabled When auto is disabled the value of this property is the threshold that is used by the parent step Default 135 Range 0 to 255 The ComputePolarity step of the OCVFontless Tool is used for automatic segmentation of the image during training FIGURE 5 44 ComputePolarity Properties Page OCVFontless Tool TwoPt Locator AutoFind AutoThreshold ComputePolarity ai 9 Bl Ai Default Datum Order ComputePolarity Inputs EB Polarity Automatic v Light on Dark Dark on Light Automatic e Polarity Allows the step to be set up to always return Light On Dark always return Dark_On_ Light or return an automatically determined polarity 5 64 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual OCVFontless Tool Default Automatic Step Tips After the OC VFontless Tool has been trained positioning the mouse over the ROI displays a Step Tip This Step Tip provides information and graphical feedback for individual symbols when the mouse is over a symbol area Train information includes the Area of the sym
429. xit without changing the Product This remainder of this section describes the following e Change Lot Feature starting on page 6 11 e Location of Jobs Folder starting on page 6 14 e Archiving amp Restoring Products starting on page 6 14 Change Lot Feature From the Change Product dialog box the Supervisor can change O e The match string for a Barcode Tool a Data Matrix Tool and an OCRTrainableFont Tool after the tool has been trained initially using the Change Lot feature The expected Font Tool layout after the tool has been trained initially Note You must ensure that the Font Tool has already been trained its number of layout characters is not changing its AutoFind characters are not changing and its character symbols are well defined in the font library Lo e 9 c o 25 52 Or e I PAK HE provides a unique default password 1101 for Operators this password allows Operators to perform a Change Lot function but does not allow them to enter Setup Mode When 21 CFR Part 11 user control is enabled Operators can perform a Change Lot function Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 11 Chapter Setup Mode Reference When you click Change Lot a dialog box is displayed similar to the dialog boxes in Figure 6 10 and Figure 6 11 It displays the full path of all tool names and their associated match strings or layouts for the Data Matrix Barcode and Font Tools res
430. y for each search iteration e Accept Threshold This is the minimum correlation match percentage Results e Point of Best Match This is the X Y location and angle of the best match found Q0 FS Ec OR hat a Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual D 17 Appendix Perl Gems Tips amp Techniques D 18 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Tt ndex Symbols cal File 6 7 text Component 6 25 Numerics 0101 programmer default password 6 1 6 2 6 4 7 13 1010 supervisor default password 6 1 6 2 6 4 7 13 21 CFR Part 11 xviii 3 1 access levels defined 3 2 administrator 3 4 default password 3 4 6 91 default user name 3 4 6 91 areas of concern 3 19 audit trail 3 2 turning on 3 6 configuration 3 6 6 91 files 3 2 enabled operator can perform change lot 6 11 end of batch reports 3 7 jobs 3 1 reconciliation of configuration files 3 12 statistics files 3 2 support 1 6 5 port Ethernet Switch B 1 A A4 Format 6 95 Accept Threshold D 17 Access Level Menu change change lot password 6 4 password 6 4 configure supervisor access 6 5 operator 6 4 programmer 6 4 supervisor 6 4 Access Levels defined 3 2 Acquire button train and tryout 6 23 tab C 3 Adaptive threshold method dot peen or inkjet 4 28 thresholding 4 53 4 56 Add a new user button 3 15 inspection no snapshot 6 52 Advanced Settings 6 42 button 6 42 C 3 close advanced 6 98 create a product 6 43 edit
431. y going to Start gt Visionscape gt Visionscape I PAK_HE As part of the I PAK HE start up sequence a splash screen is displayed and reports the start up sequence as shown in Figure A 1 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual A 5 Appendix Installation amp Software FIGURE A 1 I PAK HE Splash Screen Visionscape I PAK HE VISIONS GAPE Initializing Copyright 2008 Microscan All rights reserved After starting the interface the Smart Camera is rebooted automatically Once this is complete the last run Job is downloaded and transfers control to Run Mode awaiting a trigger if one is configured UPS amp UPS Software Microscan mandates the use of an uninterruptable power supply UPS model Smart UPS SC 420 with the I PAK HE system The UPS providesa safety factor so that your vision inspection system is protected from power outages and brown outs The UPS ensures that I PAK HE stays running by providing battery backup for a user specified time then gracefully shutting down the I PAK HE program saving all batch data Job name counters etc and finally performing a PC shutdown before removing power to the PC Note You may lose inspection counts if you do not use a UPS A 6 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual UPS amp UPS Software When power is restored the PC restarts and the I PAK HE program starts up downloading the last run Job restoring all previous counters and awai
432. y the OK button will take over the selection The Select all button allows you to select all entries in the list You will see a listing of all the selected results from the Inspection Step s property page in the Select Results to Upload field Click any of these results to be output via the RS 232 Communications Port Click OK to exit the dialog box O Note You may select any or all of these inspection results to be reported at runtime through RS 232 RS 232 result reporting will affect inspection time and system throughput The fewer items you output the more efficient I PAK HE will be If the trigger method is set to continuous or the inspection is triggered at high rates the flood of inspection results can bog down the PC s resources making the mouse unresponsive c ha al am v 9 e 9 3 kan Q 2 Once this product s tools are trained you can go into Run Mode Using a program such as HyperTerminal you can verify that the inspection results are being output from I PAK HE to the Communications port specified For example Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual 6 75 Chapter Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 6 53 Sample RS 232 Results Output S6uCeR OP 44 u i V Terminal Phonebook Call Log Lists Shapshot1 Blob Tool BlobFilter Center Point Each grouping of results is terminated with an EOT The format of these inspection results is
433. yout Error Debug 5 94 RS 232 ChangeLayout Success Response 5 96 ChangeLayout Debug 5 97 RS 232 ChangeLayout Error Messages 5 98 Ethernet Input of Layout String 5 99 Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Usage 5 99 Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Syntax 5 99 Il PAK HE User Interface 5 100 Ethernet ChangeLayout Error Debug 5 100 Ethernet ChangeLayout Success Response 5 102 ChangeLayout Debug 5 103 Ethernet ChangeLayout Error Messages 5 104 OCV Tips 5 105 OCVFont 5 105 Layout Step 5 105 DefaultSymbol 5 105 OCVRuntimeTool 5 105 Layout Step 5 106 Converting Jobs with Embedded OCVFonts 5 106 Troubleshooting 5 107 Training Font Based Tools Read Match 5 107 The Behavior 5 108 The Explanation 5 108 Training 5 108 Correct Character Training 5 108 Automatic Segmenting Character Training 5 108 Example with Automatic Segment 5 109 Example with Manually Trained Characters 5 109 Conclusions 5 110 X Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Contents CHAPTER 6 Setup Mode Reference 6 1 Overview 6 1 Setup Mode Menus 6 3 File Menu 6 3 Access Level Menu 6 4 21 CFR Part 11 Menu 6 6 Calibration Menu 6 6 Image Menu 6 7 Help Menu 6 8 Change Product 6 10 Change Lot Feature 6 11 Location of Jobs Folder 6 14 Automatic Backup of Jobs 6 14 Archiving amp Restoring Products 6 14 Setting Archival Pathname 6 14 Job Archive Dialog Box 6 14 Archiving OCVFonts 6 16 Train and Tryout 6 17 AutoStep or Wizard Training Method 6 18 Image 6 18 Job View 6 18 Completing AutoStep
434. ze is zero unknown bbb inspection timeout in milliseconds not shown when timeout is set to zero no timeout Robust displayed only when Robust Locate is selected FastWarp displayed only when FastWarp is selected not shown when SlowWarp is selected Outputs Error Bits cc Contrast dd Where cc number of error bits detected in the Data Matrix dd contrast of the Data Matrix Error Messages The least significant digits of reported Error Messages may be interpreted with the information in Table 4 5 TABLE 4 5 Data Matrix Error Messages General Error Code IP_NO_EDGE CANDIDATE FOUND 127001 T IP_FIRST_EDGE_NOT_FOUND_OR_TOO_SMALL 127004 IP_SECOND_EDGE_NOT_FOUND 127005 IP_THIRD_EDGE_NOT FOUND 127011 IP_FOURTH_EDGE_NOT_FOUND 127012 IP_FOUR_CORNERS_NOT_FOUND 127020 IP_SIZE_TEST_ FAILED 127021 IP_ROW_COL_TEST_FAILED 127022 IP_INSPECTION_TIMEOUT 127030 IP_BORDER_MATCH_TEST_FAILED 127033 IP_ECC_UNDECODABLE 127048 IP_CONTRAST_CALIBRATION_ FAILURE 127050 4 40 Visionscape I Pak HE User Manual Data Matrix Tool TABLE 4 5 Data Matrix Error Messages continued General Error Code IP_CELLUNIT_CALIBRATION_FAILURE 127051 IP_VERIFICATION PROCESS ERROR 127100 IP_VERIFICATION UNSUPPORTED 127101 IP_VERIFICATION_ TIMEOUT 127102 IP_ISOV_ECC200_ REQUIRED 127110 IP_

Visionscape I-PAK HE User Manual V374

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents